Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction Canada and China each have their own unique traits when it comes to their economic systems since each country’s system was a product of their history and their needs in the past.
Comparison Both countries are considered well to do nations. Canada belongs to the top ten wealthiest nations while China is one of the top three largest economies of the world (Barboza, 21).
Furthermore, both these nations cannot be classified as either communist or capitalist system as they contain different elements. Canada is classified as a mixed market economy while China’s economy has been called many things including market socialism and state capitalism.
Economic freedom in Canada differs substantially from that of China. The latter country has been identified as one of the most preferable when it comes to economic freedom as government interference is kept at a minimum and start up procedures are some of the easiest and most convenient in the world. Business costs in the G7 have been described as some of the lowest in Canada.
Foreigners only need about three days to start up a business and may only have to go through a two step procedure when doing so. Even the issue of corporate governance is given a lot of precedence in this nation. On the other hand, while China may be having a high number of multinationals located in the country, it still has a long way to go in terms of economic freedom. Government corruption still prevents it from reaching its potential.
Furthermore, the banking system in China is yet to be redefined in order to make it more feasible towards the creation of some of these other systems. Additionally, corporate governance is a serious issue in China because the rule of law is not as solid as it ought to be (Starr, 54).
Both countries were affected by the global financial crisis that started in 2007. It can be argued that this was because they both depend on the largest economy of the world (the United States) for trade. However, it should be noted that the extent to which each country was affected differed. Canada is more dependent on the United States than China is. In fact, in 2008, about 280.8 billion US dollars worth of imports were from the US yet its total imports amount to 442.9 billion US dollars (Statistics Canada, 48).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This is the reason why its trade deficit transformed from a surplus of 46.9 billion in 2008 to a deficit of about 4.8 billion Canadian dollars in 2009. Things have worsened in the subsequent years since it is predicted that their debt will amount to 49.2 billion Canadian dollars. The country has been trying to gain autonomy from its neighbor the United States but this has been rather difficult owing to years of codependency.
China was also affected by the global crisis because of its inclination towards exports. However, because its biggest trading partners exclude the US which was the most affected by the global crisis, then China has not felt these effects as much as their neighbors. It has still had to roll out a stimulus plan to get back on track.
Canada’s economy, much like most developed nations is service based. Financial institutions and other similar organizations drive this economy hence explaining why it was highly affected by the global recession. However, the latter country differs from other developed nations because it uses conservative lending practices. It has been shown that Canada will possibly be one of the strongest countries to rebound out of such a crisis because of those policies.
However, agriculture and the industrial sectors surprisingly account for a huge portion of this country’s earnings. This is partly because Canada is endowed with a number of resources in mining as well as in agriculture. On the other hand, China is one of those countries that depend on the industrial sector rather than the service based sector for growth.
The injection of government investment into this country caused the heavy industrial sector to soar over the past three decades. However, the light industries are also forces to reckon with since the private sector, which was promoted by the Chinese government, has continued to cause increments in output in the latter country.
In terms of the type of economic system, Canada is a mixed system that is more inclined towards a market economy. Its population is basically very affluent and their living standards can be compared to those of the United States. Furthermore, it has a very skilled labor force and therefore this gives an advantage over and above other nations.
Although the economy of Canada has been steadily increasing over the past four decades, these rates can in no way be compared to growth rates of China. The country boasts of having the highest economic growth rates in the world since it has managed to sustain a rate of ten percent for over thirty years.
We will write a custom Essay on Canada Versus China Economic System specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is the reason why the country got to be one of the largest trading nations of the world. Rapid growth rates were achieved through government initiated reforms that started in the late nineteen seventies. Those interventions caused increased investment in the country and thus had a net effect on the consumption patterns or the standard of living within it (Alon
Urban Affairs Review Essay (Article) custom essay help: custom essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction The article is trying to prove or test if living in greener areas is healthier. This is done in comparison with people who are living in less green areas. It is based on the fact that the quality of ones living environment has become a very important issue to many residents. In addition, it is also vital in spatial planning. The article specifically lays more emphasis on positive impacts of a high-quality residential surrounding. By doing this, more attention has been paid on public health and the general wellbeing of residents.
Discussion The author uses the new urban spatial-mismatch to frame his research. This is because the article talks about spatial health differences. The author has gone ahead to imply that these differences are as a result of causation and selection. Furthermore, there is an argument that green areas attract wealthy people. In the long run, there will be a mismatch as green areas will only be inhabited by healthy people.
The author is liberal in the article. This is because he is not trying to defend the situation on the ground. He argues that special attention should be paid to the mechanisms behind the relationship between health and green space.
This article has been influenced by Verheij. The author refers to a previous article that Verheij had done on the relationship between health and urbanity (Verheij 21). This is further supported by the fact that people who live in rural areas are healthier than those who live in urban areas. Verheijs ideas seem to frame and provide the conceptual framework upon which this article is based. There are various mechanisms that can be used to tell why greener areas are mostly preferred by wealthy people (Verheij 32).
The author relies on data from interviews. Health data was obtained from a study that had been conducted before. In this case, the interview was conducted among various random samples. Geographic information database was also used to obtain environmental data. The Netherland institute for health services also assisted with some important data. Adjustments had to be made to ensure that data is well received and recorded.
The article concludes by arguing that selection effects can be used to offer a good explanation on the relationship between health and green space. Large living environments might not have the ability to reflect various differences. These differences can be in the composition of the population and neighborhoods. In addition, the article did not establish a close relationship between health and green space in small living neighborhoods.
There are various suggestions that have been put forward by the author for further research. For instance, special attention should be paid to mechanisms behind the ultimate relationship between health and green space. This means that more data should be availed to help in further research activities in relation to this topic. More research should be done to know if green space is a necessity or a luxury from different perspectives.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This article is very good as it has a very strong implication on spatial planning. Currently, there is an ongoing process of densification of cities that might end up having various negative effects. Therefore, this article raises more awareness on the irreversible nature of the ongoing densification process.
Conclusion The author uses the new urban spatial-mismatch to frame his research. This is because the article talks about spatial health differences. He has gone ahead to imply that these differences are as a result of causation and selection. Furthermore, there is an argument that green areas attract wealthy people. In the long run, there will be a mismatch as green areas will only be inhabited by healthy people.
Special attention should be paid to mechanisms behind the ultimate relationship between health and green space. This means that more data should be availed to help in further research activities in relation to this topic. More research should be done to know if green space is a necessity or a luxury from different perspectives.
Works Cited Verheij, A, Robert. Urban-rural variations in health. Utrecht: Utrecht University, 1999. Print.
Elements of the Poems under Consideration Essay online essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Representation of Theme in Frost’s Road Not Taken
Discussing Symbolic Meaning of Frost’s Acquainted with the Night
Analysis of Versification in My Papa’s Waltz by Theodore Roethke
Introduction In order to properly analyze the poem, it is necessary to know its main elements. First of all, it is important to define the main them of a poem. In most cases, poems discloses the problem of love, death, friendships of choice making. Second, the poems are often based on symbolic and literal representation of some conceptions. This is carried out through using various stylistic devices.
Finally, the analysis of a poem presupposes the consideration of versification characteristics which contribute to better understanding of poet’s intentions.
Representation of Theme in Frost’s Road Not Taken Road Not Taken is a poem written by poet Robert Frost. While reading the poem, it is possible single out several thematic concerns. One the one hand, the last lines of the verse express the notes of individualism and ironically interpret the author’s searching for his place in life.
In particular, the last two lines – “I took the one less traveled by,/ And that has made all the difference” – implies that the poet was not afraid of taking important decisions (Frost 881). Moreover, this renders the speaker’s desire to remain unconventional and original in searching for unusual way-outs.
Considering another side of the poem, it should be stressed that the work reflects the idea of making choices in life and explaining people’s decisions. In this case, the poem discusses the mains underpinning for rationalizing choices and solutions and sometime those actions can be perceived either with pride or with regret. In addition, by describing two roads, the poet intends to say that everything that happens is the result of actions and non-actions.
A person always takes responsibility for his/her life. This theme of fate and choice is explicitly presented in the following lines: “Two roads diverged in a yellow wood/ And sorry I could not travel both/ And be one traveler not travel both” (Frost 880). Analyzing the above-presented lines in more details, the author, on the one hand, emphasizes that each person should inevitable make one choice out of several. Therefore, human’s life consists of constant decision making that move person further.
As the poem bear an autobiographical character, it is possible to assume that the poet feels some regret for choosing the unknown path in life. Hence hesitates whether “[he] should have ever come back” (Frost 880). The sign, therefore, can express the poet’s disappointment and regret about the path chosen.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Discussing Symbolic Meaning of Frost’s Acquainted with the Night Robert Frost’s poem Acquainted with the Night bears a deep symbolic meaning. In particular, the work reflects authors’ deep depression and isolated existence. He finds himself in an empty place, although he is in the city full of noise and people.
In such a way, he provides a metaphoric comparison city with the night: “I have been one acquainted with the night/ I have walked out in rain – and back in rain/ I have outwalked the furthest city light” (Frost 702). In addition, night also symbolically conveys silence and solitary life of the speaker.
Hence, the poet highlights tat he can “stop the sound of feet” (Frost 702). In other words, the city is so empty that can hear a drop of a pin. By using such word epithets like “saddest”, “unwilling”, and “furthest”, the speaker emphasizes his deep depression (Frost 702). Moreover, Frost compares time with “the luminary clock against the sky” as if intending to underline its indifference to the events and people surrounding him.
The poem also provides interpretation of loneliness by using different metaphors and indifference to an “uninterrupted cry” (Frost 702). More importantly, he perceives this scream as something alien and hostile that does not concern him. By using personification, the poet compares this sound with another world that is separated from the speaker.
The next lines presume that the city and people that surround him are not willing to accept the speaker either: “… But not to call me back or say good-by; And further still at an unearthly height/ One luminary clock against the sky” (Frost 702). In such a way, the author establishes the gap between the inner world of the city and his own. In general, the author put an emphasis on metaphoric constructions and similes.
Analysis of Versification in My Papa’s Waltz by Theodore Roethke My Papa’s Waltz written by Theodore Roethke belongs to iambic trimeter. It means that the poem is composed of three iambic units in one line. The iamb identifies that the stress is posed on the second syllable. It should be stressed that the author makes use of accentual-syllabic iambic trimeter, where each line is composed of three iambic feet.
In the poem, the metric feet successfully vary in accordance with the subject consideration. In order to understand the verse, it is necessary to bracket the first and third stanzas. Hence, the slant rhymes easy and dizzy in the first stanza can be considered as feminine endings whereas knuckle and buckle in the third stanza represents masculine endings, particularly father’s waltzing. Although these lines are not limping iambs, they still create a similar meaning.
We will write a custom Essay on Elements of the Poems under Consideration specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The second stanza, the second line, represents he metrical touch in the form of trochaic foot: “Slid from / the kit / chen shelf” Such form accurately emphasize the demolition of the pans (Roethke 769). Therefore, it is possible to conclude that waltz is not easy to dance.
The second line’s trochee is repeated in the fourth line to emphasize mother’s countenance: “Could not/ unfrown / itself” (Roethke 769). Finally, the second metric foot is read an out spondee: “You beat time on my head with a palm/ caked hard / by dirt” (Roethke 769). In general, the form and rhythm are closely connected with semantic feeling of the poem.
Conclusion In conclusion, the poems presented for analysis have successfully disclosed the main theme, symbolism, and versification characteristics. In particular, the first poem called Road Not Taken has a multidimensional representation of the topic and, therefore, it impels the readers to provide a two-polar approach to characterizing the topic.
The second poem symbolic is largely represented through the use of metaphoric constructions and similes. Finally, the verse analysis of the final poem by Roethke reveals the impact of versification on semantic filling.
Works Cited Frost, Robert. Acquainting with the Night. The Compact Bedford Introduction to, Literature: Reading, Thinking, Writing. US:Bedford/St. Martin’s, 2002 p. 702
Frost, Robert. Road not Taken The Compact Bedford Introduction to Literature: Reading, Thinking, Writing. US:Bedford/St. Martin’s, 2002, pp. 880-881
Roethke, Theodore. My Papa’s WaltzThe Compact Bedford Introduction to Literature: Reading, Thinking, Writing. US:Bedford/St. Martin’s, 2002. p. 769
“Plata O Plomo: Silver or Lead” by Marie Javdani: Critical Analysis college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help
“Plata O Plomo: Silver or Lead” by Marie Javdani is an article that addresses ways of dealing with the out of control drug problem in Colombia. The purpose of the text is to show that the U.S. should seek alternative ways of tackling the problem since the billions of dollars it has been channeling to the country does not seem to do any better.
Therefore, the U.S. should be concerned about cutting the demand for illicit drugs through education and treatment. The former will assist people in stopping using drugs while the latter will be instrumental in making users conversant with the ultimate consequences of their actions.
The majority of Colombians are engaged in the cultivation of cocaine. Its production amounts to about 80% of the world’s total output and a significant quantity of the United States heroin supply. Even though the U.S. sends aid to Latin American governments to fight the illicit trade in drugs, the rate of violence in the country has not changed. That is why Marie Javdani defines alternative ways of tackling the rampant problem.
The Colombians’ primary source of money comes from drug production. According to Javdani, plata o plomo is translated into English as “silver or lead”. The meaning of plata o plomo is that one can either take the money – drug money, bribe money, and so on – or take a bullet (para 4).
In Plata o Plomo: sliver or lead, Javdani tells the stories of two different characters. Miguel, who is a Colombian and does drug production, lives a risky life. On the other hand, Eric, who is an American, uses drugs for a little bit of fun. According to the author, “Eric and Moguel represent opposite poles in what the United States government defines as the “war on drugs.” Miguel’s home is where it starts. Eric’s home is where it ends.”
Amid this “war on drugs,” the Colombian peasants are faced with a dilemma. M.Javdani points out that “for the past forty years, the people of Colombia have found themselves between a rock and a hard place over the production of coca, the plant used for making cocaine and heroin” (para. 6). As shown in Plata o Plomo, drug industry is what most Colombians depend on. At the same time, rebel drug lords have assumed control of it.
The Colombian peasants are often under the threats of these drug lords to choose the “silver or the lead.” The peasants are obliged to allow their lands to be used in the cultivation of Coca; otherwise, they put the lives of their families and themselves at risk. “At the same time, however, the consequence of “cooperation” with the rebels is execution by paramilitary groups or even by the Colombian government” (Javdani, 6).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, in fear of this execution from the authorities, some coca peasants have willingly paid the rebels to protect them from outside interference. In summary, “Plata o Plomo: Silver or Lead” by Marie Javdani illustrates that the abuse of drug pills is an escalating problem that requires the attention of everyone. The war on drugs should not be confined to a particular place. Individuals in schools, homes, and even on the streets should know the effects of their actions when they abuse drugs. The reason why many innocent people are suffering in countries such as Colombia is that people use drugs without knowing the consequences of their actions.
Slavery in Brazil Essay writing essay help
Introduction Slavery is a term used to refer to an affiliation of supremacy and obedience whereby one person possesses another and can extort from the possessed person labor or any other services. Slaves can be people detained against their will, bought or born into this dehumanizing way of life, they are denied the right to leave or to reject work, or even ask for reimbursement.
Slavery in Brazil created the country’s societal arrangement and cultural background. All through the regal period, and for a period of more than six decades after the 1822 independence, slavery was one of the strongholds of the Brazil economy, in particular in the mining and sugar cane production sectors
Slave Trade in Brazil In the years after the 1500s Portuguese colonies situated in Brazil began to import African saves in large numbers. This was easy for them as the Portuguese were in control of several slave trade centres in the coast of West Africa where slaves were sold.
African slaves became the preferred choice to work in big sugar cane plantations and mines as they were resilient to tropical diseases and heat and the fact that they were reluctant to run away from their masters was a good thing for the Portuguese as they made more money this way. Soon after the 1600’s African slaves were found to be engaged in all economic sectors of Brazil. This is because they were good workers who worked hard for their masters; rarely got sick and rarely run off into the jungle.
Slave trade was abolished in May 1888 when Princess Isabel signed the; Lei Aurea, the ‘Golden Law’ that made slave trade illegal therefore legally putting an end to slavery in Brazil. The original script and the pen used to sign this document are preserved in the Brazilian national museum as it part of the history of Brazil. This single document freed the slaves and if it was not signed when it was, maybe slavery would have continued for much longer.
Due to the ending of the slave trade in 1888 in Brazil, the African culture is still very pronounced especially in the Bahia and the Northeast. The African slaves still practiced and practice their native cultures, food, music, dance and customs all which are viewed in the pulsating cultural assortment that is now independent Brazil.
Abolition of slavery in Brazil Brazil was the last country in the Americas to abolish slave trade as slavery. The plight of slaves was noted down in literature that spoke out against slavery and spoke for the slaves themselves. Literature in Brazil included poems that spoke out against the suffering of slaves at the hands of their slave masters who in most cases were than not brutal. Abolitionist literature in Brazil was not limited and each and every person was allowed to freely express themselves and their feelings how they saw fit.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More After independence in Brazil, antislavery appeals were found in local dailies and periodicals majority of these appeals however called for a stop to the slave trade and not slavery itself which is ironic. “In 1850, the travel of human slaves to Brazil was stopped due to the consequence of British political and naval pressure”.
Shortly after the stop of slave trade, literature and poetry that depicted free blacks and slaves positively began to make its way into the market, how ever these works did not openly criticize slavery on its own.
Essays, poems, drama and novels began aggressively attacking slavery as a corrupting authority on white slave holders and as a hindrance on economic progress of the country as a whole. This catalyzed the process of abolishing slave trade and slavery itself and the slaves were set free to find and build their own lives away from the slave lives.
It took some years however before the literature works took centre stage in fighting against slavery and positively stating that the slaves should be set free. Arguments based on the sufferings of the slaves were the basis of majority of the literature works they talked about how much the slaves suffered under their masters and this brought about awareness concerning slavery.
Some of the most famous abolitionist in Brazil include: Antonio Frederico de Castro Alves who was termed as the Conscience of Brazil due to his works that openly denounced slavery Os EScravos which contain poems like “Navio Negreiro: tragedia nomar”, “ O Bandido Negro” and “ Vozes d’Africa” published in 1883.
Other poets; Silvio Romero and Valentim Magalhaes also fanned the flames of abolitionism with depictions of extreme brutality and inhumanity of slavery. On top of poems, novels were written that were against slavery and slave trade for example; Harriet Beecher Stowe’s Uncle Tom’s Cabin published in 1852. This novel showed how innocent slaves suffered at the hands of their masters and their overseers.
Joaquim Manuel de Macedo’s As Vitimas Algozes written in 1869 and Bernardo Guimaraes’s A Escrava Isaura written in 1875. O Abolicionismo by Joaquim Nabuco a statesman written in 1883 is widely noted and accepted as an abolitionist work for its common and political appeal. This book disproved of the underlying principle of pro-slavery forces used in opposition for the continuation of Brazilian slavery.
We will write a custom Essay on Slavery in Brazil specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It is important to note that all the above mentioned works of literature were written before 1888 when the golden rule was signed. This is to show that these literature works played a major part in pushing for the abolishing of slave trade and slavery in Brazil. They played a major role in abolishing slave trade and slavery in Brazil as they identified the pleas and cries of the slaves at the hand of their masters and spoke out these injustices for all people to know.
Ways in which Abolitionism was anti slavery and anti slave in Brazil There were quite a number of ways in which abolitionism was against anti slavery and anti slave in Brazil. This paper will discuss the moral, political, societal motivation behind the abolitionist movement not also forgetting the policies and plans employed in the abolitionist movement. These different ways in which abolitionism is looked upon as being both anti slavery and anti slave will help us understand not only the plight of the slaves but also why other people fought passionately for freedom of slaves and the abolition of slave trade.
Looking at the moral point of view, citizens of Brazil had a number of reasons to be part of the abolitionist movement. Religion was the first moral perspective to join the abolitionist movement, Christians who were at the forefront of this movement believed that it was the duty of the church to correct wrongs made by the society.
Christians viewed slavery as wrong and believed that each person was equal in the eyes of God, so it should also be in the eyes of fellow mankind. Other secular movements joined the movement of abolitionist as they felt slavery was going against the basic foundations of the government as it brought about unfair torment that clearly spelled out inequality among human beings.
The economic and political view of slavery brought about questions of inequality as some politicians saw slavery as being unconstitutional. One of the goals of constitution was to bring equality to all man and slavery was a hindrance to this therefore, the politicians also joined in the abolitionist movement.
Majority of the people were passionate about the cause of ending slavery that they formed a political party that specifically fought for the rights and freedoms of slaves. The fact that the constitution brought forth the equality of all mankind and that citizen also fought for the freedom of the slaves made the abolitionist movement stronger and more effective and finally slave trade and slavery was eradicated all together in Brazil.
Societal reforms were also a huge part of how abolitionist was anti slaves and anti slavery in Brazil. These societal reformers included groups of ethical and outstanding citizens who were concerned with church communities, or new group thinkers. These individuals made it their sole purpose to correct the wrongs of slavery and the wrongs in education, prisons and also voting rights.
These people wanted radical changes in the society that would make the society a much better place to live in for all people. People who joined the reformers were persuaded by the leaders’ views and they saw it as their responsibility to make changes in the society.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Slavery in Brazil by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The abolitionist movement in Brazil was both anti slave and anti slavery as to employ different ways and tactics to use in spreading the cause in order to get many supporters. One of the major ways of distributing the information they had was through use of leaflets that were distributed all over the countryside.
These leaflets were used to tell people and educate them on the reasons they had for being against slavery and about why they wanted to end it. Novels, poems, stories and other literature works were also used in educating people on why slavery needed to be abolished thus getting support for the abolitionist movement. Organizations against slave trade and slavery also came into being and they fought for equality rights of the Brazilian slaves.
These organizations got a lot of support as they were led by prominent people who were passionate about bringing an end to slave trade and slavery. Several revolts and riots organized by these organizations which included free and enslaved men fighting for their freedom this however led to the slaves being deported to Benin, Nigeria and Togo.
Conclusion In conclusion, slave trade and slavery was a booming business in the 1800’s. People were captured from their native lands and sailed hundreds of miles to work in plantations, mines under the cruelty and brutality if their masters. These people were also forced to work in their masters houses performing terrible acts that their overseers and masters demanded. Slaves were uprooted from their lives that they knew only to be forced to adapt to a whole new lifestyle that saw the treated far much worse than animals themselves.
The brutality and cruelty of the masters brought about a lot of suffering on the slaves as they were inflicted with wounds that would take a long time to heal not to mention that the punishments that were mostly beatings that at times resulted in death of the slaves. The slaves would at times result to witchcraft to quell the brutality of their master’s and at times the slaves killed their masters.
Some slaves who opted not to run away continued suffering at the hands of their masters and overseers. The biggest issue about slavery was that some of the slaves were born into it and they knew no other life other than the life of submission, and following orders that resulted in punishment when one disobeyed.
The brutality and cruelty of the masters of these slaves brought about activists that rose and fought against slavery and slave trade. These activists brought forth the abolitionist movement that fought for the freedom of all the slaves in Brazil.
The abolitionist movement approached the issues of slavery and slaves from different view points that included the moral, political, societal motivation. These different view points by different people were all anti slave and anti slavery and pushed for reforms in the society that were going to be of help in getting freedom for the slaves.
The ways in which the abolitionist movement spread it views in the countryside where majority of the population were slaves, helped in drumming up major support for the noble cause of putting an end to slavery and slaves. Through the distribution of pamphlets the abolitionist movement was able to educate the people and get a lot of manpower and individuals to participate in the riots and revolts that were arranged by organizations to drum up support that would fight against slavery and slaves.
References Bentley, J.
Analysis of Music Video Essay essay help online free
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction In this work the discussion is going to focus on a hip hop video by one of the greatest MCs in the industry by the stage name of NAS born Nasir Jones, Nas released the song in 16th April 2002. The song was released by the Columbia records and the distribution is done by III Will Records based in the United States.
The song is the third single in his Album Stillmatic, the Fifth album (Richard 44). When he was a teenager, Nas is believed to have enlisted his close pal and neighbor as his DJ. Nas was initially known during in his early age as Kid wave before he adopted his recent alias name of nasty Nas.
His first appearance was in 1991 where he performed on the main source where he was doing live performance at the barbeque. This is where Nas established himself as a teenage sensational with his performances. In the mid 1992 MC Serch is believed to have approached and secured a contract for Nas with the famous Columbia records where he also acted as his manager in that same year.
Nas first debut solo single was under his name of Nasty Nas that was part of the single halftime that was done by Serch `s sound track that was for the film zebra head. Nas was also featured in Serch solo album and Nas appearance on the back to the Grill again helped in intensifying the interest in Nas. It was during his early appearances in these albums that led to the hailing of his rhyming mastermind skills attracted the attention from the members of the hip hop fraternity.
One of the deadliest tracks so far by Nas is believed to his single going by the title of the One Mic. This song is believed to have brought in a different dimension to the hip hop culture and believes. The presentation of the message is just unbelievable.
Discussion The production was handled by the renowned Hip-hop producer Chucky Thompson and Nas. The song features production procedure that encompassed a quite harmony that progressively increases in intensity and energy until an increasingly amped Nas lets out his lyrical anger bubble over like a final dream combatant strike once too often (Covach 6).
The writer of the song is Nick Butler and he describes the song`s structure as a slow build up from simple scrip to the full production. The composition is a bit interesting in such a way that the song is like two mini hip-hop versions that would be clear when Nas gets to the third verse of the script where he does the same thing in reverse (Walker 11). The final verse is also seen reversing the formula where Nas starts from the louder to soft spoken thus getting the audience closer to his rapping and the lyrics.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The song is unique; its starting is slow with evident deliberate flow and beats. The slow beat that the song starts with is suggestive of a crappy R
Rewards relating to Performance Appraisal Process Term Paper college essay help: college essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Main objectives of performance management systems
Features of an effectual performance feedback practice
Employee rewards and how powerful of a motivator they are
Some effectual and cost-effective means of rewarding employees
Introduction A performance appraisal, also referred to as an employee appraisal, is a process that is used to assess how an employee carries out his or her duties.
The assessment is normally carried out by the concerned overseer or manager to establish one’s performance in terms of excellence, capacity, cost, and time (Archer North
William Faulkner and His Rose for Emily Essay (Critical Writing) essay help online
William Faulkner is considered to be one of the most prolific writers and among the most influential ones for that matter in the last century in American Literature. His numerous contributions to the literary field were so immense and, as a result, he became a Nobel Laureate and won the Nobel Prize for Literature in 1949.
His oeuvres range from novels to short stories and poems, and he has created a permanent spot in the history of American literature. A Rose for Emily is regarded as one of the most outstanding and the most controversial pieces of work. This story is full of captivating details which can make a short story really interesting for the reader and for the critics.
On the one hand, the vast majority of critics admit that it is not a true style that was preferred by William Faulkner. On the other hand, it is always interesting to develop various experiments and intrigue the audience with extremely captivating ideas. In fact, William Faulkner made a successful attempt to impress the reader: his A Rose for Emily is a unique collection of ideas and themes which are always interesting to read and evaluate.
In spite of the fact that a number of negative opinions were developed around the story, even negative criticism attracted people’s attention and prove how mature the writer could be in the chosen style. Some critics defined A Rose for Emily as a kind of exploitative story not inherent to Faulkner, still, they talked about it and made the author recognizable. People said that even really talented writers could become famous and gain desirable respect and recognition only after their deaths.
William Faulkner proved that popularity had a variety of sides, and he chose the one that made his famous during his life, and immortal after his death. A Rose for Emily is the story that is characterized by numerous critical opinions: readers found the story interesting, unusual, and educative; and critics tried to admit as many negative or weak points as possible and prove that the chosen style, relations between the characters, and even frequent use of flashbacks were not winning enough to introduce the most amazing work ever.
William Faulkner usually chose some unpredictable development of the events in order to impress the reader and in order to make critics notice his work. Some critics admit that this story was full of “history’s unwillingness to advance, evolve, or progress” (Aboul-Ela 18). During his life, Faulkner was able to get a number of various opinions and attitudes to his work, still, he was always confident of his abilities and writing style.
In general, the criticism that was developed during the time when the author was alive had more negative than positive nature, and it was hard to recognize a true interpretation of a story and unclear narration offered. So that “the critical cannon of A Rose for Emily has become as bloated as the character herself” (Farnoli, Golay, and Hamblin 243).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There were many different themes which have been criticized, and critics found it rather interesting to discover weak and strong points of the story: flashbacks which helped to understand that “aunt Emily was … a little different” (Faulkner and Robinette 10) seemed to be weak enough to explain the essence of the author’s message and the method of characterization seemed to be more strange.
Much attention was paid to the relations between Emily and her father which lead to the tragic end of the relations with Homer. It is always interesting to define who should be blamed for a human death, women’s tears, and pain that may be spread over many people around.
In fact, with the help of a critical overview, it was possible for the reader to comprehend a true genre of the shot story, and it was not a horror story but an educative lesson that proved ho blind people with their assumptions could be.
In spite of the fact that Faulkner was known during his life and a number of his works had been already recognized, not all readers were able to accept his new decision to introduce horrors. And some reader accepted A Rose for Emily not as “a ghost story at all but rather a story of a woman with a domineering father who grows old and dies in the small… town” (Marius and Anderson 5).
In my opinion, this particular story by William Faulkner is characterized by the opinions which could be hardly differentiated before and after his death. There are many supporters and opponents of his talent as they were during his life. It is not very difficult to define some powerful aspects of the story like an amazing flashback at the end of the story when Homer was discovered on Emily’s bed. This idea proved that the power of a woman is worth attention and recognition. Even now the relations between women and men are not similar to each other, and each story may have its own end either dramatic or happy.
This is why there are so many reasons to respect the achievements of the author and his ideas which are expressed through the story. A Rose for Emily seemed to be an immortal calling by Faulkner with the help of which he reminds the readers that each type of relations without considering whether it is developed at early times (like it was with Emily’s father) or when a person grows up (the relations with Homer) has its own consequences and may influence a lot of aspects which are so crucial for a human life.
The work was first published in 1930 in a copy of Forum, a magazine (Reuben). It was easily one of those short stories that featured most in many collections of short stories. It was a work that was not easy to interpret. This is why so many possible and plausible interpretations appeared within a short period of time. The story was popular at the time of its publication. “A Rose for Emily is by far the best-known, most reprinted, most widely read, and most discussed short story” (Towner and Carothers 63).
We will write a custom Critical Writing on William Faulkner and His Rose for Emily specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In general, the story A Rose for Emily introduced by William Faulkner at the beginning of the 20th century is a perfect lesson for people who live in modern world. Very often people are blind because of the opportunities offered and cannot define their own weaknesses. On the one hand, it is a terrible truth that has to be admitted and cannot be understood. And on the other hand, A Rose for Emily becomes more amazing and educative story that fulfils this life and helps to discover the essence of the life.
Works Cited Aboul-Ela, Hosam. Other South: Faulkner, Coloniality, and the Mariategui Tradition. Pittsburg: University of Pittsburg Press, 2007. Print.
Fargnoli, Nicholas, Golay, Michael, and Hamblin, Robet. Critical Companion to William Faulkner: A Literary Reference to His Life and Work. New York: Infobase Publishing, 2008. Print.
Faulkner, William and Robinette, Joseph. A Rose for Emily. Woodstock, IL: Dramatic Publishing, 1983. Print.
Marius, Richard and Anderson, Nancy. Reading Faulkner: Introductions to the First Thirteen Novels. Knoxville: The University of Tennessee Press, 2006. Print.
Reuben, Paul P. “Chapter 7: William Faulkner.” PAL: Perspectives in American Literature- A Research and Reference Guide. 2010. Web.
Towner, Theresa and Carothers, James. Reading Faulkner: Glossary and Commentary. Collected Stories. Mississippi: The University of Mississippi Press, 2006. Print.
The United States Civil war Essay essay help online: essay help online
The historic United States Civil War, which commenced with the attack of Fort Sumter on 12 April 1861, and climaxed when the South admitted defeat in April 1865, is regarded as one of the deadliest internal conflicts in the history of the country. The battle left about six hundred thousand men dead and massive destruction of infrastructure took place. Eleven Southern states who were fighting for the abolition of slave trade wanted to withdraw from the greater United States of America.
Therefore, under the leadership of Jefferson Davies, the Southern states formed the Confederate States of America in order to engage in battle with the North (the Union). The bloody conflict literally divided the country into two sections. At the end of the war, the Union forces were declared the victors because of a number of strengths and advantages they had over their opponents.
From the time the battle started, the North had clear merits. To say it plainly, the Union had enormous quantities of almost everything that their opponents were lacking (Tulloch, 154). The Union had vast resources that the South lacked any means of even acquiring.
To begin with, the Union forces, under General William Tecumseh Sherman, had better leaders as well as an established government structure. As a result, they did not have to spend a lot of time in trying to establish a governing authority, as did the ill-prepared Southerners. In terms of manpower, the North was boasting of a significantly larger number of people. At that time, the U.S. had a population of about thirty-one million people and only about nine million of the people were residing in the breakaway states.
This made the Union to have huge strengths in terms of the number of troops, which they threw in the combat with the Confederacy. During the war, the Union had at least three times the number of soldiers their opponents had. They had the objective of eliminating the Southerners through the shear use of more numbers of troops in the battlefield.
The Northern states had enormous quantities of land that they used for cultivating food crops. This assisted them in feeding their soldiers as well as providing funds for their manufacturing industries that were also provisioning the soldiers. On the other hand, the Confederacy mainly concentrated on growing staple crops such as cotton, believing that the flourishing industry alone was able to sustain them all through the bloody battle.
As the war was ensuing, the lack of sufficient food made it hard to feed the soldiers as well as the population who were largely dependant on the staple crops. The South made the fatal mistake of not venturing into industrial production where good money to finance the war could have been made with the production of the staple foods.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The South was able to cultivate vast quantities of the staple crops and since they lacked the industries, the North bought them and used them in their industries. In turn, they sold the finished products to the South.
In addition, since the South was mainly dependant on agricultural products, its soldiers could leave the battlefield every spring to harvest their ready crops since their families and themselves could risk starving if they were unable to do this. On the other hand, the Union forces had no analogous responsibilities and they were committed to the war. This economic superiority of the North gave them a greater boost during the war.
In terms of communication, the Union was better placed, and it proved to be an important strength during the war years. The Union controlled the means of transportation at that time. Of the thirty thousand miles of railroads, the Union enjoyed the control of twenty thousand of them.
The North was capable of transporting the requirements of the war both cheaply and conveniently, to almost everywhere they were required in the battlefield (Griess, 2). Consequently, the morale of the army was also increased since they could get supplies in time. In addition, their well-trained naval forces blocked the ports of the Southerners, which further impeded their communication and transport.
The Confederacy, however, with its insufficient production of about 4% of the country’s locomotives and limited control of the railroad, it stood inferior as compared to its enemies. In addition, the South did not embrace the new method of using telegraph as a means of communication. Telegraph communication enabled instant communication in the North while the South did not have adequate funds to embrace this new technology.
In conclusion, the American Civil War was a trying moment for both the South and the North. However, its outcome was apparent from the start since the confederacy was ill equipped for such a war. Nonetheless, as devastating as the war was, the opposing states grew closer together and the United States of America became truly united. Although the Union won the war, it managed to settle the differences it had with the Confederacy.
Works Cited Griess, Thomas E. American Civil War. New York: Square One Publishers, 2008. Print.
We will write a custom Essay on The United States Civil war specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Tulloch, Hugh. The debate on the American Civil War era. Manchester: Manchester Univ. Press, 1999. Print.
Vitaminwater advertisement Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
How many people buy products just because of persuasive advertisement on TV? How does the advertisement encourage the audience to buy their products even though people do not know whether displayed items actually work or not? According to the research, almost 90% of advertisements whether on TV or printed apply two or more propaganda techniques.
Propaganda is a very persuasive effort to direct or change people’s ideas, in order to make a certain view or side that propaganda provides. There are seven beneficial techniques such as name calling, glittering generalities, transfer, testimonial, plain folks, card stacking, and band wagon, which are used in every advertisement.
Many people prefer to drink the Vitaminwater instead of taking vitamin capsules because they have seen a very successful advertisement. The Vitaminwater’s facebook flavorcreator advertisement promotes the product by using three specialized propaganda techniques.
The Vitaminwater advertisement uses the name calling technique. This technique implies that instead of focusing on how good the products are, the advertisement shows the awful effects that one faces in case he/she consumes another good (particularly, a substitute competitor: a good that satisfies the same needs as the given good).
This technique is often used in politics and a bit more seldom in advertising. In many cases, it is quite difficult to compromise one product in another product’s advertisement, as this technique is illegal. However, an advertisement can address an “anonymous” enemy. The advertisement of the Vitaminwater is this very case: the drink’s “enemy” is traditional vitamins taken with water.
The advertisement does not mention any concrete names of vitamins, but addresses them all. The advertisement illustrates how difficult and unpleasant it is to take vitamins. The effect is strengthened with the play on colors: while we see a girl taking vitamins in black and white, the Vitaminwater is shown in bright attractive colors.
Furthermore, the Vitaminwater advertisement uses the testimonial technique. In order to persuade the audience to believe and to choose the items, companies invite experts in related fields or irrelevant famous stars in the advertisements.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More No doubt, this technique has the very old roots: when Aristotle was writing his Rhetoric (by the way, the focus of rhetoric is making a speech persuasive, which is incredibly important for advertising), he could not imagine that his notion of ethos (the appeal in one’s speech that emphasizes a speaker’s authority, power and competence) will be used by advertisers in the 21st century.
To use the testimonial technique successfully, it is important to choose a “right person” to appear in an advertisement. For example, if we promote cosmetics, it is reasonable to invite a beautiful female singer or actress who is popular with girls or women included into the target segment. If we talk about a medicament or a health care product, the personage of a doctor in a white smock will be appropriate.
In the advertisement of the Vitaminwater, the celebrity is chosen very successfully: Steve Nash is a famous professional basketball player. In consumers’ mind, his image associates with strength and energy, which makes them think that drinking the Vitaminwater will help them to become as strong as Steve. Besides, we see Curtis “50 cent” Jackson: he is popular with many young people, and his image is supposed to encourage young consumers to buy the product.
Moreover, the commercial chooses the glittering generalities technique to recommend the product. Applying this technique implies that an advertisement uses strong, attractive words and phrases to show how good a product is in order to attract the audience’s attention.
In many cases, the words have broad meaning and are interpreted by different people in different ways: for example, such words as “freedom”, “pleasure” arouse different associations in different people’s minds. The words “effective”, “healthy” innovative et al are also supposed to work well in advertisements.
In the advertisement of the Vitaminwater, we hear strong, persuasive phrases: for example, “changed the game”, “futuristic” – these words present the product as a real breakthrough: it is innovative and has no analogs; “stress” – the advertisement shows that getting vitamins in a different way is quite exhausting; “as easy as 1, 2, 3” – it is incredibly easy to purchase the product.
Besides, Steve emphasizes the words “you”, “your own vitamin water”, which also has its effect: a consumer feels that the advertisement addresses him/her personally, and he/she becomes psychologically closer to the product. At the same time, the strong words are emphasized with the intonation (Steve’s speech is very bright and expressive) and the pictures (the words are displayed in bright colors).
We will write a custom Essay on Vitaminwater advertisement specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Thus, the Vitaminwater advertisement takes advantage of three propaganda techniques, which persuades the audience to believe and to purchase the product. The name calling technique is aimed at “eliminating” the product’s competitors: it positions the Vitaminwater as the most convenient and innovative way to take vitamins.
The testimonial technique helps to make the advertisement more persuasive: the words of celebrities are expected to interest and convince consumers. The glittering generalities technique helps to emphasize the message of the advertisement and influence consumers’ minds with the help of bright words. Three techniques are fused successfully and supplement each other.
“Glory ” a American War Movie by Edward Zwick Report college admissions essay help
Glory (1989) is an American war movie that narrates the story of the first all black volunteer infantry in the North, the 54th Massachusetts. The account in this film is told from the point of view of Robert Gould Shaw, who was the commanding officer of this contingent for the duration of the American Civil War. This movie reminds the viewer of the role played by the African American soldiers in the Civil War and in the obliteration of slavery.
This article will explore the movie, bringing out the relationship between the stories as reflected on the film in correlation to the actual occurrences that are documented in history books regarding these same episodes. The article will also tackle other features of the films such as the title, settings, and main characters along with how the movie functions as history.
The Cast of the movie includes Mathew Broderic who plays the part of Colonel Shaw, Morgan Freeman who plays the grave digger, and Cary Elves who is Major Forbes in this movie, Denzel Washington who plays the character of Trip, and Jimmy Kennedy who plays the field hand’s role.
The other characters are Andre Braugher (Corporal Searless), John Finn (Surgent Mulcahy), Domovan Leitch (Captain Morse), JD Cullum (Henry Russell), Jay Sanders (Brigadier Strong), Cliffe De Young (colonel Montogomery), Alan North (Governer Andrew), and Bob Gunton (General Harker).
The movie is filmed in Georgia and Florida and is facilitated by hundreds of Civil War historical re-enactors so as to bring out the historical background of the Civil War. The early scenes of the movie reveal Captain Shaw, who is portrayed as being dismayed and bewildered by the violence of the battleground.
The captain is then shown to be slightly wounded in combat and faints due to his injuries. A character christened as the gravedigger wakes him up and he is taken for treatment. While getting treatment, Captain Shaw is informed that President Abraham Lincoln is about to make an announcement that will see the setting free of some of the slaves held in rebel areas.
As the movie develops, Shaw is promoted to the rank of a colonel while he is on leave in Boston and given the responsibility of leading the first all blacks regiment, which was to be formed following Abraham Lincoln’s declaration speech. As the leader of his regiment, Colonel Shaw requests his friend from childhood, Cabot Forbes, to deputize him.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Other volunteers, who are mostly freed black men, offer to join Colonel Shaw’s regiment. In those days, whites enjoyed more privileges compared to blacks and this is well depicted in the movie by the tension that arises between Trip and Thomas. They however resolve their differences and become closer friends.
While at the camp, the 54th regiment undergoes a lot of difficulties due to the discrimination of their group. They are compelled to tolerate the unfaltering strict punishment of Sergeant Major Mulcahy.
Among the challenges they experience in the camp were inadequate suitable equipments and the open racial discrimination that was prevalent in the camp. In the camp, the African American soldiers were singled out by their white counterparts. There were no black soldiers in command and it seemed like such positions were preserved for only the whites.
After a long period carrying out their duties, Colonel Shaw realizes that his regiment was to be used to perform menial duties. This angered him so much that he threatened to report the unfair treatment to the war department. His request to have his regiment allowed to go to war like the rest of the regiments is then approved by his commanding officers.
Following his regiment’s first successful participation in the combat, Colonel Shaw volunteers his 54th Massachusetts to lead an assault on Fort Wagner. Subsequent to being honored by white soldiers and officers, Shaw leads his men to ambush a well guarded enemy’s fort but while trying to lead his men, Shaw is unfortunately shot at and killed instantly.
Unfortunately, this also happens to a member of his regiment known as Trip, who attempted to raise the flag and lead his other black men in absence of Shaw. The next scene of the movie opens with a morning scene in which the confederate banner is hoisted on top of the fort. This is followed by a burial of the deceased members of the 54th regiment together with that of Shaw and Trip are buried in a mass grave.
This movie is filled with imaginary character and incidences, presenting the viewers with a convincingly emotional story of togetherness between the African American soldiers and certain whites during the American Civil War.
We will write a custom Report on “Glory ” a American War Movie by Edward Zwick specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Of the many characters in this move, only one character, Colonel Robert Shaw, is non fictional. From the onset of this movie, Robert Shaw is depicted as the main character and his presence is observed almost in all scenes of the movie. Another white character who is as well equally featured in this movie is Cabot Forbes, who is the second in command from Shaw.
The whites in this movie are shown as racists and this is clearly reflected in the movie by the way the white soldiers and officers relate to their African American counterparts. Instead of being paid thirteen dollars as the white soldiers are, the black soldiers are paid ten dollars.
The black soldiers are also not accorded enough equipment to fight the war yet the whites have more than enough. Yet another scene that portrays the racism theme is shown when the African American soldiers are initially subjected to menial jobs instead of equally being given a chance to play a part in active combat as the whites are.
Not all whites are shown as racists and Shaw and Forbes, who are portrayed as sympathizers of the blacks to the extent of demanding equal salary for their regiment. This is shown when, as earlier stated in this article, Shaw threatens to report the unfair treatment of the blacks to the war department. One is left wondering whether under normal circumstances in those days, Shaw and Forbes would really have behaved in similar comportment or if the movie was trying to depict them as good guys while in reality they were not.
Most of the Africa Americans individuals during the civil war era were depicted as violent and people who always had problems taking orders. It is no wonder that many people were perplexed by their ability to make good soldiers given that solders always act by the orders given to them.
This nature of being disobedient is also contrasted in this movie when the blacks protest against racism and their unequal salaries only to quickly soften their stand and accept disciplinary actions from their white counter parts. The blacks are also depicted as being obedient to military orders which eventually led most of them to their death.
There are some scenes in this movie that do not accurately portray the occurrences in the American Civil War. For instance, Shaw’s regiment did not actually triumph over the rival forces at Fort Wagner, but in this movie, we are shown the confederate flag flying high on top of the fort as a sign that the regiment was successful in defeating their enemies.
Another inaccurate depiction of the Civil War events is the duration of time it took Colonel Shaw to accept the offer of leading the African American Regiment. In the “Glory,” Shaw is shown as accepting the leadership offer right away while historical documentations illustrate that he accepted the offer after many days of careful deliberation. The number of the 54th regiment soldiers killed in battle is also not captured accurately.
Not sure if you can write a paper on “Glory ” a American War Movie by Edward Zwick by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The inaccuracies shown in this movie could have been due to the challenges in terms of cost that were encountered while producing this movie.
To produce a movie that would capture all the occurrences of the war accurately would have been very costly. Even with the inaccuracies mentioned above, a great extent almost every major incidence that took place in the 54th regiment has been accurately captured in this movie.
As one watches the movie, it can be difficult not to notice how this movie is able to capture how unfairly African Americans were treated during the war just because of their skin color. The “Glory” can therefore be said to be a movie that almost accurately portrays the occurrences in the American Civil War particularly the challenges faced by the African Americans in the war.
The movie “Glory” is reflection is of historical importance since it portrays the role of African Americans in fighting for the Union army in the historical American Civil War. Moreover, the “Glory” shows that the Union victory, which is an important milestone in the history of America, took place with the assistance of African Americans.
Despite being put through a lot of suffering in the form of slavery and other forms of discrimination, the movie portrays the African Americans as being capable of fighting in a war, just as their white counterparts and as such, they should be recognized as having greatly contributed to the history of the US. At the time of the Civil War, it was a common belief among many whites that the blacks were incapable of properly fighting in a war and therefore should not be allowed to participate in the war.
This belief was however proven wrong by history just as shown in “Glory,” which honors the African Americans for their role in the war. There were also some fears about the loyalty of the blacks during the war given their history of being slaves but once again, just as shown in the movie, the black fighters in the war proved very loyal and worthy to be in the battle despite their group being openly discriminated against.
The movie Glory is a celebration of the less known acts of courage and sacrifice during the Civil War. As shown by the movie, as much as the Civil War was about ending slavery and setting free the blacks, it is ironical that the blacks in the movie were not free to fight the war as shown by their bad treatment during the war.
This was perhaps a sign that the war would not mark the end of discrimination of the African Americans. In fact, most historians who write about the Civil War tend to ignore the crucial role played by the blacks yet more than 200 thousand of them actively fought and helped secure victory for the northerners.
A big part of the movie accurately portrays the exact happenings as they took place during the Civil War. After watching the movie, a viewer cannot fail to notice the huge effort put towards correctly portraying the details of the war. The main scene in the movie occurred just as it is portrayed in the movie and some of the main characters, including Douglas, Shaw and Frederick, actually existed and fought in the war as shown in the movie.
Even though a good number of the secondary characters are fictional, they have been included in the movie to represent the wide cross-section of individuals who joined the 54th Regiment. The movie can therefore be said to be an almost accurate representation of African American participation in the war and their struggles.
Some of the scary scenes in the movie, including the one showing an explosion of a soldier’s head, are included in an effort to show the gore and bloodshed that took place in the battlefield. Even with such scary scenes, the movie’s accurate depiction of an important historical occurrence has made it a perfect movie to be shown during history classes.
However, the version shown in schools is edited to reduce extreme violence. The movie is among the most shown movies in high school history classes to increase awareness of the important role played by blacks in the Civil War. Apart from telling the story of an important occurrence in US history, the movie contains elements associated with a great motion picture which leaves its viewers with a lot of memories.
An Analytical look into Coca-Cola Essay online essay help: online essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
History of company and product
Introduction Marketing is the process by which groups and individuals create and exchange goods and services with an aim of attaining what they need with an aspiring to find satisfaction. Consumer needs and wants are the main reason behind why companies design, manufacture and distribute products into the market.
On one hand consumers demand for satisfaction and companies therefore sell to make a profit and meet their other objectives such as growth, and survival. Product and services created by companies such as Coca-Cola are considered of value and therefore create satisfaction when exchange takes place (Kotler 2003).
Therefore the creation value and satisfaction which consumers demand end up pushing companies create strategies that govern their marketing mix and go a step further to create overall corporate strategies that will govern their whole business processes to ensure success in today’s volatile business environment (Lancaster
Social Movements and Sociology Opinion Essay college essay help online
Discussion 1 Social movements are planned efforts by a group of individuals to initiate reforms in major facets of the community. As a young man, I have been a part of a social movement in my society. Worried about the controversy that was surrounding the legalization of marijuana, a group of young people got together to push for the legalization of this drug. This came after we observed the positive changes that the drug was bringing to people suffering from chronic diseases like cancer and HIV.
The group’s motivation also came through the realization that marijuana was not as dangerous as many people portrayed it to be. It was interesting for us to learn that tobacco smoke was more dangerous compared to smoking marijuana. What we wondered as a group was why a substance like tobacco that was proved to be more dangerous should remain legal while marijuana which was proved to be helpful to patients should remain banned. (Marshal, 1998)
Having observed the caution that Americans approached the marijuana issue, we knew that individual efforts would do little to push for the reforms we wanted. This was why we decided to form a group to educate people on the benefits of legalizing marijuana. Through mobilizing, we were able to influence the city of Washington to make it legal for people with chronic ailments to be able to access medicinal marijuana.
Through our efforts, the society is slowly beginning to understand the numerous benefits that the society can derive if marijuana was legalized. Through the influence of this group, different states are considering legalizing marijuana to become their newest avenue for revenue collection through the sale of legal marijuana. To us, this group is a real example of a social movement in the society. (Marshal, 1998)
Discussion 2 Terrorismhas become the concern of every person across the world. This has made many governments to take drastic measures meant to curb this evil. Despite these measures, I do not think that America and the rest of the world are winning this war against terrorism. The reason for my observation is that this war has turned from fighting terrorists to hunting down Muslims.
Although I agree that Muslim extremists lead most terrorist groups, it is quite wrong to treat every Muslim as a potential terrorist. By doing this what America and the rest of the world are doing is seeking to win the war and effectively losing the battle. If the world is truly to win the war on terrorism, there is the need to stop focusing on fighting religious convictions and start fighting the real criminals. (Cline, 2010)
Although terrorist’s acts might have ceded in American soil, they are very active elsewhere. Terrorists have realized that it is impossible to carry attacks on American soil and instead decided to attack American interests elsewhere. In the recent months, there has been a series of attacks targeted at Americans in different parts of the world. A good example of this was the attack on a World Cup crowd comprising mainly of American sympathizers in an East African city known as Kampala in Uganda.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Although terrorists might have reduced their attacks against America, they have instead been attacking those nations that are believed to be supporting American interests and those seen as sympathizers of the nation. By considering this new development, it would be a lie to claim that America and the rest of the world are winning the war on terrorism. (Anthology of Ideas, 2006)
References Anthology of Ideas. (2006) Is the US Winning The War on Terrorism? Web.
Cline, A. (2010) Weekly Poll: Is Al Qaeda Winning the War on Terrorism? Web.
Marshal, G. (1998) “Social Movements”. A Dictionary of Sociology. Web.
“The Fish” by Elizabeth Bishop Essay essay help online
Among the unique features of literary works is the ability to reflect quite common events through a number of literary devices that help the author represent those events as a powerful spiritual experience. As it is proved by the narrative poem “The Fish” written by Elizabeth Bishop, even such an ordinary pastime as fishing can become an outstanding occurrence full of emotional and spiritual significance.
By means of such figures of speech as personification, simile, symbolism, and irony, Bishop succeeds in rendering the theme of her poem, the necessity for spiritual unity with the nature and for the recognition of everyone’s unique identity.
One of the most widely used figures of speech with regard to animals is personification, and Bishop employs it generously to impart individuality to the fish in the narrator’s hand.
Starting from the first lines and till the very end of the poem, the narrator mostly refers to the fish as “him” instead of the more traditional “it”: “… held him beside the boat”, “He didn’t fight. / He hadn’t fought at all. / He hung a grunting weight”, “his aching jaw” (Bishop 581–582). However, it is obvious that the narrator is startled at such humanization of a fish, since once in the whole poem the fish is still described through “it”: “with my hook / fast in a corner of its mouth” (Bishop 581).
In addition, the detailed account of the fish appearance is interrupted by the narrator’s questioning whether a fish can be described in human terms: “if you could call it a lip” (Bishop 582). Such fluctuations serve to emphasize the astonishment of the narrator when she discovers that she can relate to the fish as to an equal being.
The narrator’s indecisiveness regarding the treatment of fish is reflected in the similes Bishop uses to describe the catch. Especially remarkable in this respect are the lines
“…his brown skin hung in strips like ancient wallpaper, and its pattern of darker brown was like wallpaper: shapes like full-blown roses stained and lost through age.” (Bishop 581)
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the first four lines Bishop uses the comparison to wallpaper twice, to describe both the texture and the pattern of the fish skin. This similarity to an artificial and inanimate object immediately distances the narrator from the fish, presenting the latter as unattractive. However, in order to get closer to the fish and to appreciate its appearance, Bishop employs a simile to “full-blown roses”, immediately spiritualizing the fish by this comparison to beautiful flowers (581).
By means of simile, Bishop vividly demonstrates how the narrator’s view of her catch connects the fish to all the universe around. On the one hand, the fish is compared to other objects of nature like flowers (roses and peonies) and birds covered with feathers (Bishop 581).
This comparison reveals the hidden meaning of fish as a living creature that is beautiful as a flower and free as a bird. On the other hand, Bishop draws a parallel between the fish and the man-made objects: weapons and medals (582). Consequently, the fish appears as a courageous fighter who has been struggling for existence and is rewarded by the gift of life it that gets from the narrator in the end of the poem.
Contributing to the message of the fish uniqueness, Bishop fills the poem with allusions to the symbolic nature of the fish. Standardly perceived as a symbol of freedom, with its ability to swim almost unrestrictedly in the seven seas, the fish is suddenly presented as very passive and unresisting: “He didn’t fight. / He hadn’t fought at all.” (Bishop 581).
These lines contain certain irony, misleading the reader who further on discovers how active and struggling the fish has been when he got in the fishing nets. The immense struggle for life does not go unnoticed: the fish is still carrying a row of fishing hooks in his lip. The narrator is fascinated by their shine, “Like medals with their ribbons / frayed and wavering” the fishing hooks are symbolic of the heroism and the valor of the old fish (Bishop 582).
Not incidentally does the narrator call the row of hooks “a five-haired beard of wisdom / trailing from his aching jaw” (Bishop 582). Through this symbol of wisdom, the fish is seen as an old veteran hardened in battles for life and freedom. As it lies in the narrator’s hand, gasping for life, the narrator suddenly acquires a wisdom of her own.
Although the major objective of fishing is actually catching fish, the events occurring in the poem take a sudden turn. After a thorough contemplation of the fish in all the tiny details, the narrator realizes that she is holding a unique creature in her hand.
We will write a custom Essay on “The Fish” by Elizabeth Bishop specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Having had a life full of struggle, the fish demonstrates its wisdom by not thrashing about but simply lying there and gasping for existence. The wisdom of fish who has suffered enormous pain in its life is transferred to the narrator who opens her eyes on the uniqueness of every being.
The association of fish with life helps the narrator to make a wise choice and to grant life to the creature who fully deserves it. The feeling of victory that fills her body is symbolic of victory over the old prejudice: the narrator opens her mind to understanding of the world filled with living creatures who are dependent on each other’s kindness and compassion. Thus, from the initial destruction and pain there emerge beauty, life, and freedom.
Elizabeth Bishop’s poem “The Fish” reveals the idea of interdependence of all the living creatures and of the necessity for mutual understanding and support on the planet. Through wide usage of figures of speech, Bishops develops powerful images and renders ideas that are called to change not only the mind of her narrator but the whole world around.
Works Cited Bishop, Elizabeth. “The Fish.” The Compact Bedford Introduction to Literature. Ed. Michael Meyer. 8th ed. Boston: Bedford/St Martin’s, 2009. 581–82.
Is Genetically Engineered Food the Solution to the World’s Hunger Problems? Research Paper essay help online free: essay help online free
Table of Contents Introduction
A case for Genetic Engineering
A Case Against Genetic Engineering
Introduction Food is arguably the most basic need of man and as such, food security is a fundamental goal by all nations. Ensuring that people are protected from hunger that is often the consequence of poverty or drought is therefore one of the major ambitions of most governments. Over the cause of the last century, there has been a population explosion which has resulted in rapid population growth.
This growth has resulted in an unprecedented demand for food to feed the growing population. As a result of this, food security has become difficult to achieve in some countries; especially the developing ones. A solution to this problem has been necessary to avoid widespread starvation.
Genetically Modified Organisms (GMO’s) have proved to be a feasible solution to the food problem and some people even hail them as “the miracle of seed science and fertilizers” (Coleman, 2005). However, the acceptance of GMO’s as the solution to the world’s food problem is not unanimously and there is still a multitude of opposition and suspicion of their use.
This paper shall argue that genetic engineering is the answer to the hunger problems of the world. The paper shall give arguments both for and against the use of GMO’s as advanced by authoritative sources. A thought provoking discussion on the matter will then be given so as to reinforce the claim that GMO’s if properly implemented are the solution to the world’s food problems.
A case for Genetic Engineering Food safety concerns are the most paramount and one of the common fears of GM foods is as to their suitability for human consumption. Nelson (2001) shows that GM foods have been under thorough scrutiny for years and the safety of genetically modified food products has been examined by governments and scientists for decades. Even with these many years of research and tests, there has been no specific risk or harm identified from the genetic modification process itself.
Arguably the most appealing argument for GM foods is that they have been dispersed throughout America and the population has been eating these products for a decade without any adverse reaction. Coleman (2005) reveals that as of the year 2005, 60% of American processed foods were genetically engineered.
This figure can only be expected to have risen over the cause of the previous five years. This being the case, it can be authoritatively stated that GM foods do not have any adverse effect on human beings and as such are completely safe for human consumption.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More McKinney and Schoch (2003) suggest that one of the most important contributions that genetic engineering has made is to increase the resistance of crops to insect and disease vectors. Considering the fact that one problem that has continually plagued man’s agricultural efforts is the problem of pests and diseases, this is a very significant contribution.
All over the world, communities have been known to suffer from hunger as a result of their crops being attacked by pests and/or diseases. While efforts in the form of using pesticides have been extensively used to deal with this problem, this solution has proved to be short term since pests have been known to become immune to chemicals over time.
GM on the other had can be used to create special strains of crops which have immunity over pests and diseases therefore reducing the need for pesticides. This has the double advantage of saving the farmer the money he would have used investing in chemicals as well as safeguarding the environment.
Due to the population explosion that has been witnessed throughout the world, the earth is truly busting at its seams and it is unlikely that man will be able to produce enough food to feed the entire population through traditional means. An increase in food production is therefore necessary for the food demands of the world to be met. GM foods are viewed as surpassing in significance the “Green Revolution” of 1960 which helped Asian countries tackle their food shortage issues.
This is because GM foods result in higher yields therefore giving nations a means through which they can feed their population. This is as a result of their special genetic make up which ensures that GM foods not only have higher yields but are also produced in relatively shorter periods of time.
As has been noted in this paper, the primary cause of hunger has been the population explosion which has created a strain on the earth’s resources. Land has been one of the resources that has been adversely affected both by the population growth as well as factors such as climatic change and global warming which have made land that was previously arable useless for agricultural purposes.
Genetic engineering presents a manner by which food can be produced under unfavorable conditions. By use of GM technology, crops can be altered to increase their tolerances to stresses such as drought, cold, heat, or high soil salinities (McKinney and Schoch, 2003).
We will write a custom Research Paper on Is Genetically Engineered Food the Solution to the World’s Hunger Problems? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This therefore means that land that could not be used for cultivation can be used for producing food which is needed to feed the population. By making use of land that could previously not be used for cultivation, GM will result in more food production therefore increasing the likelihood of eliminating hunger in the world.
A Case Against Genetic Engineering A notable issue with GMO’s is that unlike natural organisms, some GMO’s cannot be reproduced naturally. Farmer who uses GM seeds will therefore be obligated to keep buying this seeds from the corporations which sell the same as opposed to the natural seeds which can be used over and over.
McDonagh (2005) quips that with such realities in play, the farmers will never own their food and will always be at the mercy of the corporations which cannot be trusted to have the farmers good at heart. This is not a baseless fear since with the prevalence of GM crops and the introduction of the Technology Protection Systems, farmers will become completely reliant on big corporations which produce the GM Seeds (McDonagh, 2005).
While most of the proponents of genetic engineered (GE) foods advance that the technology has favorable environmental implications, this is a stance that is questionable. McDonagh (2005) demonstrates that hybrids seeds which are produced by genetic engineering are “expensive and heavily reliant on fertilizers and pesticides.
This is a claim that is substantiated by Nelson (2001) who notes that despite the numerous claims that GE crops will help the environment, the current emphasis of biotechnology is the creation of herbicide resistant crops and pest and disease resistant crops.
The author notes that this results in the more extensive usage of pesticides with time due to the inherent resistance nature of the crops. Studies conducted on the relative usage of chemicals on GE crops revealed that while there was substantially reduced pesticide use in the first years, GMO required increased pesticide usage over time (Mcdonagh, 2005).
Proponents of GM assume that food problems in the world are solely caused by poor conditions that result in poor yields. However, this is not the case and Mcdonagh (2005) authoritatively asserts that “hunger and famine around the world have more to do with the absence of land reform, social inequality… than with lack of agribusiness super-seeds”. This being the case, it is evident that introduction of GM seeds in such an environment will have little impact since the core causes of hunger and famine (land reforms and inequality) will still remain prevalent.
To reinforce his claim, Mcdonagh (2005) reveals that one of the world’s largest food exporter, Brazil, has over 30million hungry people within its borders. As such, hunger is not due to a lack of food in the country but rather as a result of unequal distribution of food and resources therefore leading to a scenario where a large number of people are landless and therefore lack the means to produce food.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Is Genetically Engineered Food the Solution to the World’s Hunger Problems? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More There is an assumption that widespread use of GE will result in the availability of food for all. This is at best a utopian notion since it is very unlikely that the available food will be distributed for free to the hungry poor.
The real cause of hunger in the world is in most cases the lack of money to purchase the food than the lack of food in itself (Hollander, 2004). As such, while GM may result in surplus productions, this will not guarantee freedom from hunger since only those who have access to money to purchase the food will benefit from it (Mcdonagh, 2005).
Discussion Coleman (2005) asserts that the war on hunger is a “grave and universal need”. He goes on to point out that in the year 2004, 10 million people died as a result of starvation. These bleak realities demonstrate that not only is a solution to the world food problems needed; but it is needed sooner rather than later.
While science cannot guarantee absolute certainty and indeed there may be some risks related to the use of GMO’s, a comparative analysis of the risks and benefits reveals that GMO’s have more benefits to man than the possible risk.
One of the issues which make GMO’s unacceptable to some is due to the fact that the process for their creation is “unnatural”. Coleman (2005) documents that “organisms have been exchanging genetic information for centuries”. As such, GM foods should not be discounted on this basis since the process can take place without the intervention of man. In addition to this, extensive research has been undertaken as to the suitability of GM foods for human consumption and it has been revealed that they are as safe as natural foods.
Both the opponents and proponents of genetic engineering alike agree that there is a real food problem in the world and therefore, solutions to this have to be arrived at soon (Easton, 2008).
While both parties do propose differing methods to solve the food problems of the world, proponents of genetically engineered foods offer the more feasible solution to the problem. Without a doubt, the danger of farmers (especially those from developing nations) becoming fully reliant on GMO seeds and therefore becoming dependent on the companies that produce the same is very real.
This danger is especially accentuated by the use of “Technology Protection Systems” which force the farmer to buy new seeds for every new planting season (Mcdonagh, 2005). Coleman (2005) argues that intellectual knowledge must be disseminated in a manner that promotes the good of all people and not only the profit interests of corporations. Only by doing this can the benefits that GMO purport to give mankind be fully appreciated.
Conclusion There is no question that every nation in the world must take up measures to stop global hunger. At the present, genetic modification presents the best means to achieve this since it results in an increase in crop yields therefore giving nations the capacity to feed a growing population.
This paper set out to argue that genetic engineering is the solution to the hunger problems that the world faces. To reinforce this claim, this paper has provided a detailed argument both in support of GMO as the solution to hunger and against it. The features which make GMOs properly suited to help in the fight against hunger have been documented and the factors that may render GMOs unsuited stated as well.
From the discussions presented herein, it is clear that the benefits of GMO’s are great. However, this paper has shown that care must be taken to ensure that GM food production is not used to benefit only a section of the population. In addition to this, the need for tackling other issues such as social and economic inequalities that create poverty has been articulated. Only by doing this can genetic engineering assist in eradicating the problem of hunger which has continually haunted man for centuries.
References Coleman, G. D. (2005). Is Genetic Engineering the Answer to Hunger? Retrieved from: https://www.americamagazine.org/issue/519/article/genetic-engineering-answer-hunger
Easton, T. (2008). Taking sides: Clashing views on controversial environmental issues. (Custom 13th ed.).New York: McGraw-Hill.
Hollander, J. M. (2004).The Real Environmental Crisis: Why Poverty, Not Affluence, Is the Environment’s Number One Enemy. California: University of California Press.
Mcdonagh, S. (2005). Genetic Engineering is not the Answer. Retrieved from: https://www.americamagazine.org/issue/529/article/genetic-engineering-not-answer
McKinney, M. L.
Approaches India and China took to achieve the fast development in economies Essay essay help online
Introduction China has amazed the whole world at large because of the tremendous growth in its economy (Chow 45). Although China has a very large population, the Chinese people have proved to the entire world that they can be very hard working. Recent research shows that it comes second after the super powers United States of America in terms of the economy defeating countries like Japan, Russia, India and other developed countries.
In the past 30 years, that is from the year 1979 China’s growth has been averaged to a rate of ten percent per annum, which shows a very great improvement. China is also the largest exporter in the world exporting a wide variety of commodities such as agricultural commodities like rice , machinery, electronics, nuclear weapons and textiles just to mention but a few.
Other than just exporting it is the second largest importer of goods majorly from Japan, Taiwan and South Korea. China’s major imports include; oil, minerals, plastics, other machinery it lacks and many others. This therefore is enough evidence that China is good at trading with many trading partners all over the world.
India on the other hand is following suit so as to better their economy. It is ranked fifth in the world in terms of economy (Chow 78). Despite the fact it is lower than china, it beats other developed nations like Germany. In the year 2006, the economy of India stood at 8.5%. This paper will therefore discuss the key factors that contributed to the rapid economic growth of China and India.
Use of Foreign investment by China to improve the economy China has invested greatly in technology leading to production of high quality products. In a bid to achieve this, it imported advanced machinery, plant and production facilities from trading with other countries (Arora 98). The investment in these facilities advances the technology of the country hence improving the quality and quantity of products produced.
China’s commodities are among the top most sophisticated products in the world hence attracting investors from other countries. It is because of this that the total factor in productivity of China has grown by 4 percent per annum. The government also made investments in the education system such that it involved technological training sessions (Dana 90).
It emphasized on teaching of industrial method in schools. This was advantageous as it made the schools produce graduates who were endowed with technological knowledge. The resulting graduates therefore worked in the manufacturing sectors of the economy and thus led to the improvement of the quantity and quality of outputs (Hertel 204). Due to this the country was able to increase its exports and as a result improving the state’s economy.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Other approaches used by China to improve the economy Reforms in the agricultural sector
Agriculture is among the top most sectors of China’s economy. Research has indicated that the agricultural sector of China results to 60 percent of its Gross Domestic Product hence being a determining factor of the state’s economy. China produces the highest quantity of rice in the world. It also produces other agricultural products such as wheat, cotton, maize and tobacco which is exported thus the government earning foreign exchange.
The government policies
The government implemented policies that were driven to achieving economic growth at a fast rate. The government reallocated resources in different sectors of the state hence making them run well financially (Hertel 132). After the allocation of resources the government privatized them so as to ensure efficient running and high productivity unlike when they were run by the state.
Use of the available cheap labor
China is a highly populated nation (Arora 78). Therefore the presence of the large number of the human capital which was of high quality was a great advantage to the government. This is because the people were willing to work despite the low wage rate that they were being offered. The government took this as an advantage and made great use of the available workforce so as to improve its economy.
How India used entrepreneurship to improve its economy India is endorsed with people of different cultures. When these people meet, they lead to exchange of commodities hence entrepreneurship. This entrepreneurship was so intense that India was ranked number two globally in terms of entrepreneurship in the year 2002(Srivastava 2). This improvement was brought about by liberalization and the installation of good information systems. Through this, the country tried by all means to attract investors so as to be able to compete well globally.
For example, most nations of the world prefer outsourcing services from India, since they know they will definitely get quality and efficient work. The fact that India is among the developing countries, its economy is greatly influenced by globalization. Apart from introducing new business opportunities, globalization may lead to decline of a nation’s economy if does not favor that nation.
India also has a big population which is mostly characterized by hardworking businessmen (Srivastava 1). The businessmen from India were able to spread all over the globe in a bid to do business. This improved the economy since the foreign exchange went back to the country hence increasing its gross domestic product which eventually led to the rapid growth in its economy.
Some of the factors hindering entrepreneurship in India include; the lack of capital and support from the government, poor infrastructure and unwelcoming social attitudes. So at to greatly improve the economy of India, these factors have to be put into consideration and dealt with immediately. The government can help in this by subsidizing the duty to be paid by the entrepreneurs. The government can also assist in improving the country’s infrastructural condition hence making business favorable.
We will write a custom Essay on Approaches India and China took to achieve the fast development in economies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Conclusion A comparison between the two countries indicates that China seems to be more aggressive in terms of rejuvenating its economy as compared to India. This is easily depicted by the measures China undertakes so as to reform the economy (Dana 87). The other reason is the mere fact that China wants to overtake the United States of America which for a long time has been known to be the best economy in the world. If China continues in the same way, there is a likely hood that it might overtake the United States of America.
However, both countries can be said to have had rapid growth in their economies despite the different approaches they used. Both economies have impacts on the whole world at large though China seems to hold a bigger part because of the many investors it has. India’s development in their economy affects a great portion of the global nations because of its entrepreneurs that are distributed globally.
Works Cited Arora, V. (2005). China’s Economic Growth: International Spillovers. Journal of Economics, pp. 52- 109.
Chow, G. (2005). Globalization and China’s Economic and Financial Development. New York. Wadsworth Publishing.
Dana, L. (2000). Creating entrepreneurs in India. Journal of Business Management vol 38, pp 86-91.
Hertel, T. (2004). Global Impacts of China’s Economic Growth. California. Barnes
Climate change: Causes and Effects Cause and Effect Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
Climate is a term used to denote the patterns of weather occurring in particular regions of the globe. Climate change denotes the long-term changes in weather patterns over extended time periods. In modern times, the term has been used to describe the rapid climatic changes as a result of global warming.
Climate change thus denotes fluctuations in the statistical properties of weather patterns when considered over periods longer than 10 years. As such, short fluctuations such as El-Niño, cannot be considered as climate change. There is a general consensus amongst the scientific community that the current increase in climate change is mainly due to human factors and the result of this climate change might have catastrophic consequences.
There are mainly two factors that influence climate change: Natural and human factors. First, under natural causes variations in the radiation outputs of the sun has been found to have a considerable effect on the earth’s climatic conditions.
According to scientists, solar output variation of 1% per century would result in a variation of the earth’s average temperature ranging between 0.5 and 1.00 Celsius (USNAS). Solar output causes surface heat fluctuations due to changes in heat absorption and radiation by the earth surface. Secondly, volcanic eruptions have been linked to climate changes. Volcanic eruptions of sufficient magnitude have the ability to alter the climate system of the whole world.
Volcanic ashes, dust and gases released during volcanic eruptions creates a blanket that obstructs solar radiation from the sun thus reducing the earth’s surface temperatures. The last important natural factor is orbital variations. Orbital variations lead to changes in the levels of solar radiation reaching the earth mainly due to the position of the sun and the distance between the earth and the sun during each particular orbital cycle.
During the 19th century, the industrial revolution commenced resulting in the extensive use of fossil fuel for energy purposes. The industrial revolution also resulted in human migration from rural areas to cities with people looking for a better life. Land that was previously filled with vegetation was now cleared to make room for buildings and roads.
Natural resources were extensively consumed for industries, construction and transport. As a result, the levels of atmospheric greenhouse gases increased considerably. Greenhouse gases are an integral part of the earth’s climatic system as they help in warming up the earth’s surface. The increased emission of greenhouse gases (especially carbon dioxide) has led to the accelerated warming of the earth’s surface (global warming).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Methane, emitted from oil drilling, waste dumps and landfills, is also another important greenhouse gas whose content has been continually increasing. The extensive use of fertilizer has also led to the rise in nitrous oxide emission, another important greenhouse gas. These are all responsible for global warming and the subsequent climate change.
Scientists from around the world have identified several impacts of climate change. First, climate change has resulted in the gradual increase in ocean levels (Trenberth, 244). This has mainly been attributed to expansion of warmer ocean water and the melting of polar glacier ice. Rising sea waters affects coral reefs, coastal communities and wetlands mainly through flooding and encroachment of the sea into dry land. Changes in climate have also led to changes in weather patterns.
The rise in surface temperatures has resulted into heavy rainfalls that cause flooding in many areas of the world. Increase in surface temperatures has also resulted into severe and prolonged drought in other parts of the world. Climate change has also resulted in the increase of occurrence and magnitude of extreme climatic events such as tsunamis and hurricanes. Changes in climate lead to changes in ocean currents which might result in the occurrence of such events.
Over the course of earth’s history, various instances of climate changes have occurred some more extensive than others e.g. the ice age. However, during the turn of the 20th century, it has been noted that the rate of climate change has been increasing. Many scientists believe that this increase is mainly due to pollution of the air and the environment due to human activities e.g. industrialization and deforestation. Climate change has had several impacts on the earth’s weather system.
The increase in natural disasters such as cyclones, hurricanes and typhoons can be attributed to global warming. In order to mitigate the effects of climate change, it is important for people to realize the part they play in climate change and take effective measures. Various governments and institutions have instituted greenhouse emission restrictions in order to address this issue.
Campaigns aimed at educating individuals on the appropriate strategies in reducing greenhouse emissions have also been instituted. We are all part of the world and it is in our best interest to undertake all necessary measures to curb climate change.
Works Cited Trenberth, Kevin. IPCC Fourth Assessment Report. New York, NY: Cambridge University Press, 2007
We will write a custom Essay on Climate change: Causes and Effects specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More United States National Academy of Sciences (USNAS). “Understanding and Responding to Climate Change”. 2008. Web.
Google Search Engine and Yahoo Search Engine Compare and Contrast Essay college essay help: college essay help
There are over 100 search engines that can be used to search for information while one is using the internet. However, not all the web search engines are equally popular. Some of the world’s popular search engines include Google, Yahoo!, MSN, and Ask.com. The essay compares and contrasts Google and Yahoo! search engines. Although Yahoo! is also a useful tool for searching information on the web, Google remains the world’s leading search engine.
At the dawn of the twenty first century (2000), Google search engine became popular among internet users. It was founded by Larry Page and Sergey Brin starting 1996 and is owned by Google Inc. In December 2008, the popularity of Google in the world was at 82.7% and 78.4% a year later.
Its market share in the U.S in July 2009 stood at 63.2%. The company came up with great innovations to better its ability to meet client’s demand and ease of accessing information. PageRank which was designed to operate algorithmically provided better results when searching for information.
The web pages are numbered and linked with other related pages using the PageRank. This linkage ensures that one can get alternative results and hence providing additional information. Google became popular owing to the fact that it reduced the interface to the search engine hence making its usage easier and uninterrupted.
Google, just like most search engines, works by retrieving and storing massive information of several web pages. The retrieval is accomplished using an automated browser known as a web crawler or spider. All links on any given site are tracked and retrieved. Once retrieved, the contents of the site are checked in order to get a proper way of indexing in the search engine.
The indexed data are stored in a database which is then searchable using a query. The process of indexing enables quick access of information, even by typing a single word. Search results are highly biased towards resources which are informational. It is highly ineffective for cheesy off topic links. Google search engine, for instance, stores all or a section of the web page and provides additional details about the source page.
Yahoo!’s search service provision has been in existence for a significantly long time. David F. and Jerry Yang are the founders of Yahoo! (1994). It used to provide search services for web pages using its own web directories as well as outsourcing to other providers.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It did not display the full-text of a given web page. In 2000, Yahoo! used Inktomi’s search engine to provide search services which it later acquired two years later. In 2004, Yahoo! shifted to Google and used it to provide search services. Yahoo!, after borrowing technologies from the various acquisitions and partnering installed its own search engine.
In July 2009, a deal between Yahoo! and Microsoft was reached where the Microsoft’s search engine technology (Bing) would power Yahoo!’s. The performance of Yahoo! search engine over the last decade has been on the decline both in terms of popularity and market share. In July 2009, it had a market share of 7.16%.
Currently, Yahoo! search engine has numerous internal materials and is highly commercialized. Other companies pay in order to be included in the Yahoo! search. In this case, a person who wishes to use it would first have to pass an interface of commercial advertisements.
This has impacted negatively on the popularity of Yahoo! due to some element of bias during the search process. The greatest challenge in Yahoo! search is the determination of the nature of a given link, whether it is a natural or artificial citation. For Yahoo! search engine, it is quite effective when it comes to cheesy off topic reciprocal links.
The two search engines described above have significant similarities and differences. They are similar in that they provide similar services, work using relatively similar technologies and retrieval patterns. However, Google and Yahoo! search engines have peculiar origins, popularity, market share, and preferences.
Search engines offer great opportunities for people using the internet since they are able to get rich information easily.
The users rate these service providers on the quality and ease of retrieving information. Owing to the inherent biases by the various search engines, Yahoo! has lost its popularity since it is highly commercialized and is unable to accurately determine the authenticity of the content.
We will write a custom Essay on Google Search Engine and Yahoo Search Engine specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More
Investment in public transport Argumentative Essay essay help free
Introduction Despite its dented public image, public transport remains a better option in the long run. To begin with, public transport helps in environmental conservation through efficiency in energy consumption, reduction in air pollution as well as traffic congestion. Moreover, public transport is cost effective given the efficiency in land use, reduced payments on repairs and insurance of vehicles as well as enhancing safety of the passengers.
On the other hand, private transport has been cited as a means of transport for the middle class due to its expensive nature. Besides, private transport contributes to increased pollution as a result of high consumption of energy and burning of most of world’s fuel. It also increases traffic congestion as well as consuming a lot of space on the streets as well as parking areas. Finally, private transport is cited as unsafe compared to public means.
According to the National Safety Council public transport is about hundred and seventy times safer than private means. However, private transport has been preferred by many people lately due to its reliability, comfort as well as speed and only those who can not afford to buy private cars use public transport. It therefore calls for investment in the public transport to enhance its competitiveness due to the aforementioned long-term benefits. Some of the investment funds should be sourced from taxation of the private transport.
Public transport has proven beneficial to the general public in the long-term compared to the use of private cars in many instances. At the outset, public transport is generally environmentally friendly. The fuel consumption by the public transport is lower hence helps in energy conservation. Consequently, reduction in the world’s petroleum burnt minimizes air pollution. On the other hand, noise levels as well as congestion on the roads are highly reduced.
The latter is attributed to the fact that many people can use fewer buses compared to the many cars needed to transport similar number of passengers. Besides, public transport is more economical compared to the private means. Firstly, it is cost-effective in terms of the auto-maintenance, parking as well the cost of gas. Public transport attracts minimal payments on repairs and insurance.
Additionally, it provides job opportunities to the servicemen hence improving the living standards of many citizens. Furthermore, it helps the business industry through mass transportation of people and luggage. Thirdly, this mode of transport is also efficient in space utilization. Public transport is efficient in land use as it requires minimal parking space in addition to consuming less space on the streets.
There is little doubt that private cars offer comfort, reliability as well as speed to those with high expectations in those areas. Consequently its rise as a preferred means of transport has been witnessed in the recent past and the upward trend is still imminent. According to Simpson only individuals with low expectations would contemplate using public transport compared to private cars (11).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He argues that private cars offer an extension of home comfort including CD players; stereo as well as radio in addition to flexibility and speed hence many middle class people prefer it to public transport (Simpson, 1994, 10). However, the long term effects of this mode of transport are enormous. To begin with, private cars contribute highly to the degradation of the environment through air as well as noise pollution.
Private cars are cited to be high consumers of energy thereby emitting a lot of smoke given their high number on the streets. Besides, the cars emit carbon dioxide gas that is attributed to global warming. Consequently, air is polluted and such things as acid rains and smog are inevitable. Due to their high numbers on the streets, private cars contribute to traffic congestion in the cities and towns thereby jeopardizing transportation.
Moreover, private cars compromise the safety of passengers. According to Simpson individuals using private cars as a means of transport are nine times likely to die in accidents compared to those using other means such as rail (2). Besides, Faulks argues that private cars are inefficient in land use as they consume a lot of space for parking as well as in the streets (146).
He further stresses on the expensiveness of such transport means compared to public transport. Hoogma cites the costs incurred in the repair and maintenance of such private cars as factors contributing to the expensive nature of the mode of transport (128). Furthermore, payments of insurance, cost of parking, as well as cost of gas are colossal (Hoogma, 2002, 129). Job opportunities for the operators are also lost when such mode of transport is adopted.
In a nutshell, private cars have negative effects to the public and natural environment in the long-term despite its comfort compared to public transport. It contributes to environmental degradation, traffic congestion, loss of job opportunities as well as jeopardizing road safety.
However, the public still prefers it to public transport due to the problems facing the latter means of transport. Consequently, a policy that involves taxation of private cars should be implemented to discourage its use as well as preference by the public and instead upgrade the public transport to the efficient and effective levels (Jeanrenaud et al, 1999, 6). The funds accruing from such taxation should be invested in the public transport to elevate it to standards that are competitive to the private mode.
Conclusion Despite the heightened preference of private cars by the public compared to public transport, investment in the latter is not only viable economically but also safe and environmentally friendly in the long run.
We will write a custom Essay on Investment in public transport specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As mentioned above, private transport contributes to environmental degradation; traffic congestion, increased road accidents, as well as loss of job opportunities hence should be discouraged through enactment of suitable policy notably increased taxation.
Such funds should be invested in public transport that has proven beneficial to the public and natural environment in the long-term. For a better and greener future, an investment in an economically and environmentally sound and safe transport mode is fundamental.
Work Cited Faulks, Rex. International transport: an introduction to current practices and future trends. 5th edition. London: Kogan Page Publishers. 2000. Print.
Hoogma, Remco. Experimenting for sustainable transport: the approach of strategic niche management. Abingdon: Taylor
Role of Women Until 1500 Report online essay help: online essay help
Table of Contents Similarities between the Egyptian and Greek women
Differences between the Egyptian and Greek women
Impact of women to society
Women have in the present day been accredited with playing a pivotal role in the building of our nation. This task did not begin in the recent years but can trace its beginning as far back as the advent of time where the traditional role of women was mainly to serve their male counterparts. Prior to the colonial era, the roles of women across the world were greatly limited by the traditional attitudes which viewed women as the “weaker sex”.
While the lives of the women during the 1500s were marked with multiple responsibilities and hardships, the women also took the time out to make merriment thus helping to lighten their weary loads thus creating a balance that made life bearable.
This study shall set out to document the typical life of the Egyptian and Greek women before 1500 AD by doing an extensive research and analyzing first hand accounts of how these women lived and survived in a chauvinistic environment. A detailed analysis of the similarities, differences and how these women impacted their civilizations shall also be discussed.
Similarities between the Egyptian and Greek women The life of these women is interpreted in different light by many a historian. However, the commonly held notion that the society generally devalued the contribution of the women and subjected them to inhuman treatment and suffering is true as is demonstrated by Bentley, Ziegler
Political Ideology of the Whig Party Essay best college essay help
The Whig Party was one of the political parties in the U.S. that was formed during the Jacksonian period of democracy that was from the early 1830s to the mid 1850s. The name Whig was chosen in honor of a group referred to as American Whigs formed in 1776 to fight for the country’s independence. People who wore Whigs during that time were seen to oppose any tyranny and dictatorship.
The Political ideology of the Whig Party was to support the supremacy of Congress over that of presidency in the United States. The party also focused on political ideologies that were centered on modernization and economic protectionism (Mueller 11)
The Whigs, who were modernizers and supporters of President Jefferson’s democracy, saw President Andrew Jackson as a threat to the modernization of the economic, social and political forces in the country during that time.
This parricular Party drew its political principles from the Jeffersonian democratic system that mostly centered on national unity, concession, a balance in regime control and support of the country’s transport network. The Whig party served to dissuade the Jacksonian Democrats who supported the governance and political ideologies of President Jackson (Mueller 12).
One of the founders of the Party was Henry Clay who came up with the American system, a concept that promotes the rapid industrialization and economic growth of America during the Jacksonian era. The Whig party demanded the government’s support so that it could create a modern economy that was market oriented.
This economy would see the skills and expertise of workers being utilized more than their physical strength. Bank credit and bank services would count more than land ownership or the ownership of assets. The party sought to increase industrialization in the country by proposing a business oriented money supply that was based on the national bank and a program that would see the road network facing major renovations and improvements.
Political Ideology of the Jacksonian Democrats The Jacksonian democrats were viewed to be a political philosophy of President Jackson and his democrat supporters who followed Jackson’s policies after the era of President Jefferson’s democracy. The term Jacksonian democracy was derived from President Jackson’s equal political policy that emerged from the Jeffersonian democracy that was mostly characterized by a monopoly of the government.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The political ideology that underlined the Jacksonian democrats was to support the presidency and its executive branch rather than support the Congress. The Jacksonian democracy also sought to broaden the public’s participation in the government’s activities by involving American citizens in voting and decision making exercises (Pearson 176).
The Jacksonian democracy was built on certain political principles that included manifested destinies where Americans were destined to settle and expand their control from the Atlantic to the Pacific region of America, expanded suffrage where voting rights were extended to white men, banking where Jacksonian’s opposed the monopoly the government had on the national, federal and central bank, patronage where political supporters were placed in appointed offices, strict constructionism where Jacksonian democrats favored a federal government that had limited powers and an economy that incorporated a hands off approach (Pearson 178).
The policies that were implemented by President Jackson were based on the political principles highlighted above. These policies saw the role of the national bank being terminated in the U.S. and there was a broadening of citizenry in the government.
President Jackson also implemented policies that saw the country expanding its boundaries westward and removing the American Indian communities from the Southeastern parts of the country. These policies saw the president being labeled as a tyrant and dictator by the Republicans who came to form the Whig Party (Pearson 178).
Jacksonian Democracy Era The Jacksonian era began when President Jackson lost his presidential election in 1824 to Republican John Quincy Adams who was one of the founders of the Whig Party. During this time President Jackson used the Democratic Party to launch his campaign bid for the 1828 elections by focusing on issues such property qualifications for officeholders where most U.S. offices elected state representatives rather than appointed them.
Jackson also focused on voting issues that arose during the election campaigns where opponents were involved in smear campaigns, forgetting the pertinent issues that needed their address. A new party system was developed to deal with the high competition amongst presidential opponents but these new system required a lot of financial resources, people and organizations to run the campaigns and ensure that American citizens voted in the elections.
Jacksonian Democrats believed in the strength of the common man and they did this by trying to protect the American Constitution and ensuring that there was political democracy in the country. The Jacksonians also advocated for the individual liberty of white males on suffrage and also for the economic equality of the average and low income American citizen (Johnson par.6). On entering political office, President Jackson protected the contents of the U.S.
We will write a custom Essay on Political Ideology of the Whig Party specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Constitution despite the fact he was protecting his presidency. He mostly advocated for the freedom of the states from any federal laws that infringed on the rights of the state’s citizens. President Jackson ensured the edifice of the constitution when he barred in the Congress a vital internal enhancement bill that would refute federal funding for the building of the Maysville Road found in Kentucky (Johnson par.2).
President Jackson who was a firm believer in the common man used these issues to gain more votes that would see him securing the presidency in 1828. His Jacksonian supporters included both rich and poor American citizens, and people who practiced slavery and those who called for the abolition of slavery.
Jackson promised his supporters economic freedom as well as ensuring that the average American had a say on how the government’s affairs would be performed. Such policies saw an increase of respect and empowerment of the common man in the United States. The Jacksonian democracy mostly centered on the presidency rather than the congress, a concept that saw President Jackson utilizing the Union to negotiate for trade agreements with Britain and France.
The democracy under President Jackson also focused on the nullification of federal laws that were used to govern the states by proposing that each state have its own laws and rights for its citizens without invoking the use of the Civil Union. President Jackson also advocated for the unification of the Northern and Southern parts of America to form one state so that citizens could move from one region to another without any form of hindrance or obstruction.
The Jacksonian democracy also saw the reduction of high tariffs that had been imposed on imported goods by the Jeffersonian democracy to a lower rate. President Jackson lowered the tariff rate for South Carolina who had called for a nullification of the tariff rates. The actions indicated that he stood by the federal authorities that had been outlined in the constitution that stopped federal states from asserting whichever rights had not been approved (Johnson par.2).
A notable achievement of the Jacksonian democracy was the two party system where the needs of the common man could be met and their opinions input into government policies that were developed to serve the interest of the average American citizen.
This system was also preferable as each party had to compete for public support by meeting their needs and opinions. The Jacksonian era was seen to be the birth of the modern day Democratic Party in the United States. The Jacksonian era also protected the individual liberties of the average white male who had an entitlement to a position of power and authority in the government.
Jacksonian democrats were also guardians of economic equality amongst American citizens. When President Jackson eliminated the national and central banks, he did so because he thought these banks benefited the rich classes in the American society (Johnson par.5).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Political Ideology of the Whig Party by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Eliminating the federal and central/national banks in America during that time saw economic equality amongst average American citizens and the lower class citizens as the economic privileges taken away from the wealthy class were allocated to these citizens. This period of economic equality and stability saw a decrease in poverty levels as well as a stable economy in America during the 1820s and 1830s.
Works Cited Johnson, Cory. Flaws of Jacksonian democracy. 12 August 2008. Web.
Mueller, Henry R. The Whig party in Pennsylvania. New York: Read Books, 2009.
Pearson, Charles, M. A history of American political theories. New Jersey, US: Transaction Publishers, 2008. Print.
Transportation and Public Health Issues Term Paper custom essay help
It has been proven from a study carried out by journal pediatrics that, in the event mothers’ breastfeed their newborns in the first six months approximately, 900 lives and billions of dollars could be saved. Similarly, it was determined that many deaths can be prevented through breastfeeding.
The study evaluated 10 frequent illnesses that occur in children thereby determining their occurrence and expenses incurred in their treatment. It is noteworthy that babies are less likely to develop obesity and leukemia as the breast milk they consume affects the blood insulin level. Furthermore, antibodies are a constituent of breast milk thus it guards the children against infections.
According to Greenberg, the study seems not to have mentioned the fact that breast milk is cheap compared to infant formula. Additionally, these formulas do not contain the essential nutritional and psychological values attached to breast milk. It is evident that mothers should be encouraged to breast feed their newborns, and the best way to achieve this is to ban the promotion of infant formulas in hospitals (Greenberg, 2010).
The new government legislation that requires employers to provide nursing facilities for working mothers to breastfeed their children is a good start for this campaign. Similarly, hospitals will be evaluated on the basis of ensuring mothers breastfeed newborns before getting discharged from the facility.
Dr. Bartick Melissa affirms that the benefits of breast milk are not appreciated. In addition, she refers to breast feeding as a public health matter. It is evident that some mothers either fail to start or quit breastfeeding at an early stage. As a result, it is essential for mothers to prepare before commencing breastfeeding to avoid stress at work. It is a fact that mothers at pediatrics academy are not encouraged to breastfeed; as they are offered formulas instead.
Dr. Bartick insists that hospitals practices should change and in the process embrace the benefits of breast feeding. Furthermore, she affirms that mothers should not be blamed for such failures. It is noteworthy that Batrick’s study is priceless as not every woman can successfully breastfeed. On the other hand, this study depicts that mothers should be encouraged to breast feed their newborns (Greenberg, 2010).
References Greenberg, Sally. (2010). Breastfeeding a public health issue. Savvy Consumer. Web.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More United States Department of Transportation (DOT). (2010). Transportation is a public Health issue: DOT doing its part to keep kids moving. Fast lane. Web.
Film History as Cultural Myth-Making Report writing essay help: writing essay help
As one of the most effective historical films, Gallipoli directed by Peter Weir not only projects on the screen the historical representation of the landing of the Australian and New Zealand Army Corps (ANZAC) at Gallipoli on April 25th, 1915, but also represent one of the critical heritage myths of Australian national identity.
To begin with, the interpretation of Gallipoli should not be limited to a war or anti-war film though the series is based on authentic historic events. Along with depicting the significant event in the history of the First World War, Weir developed one of his favorite themes of behavior of individuals under the extreme circumstances for examining the local Australian stereotypes and shedding light upon the main elements of the concept of national identity.
The film emphasizes the links between the personal and national destinies. The series portrays Australia as an isolated country and its citizens as innocent and enthusiastic population which believes in myths and the inevitable triumph of the good.
The director of the film utilizes the visual stereotypes of the Australian desert landscapes for producing the effect of isolation of the country from the rest of the world. The main protagonists of the film Archy Hamilrton (Mark Lee) and Frank Dunne (Mel Gibson) contrast the desert landscapes with their youth, enthusiasm and love of life. Hatlof (1993) noted that “in Gallipoli, he [Weir] stresses the unity of man and the landscape that is only seemingly hostile to man” (In quest of self-identity).
Another contradiction of the film is the opposition of the attributes of Australianness and Britishness as the opposition of the good indigenous population versus bad foreigners. Thompson (1992) admitted that “Peter Weir’s popular film Gallipoli convinced many Australian viewers that British officers were responsible for the unnecessary sacrifice of the West Australian Light Horsemen” (History and ‘Betrayal’: The Anzac Controversy).
Though this approach has been criticized by some historians, the film reflects one of the heritage myths of the Australian community based on the contradiction of the innocent Australians who fight against the enemies and are ready to sacrifice their lives to the ideology of national identity. Depicting the “bad” British soldiers and “innocent” Australian warriors, the film justifies the contemporary tendency of idealizing the participants of the events at Gallipoli.
Disregarding particular historical inaccuracies of the plot of the film, the representation of the historical events in Gallipoli does not contradict the existing evidence related to the campaign because the author shifted the emphasis to celebration of the idea of national identity and development of the national ideology.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More As one of the effective historical films, JFK directed by Oliver Stone projects on the screen a more significant heritage myth of American identity than a mere representation of the director’s version of the assassination of President Kennedy.
The release of JFK caused the debates concerning the role of filmmaking as the transmitter of cultural values and national ideology. The director made his documentary a well-structured narrative, beginning with the presentation of the background information and formulating a thesis for the whole work about the role of the President Kennedy in the history of the USA and other countries.
Telling a story of “bad guys’ who planned the assassination of the President and good guys who are trying to investigate the case and do justice, Stone expresses not only his views of the development of the events but the opinion of a significant number of his counterparts.
Actually, screening the developing the theme of the struggle of the good against the bad, the director of the film touches upon the theme of the war in Vietnam and President’s inclination to finish it before his murder.
Stone’s motivation for examining the assassination emerged specifically from his veteran status – he wanted to understand the policy of the war and to determine whether or not the conspiracy that murdered Kennedy was working in the interest of prolonging it” (Sturken, 1997, p. 70).
The director projected the radical myth concerning the dramatic consequences of the assassination for the following development of the events in the country, namely the continuation of the conflict in Vietnam despite the President’s plan to put an end to it.
Though the authenticity of the historical materials which became the basis for the film is debatable, there is documentation which supports the assertion that the Vietnam affairs became the precondition for the assassination of Kennedy. Romanowski (1993) noted that “thesis that Kennedy was planning a withdrawal of United States troops from Vietnam after the 1964 election and, subsequently, working to end the cold war, is credible” (Oliver Stone’s JFK).
We will write a custom Report on Film History as Cultural Myth-Making specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The myth that if the President Kennedy had not been killed, the world would be better and healthier exists in the contemporary American society. For the purpose of correcting this crime, the director motivates the audience to prevent the same historical mistakes in future.
Along with expressing his personal opinion of the assassination of the President Kennedy, Stone used the historical documents and archives, making his interpretation of the past events in JFK persuasive.
Reference List Hatlof, M. (1993). In quest of self-identity: Gallipoli, mateship, and the construction of Australian national identity. Journal of Popular Film and Television, 21.
Romanowski, W. (1993). Oliver Stone’s JFK: Commercial filmmaking, cultural history, and conflict. Journal of Popular Film and Television, 21.
Sturken, M. (October 1997). Reenactment, fantasy and the paranoia of history. History and Theory, 36 (3).
Thompson, A. (December 1992) History and ‘Betrayal’: The Anzac Controversy, History Today, 43 (1).
Summary of “The Shunammite” Short Story by Ines Arredondo college essay help near me
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction “The Shunnamite” is a short story from the book written by Ines Arredondo, Underground River and Other Stories: the Shunammite. The title “The Shunammite” preempts the details of this particular short story because it is derived from the Bible in the book of 1 Kings 1:1-4. Here, King David had grown old, and his years on earth had been long. He was constantly sick and always cold. His servants, therefore, decided to look for a young virgin who would lie beside King David in the hope of fulfilling and inducing some of the old king’s deepest desires.
After looking throughout Israel, Abishag, a Shunammite woman, was found, and she was brought to the king to comfort him. From the beginning of the short story, Licha embodies purity and innocence when she comes to attend to her uncle. However, she soon gets entangled in an abusive marriage to meet her family obligations. The summary of “The Shunammite” short story shall be examined in this essay.
It is through characterization that one gets to understand the predicaments of the protagonist Licha, who must struggle with her wishes and family duty.
Licha Through characterization, readers can empathize with Licha. One can feel what she is feeling and hence, feel the sense of reality projected in the narrative. One way in which characterization can be depicted is through the kind of dialogues that Licha has with the other people in the story.
One realizes that she has the noblest intentions and often wants to look out for the interests of others before herself. On the other hand, as one continues, one sees the helplessness she is. For example, when her uncle talks to her about Polish jewelry, Licha realizes that this is a vital family treasure that must be relished. Her uncle quickly insists that she should have the silver and immediately turns his head away from her (Arredondo, 4).
This kind of bullying continues throughout the rest of the story even when Licha is told to get married to her uncle. One, therefore, sees the kind of victimization that plays out in the story’s setting. Nonetheless, the protagonist is not just a two-dimensional character; she has her motivations and ideas.
One cannot help but see her as a victim because she was unable to speak against the unfairness imposed upon her by her family members. The author often talks about Licha’s inner thoughts. For example, at the beginning of the story, the protagonist says that “I was certain I had the power to domesticate passion, to purify everything in the burning air that surrounded me without consuming me” (Arredondo, 4).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These inner reflections continue throughout the story, and they have a significant meaning as they often bring out Licha’s motivations. For example, when Licha is required to get married to her uncle, she obliges because she was concerned about his well being. Later on, when he miraculously recovers, she continues to live with him because of her considerable sense of loyalty.
The author has put the protagonist in a difficult situation, and how she handled this situation is what endears her to readers. Licha often struggles to place her experiences in context, and sometimes she was not able to do that successfully. The author successfully illustrates what it means to be defenseless as a Mexican woman through her protagonist.
The author wanted people to understand the plight of women in her setting. She wanted individuals to know that they were more than mere objects of male desires. Licha has dreams and ambitions; she is not a second class human being as most individuals had assumed in her culture. Perhaps another critical role that Licha’s character plays in the book is to illustrate how women in this society were slammed to a life of servitude.
Licha was bound to her uncle’s bedside after his recovery, even though she had initially been married to him so that she could inherit his possession. She is one who submits under the domination of a male figure. She is powerless even when the person exploiting her is physically weak. Licha is submerged in her circumstances and cannot do anything about it.
Apoloni Another interesting character in the book is Licha’s uncle; Apoloni. He first comes off as a caring relative who wants to impart knowledge to his niece. In fact, at the beginning of the story, one would be forgiven to assume that the narrative would be about death and how uncle Apoloni dealt with it. He starts by talking about the past, some of the accomplishments made by the family, the year of hunger, the year of the yellow corn, and many of his other memories during the past (Arredondo, 4).
His arthritis has shriveled him up because he was now at a point where he was ‘floating on his bed.’ However, as “The Shunammite” by Ines Arredondo summary shows, we soon realize that Apoloni is not a harmless old man. As his niece attends to him, he starts getting overwhelmed by incestuous thoughts. He longs for the purity and innocence that Licha so quickly puts across.
He harbors these thoughts even though it would result in an abusive relationship and would put an end to Licha’s hopes and wishes. As the story progresses and Apoloni recovers, he changes from being a vulnerable and weak individual to a predator and selfish being. The purity that attracted him to his niece in the first place would be destroyed if she started something with him.
We will write a custom Essay on Summary of “The Shunammite” Short Story by Ines Arredondo specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More One can also see that this individual did not care for his niece because if he did, then he would not have made those demands. One can also see that this uncle started the abusive relationship because he knew that he could get away with it. Other family members, including his wife, were too loyal to their family ever to oppose his actions. His wife cared too much about family honor and public perceptions of the family.
This was why she became an accomplice to his unforgivable behavior. Uncle Apoloni is, therefore, a manipulative and dominating character that puts his needs first even if it involves destroying the needs of another person. The author does not paint a picture of an innately evil character in Apoloni. He is multifaceted and has strong points as well. Readers can identify with some of his struggles, such as arthritis and the impending death.
One can also see that it is these insecurities about his own meaningless life that cause him to act out. He was missing something and hoped to find it in the fresh beauty of his niece. The character of this antagonist also reflects another critical component of the story. He is engaged in an endless search for the supreme, which is epitomized in the purity of Licha.
His niece was a virgin and, therefore, represented an entire state to him. The problem was that this search was relentless because uniting with such a pure being would result in her corruption rather than his purification. This illustrates the extent to which this individual was mistaken. The author, therefore, succeeds in characterization because she has not portrayed a stereotype of a typical dying man. She complicates Apoloni’s character by showing how he fell victim to his lustful thoughts.
Aunt Ponchita In “The Shunammite”story by Ines Arredondo, Aunt Ponchita, Apoloni’s wife, was also another surprising individual. At the beginning of the story, she seems to like this caring character. Licha has very fond memories of her as she goes to see her ailing uncle. However, when Ponchita learns about her husband’s wish to marry his niece, she does not react to it or oppose it in any way.
She hides this fact because of her need to maintain a particular family image. Aunt Ponchita is, therefore, a representation of betrayal on the part of women. She should have been there for her niece but instead chose to help out her manipulative and predatory husband.
One can, therefore, see that she lacks the compassion characteristic of most aunts. Additionally, even a sense of dignity does not cause this woman to act morally. She is concerned about her sense of well being and self-preservation. She is not strong enough to speak out against this grave misdeed, and she watches as her niece’s life gets destroyed.
Perhaps another critical role that her aunt plays in the story is to demonstrate the degree of subservience that women in that Latin America society were expected to possess. They were not bold enough to confront elements of their culture that oppressed them. In this regard, Aunt Ponchita is a stereotypical image of a Latin American woman at that time.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Summary of “The Shunammite” Short Story by Ines Arredondo by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In essence, the author of this short story does an excellent job of giving depth to her characters (Giona and Kennedy, 12). They are fully developed because they have histories. They reflect upon or talk about their childhood memories, their ambitions, and the like. A lot of the story is rooted in providing backgrounds for the characters so that their actions can be interpreted thoroughly.
Also, because of the dynamic changes that take place in the middle of the narrative, characters soon become dynamic as well. For example, uncle Apoloni first appears to be weak and helpless. However, as the story progresses, he changes and becomes this lustful individual who then defies expectation by causing his niece to lie with him. That dynamism of the character adds a lot of flavor to the story and leads to much progress in the narrative.
Additionally, realistic characters often help in making this story such a good piece of literature. It is possible to relate with all the individuals in the story because struggles, challenges, and ambitions are common to all human beings, which are depicted throughout the story. Licha is not a cardboard character; her subservience is a testimony to her weakness, while her sweet and caring nature is her main strength. This intermingling of character traits creates superior individuals who make the story worthwhile.
It can also be said that this story is more focused on character than plot. In other words, it is the characters that lead to developments in the story over and above the plot within the story. It is admirable the ease with which these characters have been developed even though it is a short story. Since there is little room to give too much history about them, the author needed to be very careful about the information she picked out or chose to convey in the story (Stauffer, 35).
For example, as the summary of “The Shunammite” short story shows, when she tells us about the fond memories that Licha had about the place where her uncle was located, one can relate that to the immense sense of loss that Licha felt when she was told that her uncle was ailing. Furthermore, one can also understand why she chose to submit to her uncle’s incestuous wishes later on in the story.
It is also interesting that the author does not fall into the trap of creating flat characters whose primary function is to offer information about the protagonist or other main characters. The beauty of this literary piece is that the main character is the narrator of the story. One, therefore, relates experiences in the novel to her point of view. This is why it is easy to understand why she chooses to make the decisions that she does in the story.
Conclusion Characterization in this short story reflects the realism of this piece. Each has his or her flaws, thus depicting a rational image of the people in the story. Some of the developments in the tale are particularly disturbing, and it is through characterization that members of the audience can feel as though those developments are happening to them.
Readers are also able to relate to these characters because of the inner dialogue that the protagonist keeps having and the external conversations that she has with other people she interacts. In the end, the story has become compelling and quite impressive.
References Arredondo, Ines. Underground river and other stories: the Shunammite. NE: University of Nebraska Press, 1996
Stauffer, Marilyn. Outline on literary elements. The University of South Florida. 5 August 2007. Web.
WalMart and its Criticism Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Introduction In recent years, Wal Mart has come under intense criticisms. Its major critics have been Christian groups and labor organizations in relation to the company’s practices. In the long run, the company has ended having bad public relations. This is a matter of concern to the management. As a matter of fact, there are various issues that need to be looked at for sustainability.
Bad public relations affect the company’s performance in various ways. Although there might be some misconceptions in relation to the company’s policies, there is need to ensure that such issues are clearly addressed. This will make it easy for various stakeholders to understand the company’s position in a better way.
Criticisms In recent years, several labor unions have argued that the company does not allow its workers/employees to become their members (Frank 5). They have further implied that Wal Mart has a very strict anti-union stance. This means that workers cannot join trade unions without any victimization. For instance, in 2005, the company was negatively portrayed by labor unions through media campaigns (Kabel 7). An example of such negative media campaigns is the Wal-Mart Watch advert.
This advert was sponsored by the service employees union (Kabel 12). In addition, there was the wake up Wal- Mart advert by the food and commercial union. Wal-Mart has also been criticized for locking night shift workers in the shopping malls. This case was compounded by an employee who waited for hours before he could get any help after crushing an ankle (Frank 15). The worker could not get any medical attention because all the exits were locked.
Various organizations have argued that this is the cheapest practice that the company has ever engaged in as far as risk management is concerned (Stilgoe 32). Furthermore, this is a very draconian working environment. Wal- Mart is being accused of paying its employees low and unacceptable wages. Most people believe that the company is getting away with such a practice and this is unacceptable.
Although these payments are above the poverty levels, the company is being pressurized to at least increase its wages. Because of this, the company’s competitors and other organizations are saying that there is an impact to workers wages when it enters a given market. In this case, the company can displace other high wage retail jobs.
This therefore becomes an economic loss to most workers. In addition, disposable income is greatly affected and this reduces their purchasing power. On the other hand, the company reduces a country’s employment by 2.7% (Meekel 16). This is in relation to its store openings as far as retail employment is concerned.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These critics have further implied that Wal- Marts entry to a given market makes other retailers to change their wage policies and practices. In this case, it depresses wages and salaries. In addition, the company is believed to displace good and better paying jobs. Jobs that have been eliminated pay 18% more than what the company offers in a metropolitan area. Generally, merchandising workers wages are reduced by more than 0.8 % (Meekel 24).
Wal- Mart is also being accused of exposing employees to dangerous health hazards. This means that employees are subjected to poor working conditions. According to them (critics), the company is big enough to ensure that health standards and practices are adhered to (Barbaro 19). To push their case forward, they have made reference to the company’s reports that attest to the fact that it has extensive health problems in its directly sourced factories.
Apart from these arguments and accusations; there is a feeling that Wal- Marts entry in a given market hurts small businesses. This is because; there is a reduction in net employment more so by small retailers. As a matter of fact, this increases the chances of job destruction in case there is an exit from the market.
From the Wake- up Wal- Mart media campaign, the company has been accused of making taxpayers to suffer because of its poor pay and low wages (Barbaro 34). This means that public assistance as a result of the company’s policies makes different states to lose a lot of money.
Various communities feel that the company does not consult them in their expansion programs. In this case, they argue that Wal- Mart builds various stores in different towns without involving to residents (Barbaro 41). The company is also facing various gender and sexual orientation law suits. It is alleged that female employees are discriminated against as far as promotions and pay are concerned. This is a very big law suit considering that the company employs more than 1.5 million women (Stilgoe 23).
The company has received various grievances in relation to employee-employer relationships. There is an unfavorable relationship that makes it hard for employees to carry out their duties more effectively. This affects their productivity and ability to become more creative and innovative (Barbaro 19).
Recommendations All these arguments and accusations have in one way or the other affected the company’s public relations. As a matter of fact, the company needs to rectify the bad public relations it has received. In addition, they can still turn this public relations mess into a more positive public image. As much as the company has launched an effective media campaign, working families for Wal- Mart, it needs to intensify such campaigns to correct its image. This will give it an opportunity to tell its own side of the story (Sellers 21).
We will write a custom Essay on WalMart and its Criticism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In this case, people will be able to understand what is going on in the company instead of reading stories from the media. There should be more intensive counter criticisms through effective public relations. As a matter of fact, the company has a PR website, walmartfacts.com, which needs to be made more effective. Through this website, the company can be able to engage various stakeholders and come up with the best way forward.
Wal- Mart needs to engage the services of a competent PR firm that will interact with stakeholders on a personal level. This will give them a chance to express themselves in relation to the company’s policies. In addition, the company will be able to explain these concerns before they are taken advantage of by its critics.
As far as the company’s health standards and working conditions are concerned, they can invite people to visit its headquarters and stores. This will enable the company to interact well with various parties and come up with a solution to such a problem.
The company needs to come up with good health coverage plans that will cover more employees (Basker 9). These plans should be well marketed and publicized to attract more employees and ensure that they are taken care of. This will correct the bad public relations that it has received in relation to health standards. Online interaction should also be enhanced to improve its relations with shoppers and customers. This will enable the company to get rid of any misconceptions in advance.
Because it has been hurt by bad public relations, the company should increase its public relations and media team. This will ensure that any concerns and bad public relations are attended to without straining its existing team. In the long run, it will attract the best talent in public relations and improve its image (Basker 27). Through these recommendations, the company will be in a better position to improve its bad public relations for sustainability. This is because bad public relations can affect its business and market position.
Conclusion Bad public relations affect the company’s performance in various ways. Although there might be some misconceptions in relation to the companies policies, there is need to ensure that such issues are clearly addressed. This will make it easy for various stakeholders to understand the company’s position in a better way. All these arguments and accusations have in one way or the other affected its public relations.
As a matter of fact, the company needs to rectify the bad public relations it has received. In addition, they can still turn this public relations mess into a more positive public image. As much as the company has launched an effective media campaign, working families for Wal- Mart, it needs to intensify such campaigns to correct its image. This will give it an opportunity to tell its own side of the story.
Works Cited Barbaro, M. It’s not Only about Price at Wal-Mart. New York: The New York Times, 2007.
Not sure if you can write a paper on WalMart and its Criticism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Basker, E. Job Creation or Destruction? Labor-Market Effects of Wal-Mart Expansion. Missouri: University of Missouri, 2002. Print.
Frank, T. A. A Brief History of Wal-Mart. The Washington Monthly, 2006.
Kabel, M. Wal-Mart, Critics Slam Each Other on Web. Washington: The Washington Post, 2006.
Meekel, D. Wal-Mart Flacks Detail Plan – Again, Lebanon Daily News, 2005. Print.
Sellers, J. Deliver Us from Wal-Mart? Christianity Today, 2007.
Stilgoe, J. Wal-Mart Giant Can Be Tamed. The Boston Globe, 2006.
How volcanoes have impacted the global climate Research Paper essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
A volcanic eruption is said to have occurred when magma, ash or dust found in the earth’s crust find their way to the earth’s surface through an opening. The eruption affects the world’s climate negatively. It has a cooling effect, warming effect and produces green house gasses, dusts and chemicals to the environment in turn affecting climate. This paper discusses the climatic effects of volcanic eruptions (Bush, 2006).
When an eruption occurs, it releases gasses, dust and magma to/on the earth’s surface and the atmosphere. Depending on how sunlight interacts with these exposed compounds, the result may be climate warming or cooling. The effect is both in the long term and short term.
For example the eruption of Mount Pinatubo in 1991, caused the world temperatures to drop by degree Fahrenheit for a period approximated to be two years. This resulted to slow growth of plans in Europe and other parts of the world. Tambora in 1815 caused a temperature drop in Europe and Northern America which was acute that crops failed and lead to drought in the countries affected (Morgan, Steven
Israel and Palestinian Conflict Research Paper best college essay help
Introduction The unending clash between Israel and the Palestinians has caught many people who live in the region unaware. Although very easy to understand, the conflict, which has existed for decades now, is deeply complex. Emanating from this conflict is what each side believes: the Israelis believe that the creator of the universe entitled them to a land called Israel.
On the other hand, the Palestinians believe that their creator also entitled them to a land called Palestine. Regrettably, both the Palestinians and Israelis are demanding one thing, that is, land in Middle East, which it group refer differently. Each of these two groups have drawn a strong line of believe, that is, the religious Jewish Israelis and religious Muslim Palestinians associate these land as God given.
The Israelis believed that God (Jehovah) gave them this land and therefore, they should guard it jealously. Similarly, the Palestinians believe that their God (Allah) provided them with Palestine, and by giving it away, it would not only be a sin, but also, an insult to Allah.
The Israel and Palestinian conflict is much more complex than this effortless rationalization. Most importantly is the fact that religious and historical disparities play an imperative role in establishing this conflict.
For sixty years now, the world has witnessed the fight between Palestinians and Israelis, and every confrontation, each death, and every activity of terrorism, only expands the abhorrence and the disinclination to reach a compromised solution. The paper takes a closer look on the conflict and how manipulation of religion can cause insecurity and hamper peace (Isseroff, p.1).
Antique History of Israel, Palestine and their Religious Inclinations Historically, the Jews comprises of two groups: ancient Jews and the modern Jews. The ancient Jews (Hebrews) referred to their land as Israel, Judea, Samaria and Canaan just the way it appears in the Bible.
Thus, to them, the ancient times were the days of the Bible. Although not all modern Jews are Christians, they also believe that God gave them a land called Israel under the leadership of Abraham, Moses, Davis and many other leaders. Over 2000 years ago, the Roman Empire captured Israel and took over supremacy. Its main aim was to control the Jews and govern them.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In order to suppress the growing Jewish rebellions, the Romans went ahead to obliterate the Jewish temple situated in Jerusalem where hundred of Jews lost their lives. Life became difficult under the Roman Empire rule forcing some Jews to free their ancestral land in an exodus called “The Diaspora.” Nevertheless, some Jews remained behind. Those who freed never came back until the end of the Second World War and the Holocaust.
Several foreign empires invaded the ancient Jewish kingdoms and claimed supremacy over it. In fact, in 135 CE, the Roman Empire trounced the third revolt and eventually debarred all Jews occupying Jerusalem and its environs, by selling majority of them into slavery. The Roman Empire then renamed the roman province as Palestine.
Following the successive subjugation of Palestine in the seventh century, the few residual denizens incorporated themselves into the Arab culture and Muslim religion in order to preserve their identity. Nevertheless, the Arab culture and Muslim religion did not usurp the whole population, as there were some Christian and Jewish minorities living in Palestine, particularly in Jerusalem.
It is important to note that the Crusaders subjugated and took control of Palestine in two brief periods where they debarred the inhabitants of Jerusalem, Jews and Muslims into The Diaspora and some into slavery. The crusaders did not conquer Palestine fro the third time and for a long time, the Arab empires took control until 1516 when Palestine became part of the Ottoman Empire.
The Israel and Palestinian conflict is mainly a misunderstanding between the Jews referring to themselves as “Israelis” due to their background, and the Arab population of Palestine, popularly “Palestinians” following the remaining by the Roman Empire. It is imperative to note that after the subjugation of Palestine by the Roman Empire, the killing and expulsion of the Jews, the Arab-speaking Muslims increased in numbers to form a dominant ethnic cluster (Lesch and Tschirgi, pp. 45-49).
The Ascend of Zionism and its Effects Towards the end of the 19th century, a small group of Jews formed a religious-nationalist and political movement to champion their rights. In particular, they had a mandate of restoring the land of Israel, which for a long time, they considered their home. Thus, Zionism started as a political movement to recapture the lost land.
Immediately after the formation of Zionism, the Jews who had gone to “The Diaspora”, that is, Eastern Europe including Yemen, started drifting back to Palestine to champion the acquisition of their national land. Many Jews believed that Zionism was the solitary avenues that will enable them achieve national independence, and it was perhaps the only solution to anti-Semitism following the centuries of harassment and repression of the Jews who had freed to foreign territories.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Israel and Palestinian Conflict specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In a move aimed at strengthening this nationalist and political movement, the group held its first Zionist congress in 1897 in Basel under the leadership of a Theodor Herzl (a writer and journalist from Austria). In his earlier book, The Jewish State, Theodor Herzl tinted a vision of an independent Jewish state where the Jews would be luminosity for the rest of the nations.
A good number of orthodox Jews held the view that only the Messiah could show them the way into “promised land”. However, the unending pogroms such as the first and second world wars and the Holocaust became an impediment hence, making many reluctant to make up their minds on whether to stay in the Diaspora or go back. Perhaps this is the reason why there exist some anti-Zionist conventional Jews for example, Naturei Karteh and Satmer even by today (Howard, pp. 2-8, 455).
The British Autonomy on Palestine The First World War saw Great Britain incarcerate some a fraction of Middle East as well as Palestine from the ruling Ottoman Empire. In order to strengthen the rising Zionism, the British pledged support to Zionists of establishing a Jewish State. In 1917, the Balfour Declaration mandated the Jews to occupy a section of Palestine especially at Transjordan.
On realizing this, the Arab inhabitants resorted to violent insurrections to both the Jews and the British rule with an aim of protecting their land. The Great Revolt of 1936-1939 saw incidences of radicalism initiated by Mufti of Jerusalem take the lives of many Jews and other Palestinian Arabs who dared to compete with him. The Zionists had also their own defense mechanism to counter these insurgent groups. They too carried retaliatory attacks on Arabs during this period.
The British rule tried diplomatic skills to quell the violence by suggesting division of Palestine. However, the Arabs rejected this proposal vehemently forcing the British to halter the Jewish immigration strategy in 1937. This angered Zionists who ten started accusing British of collusion.
Notwithstanding the pressure form United States, the British rule in Palestine declined to allow further Jewish immigration, and on a catastrophic note, the British arrested illegal immigrants (Jews) and either sent them back or detained them in Cyprus. This policy continued to attract more opposition and violent attacks until it became indefensible for the British.
The British referred the mater to United Nations for further deliberation. United Nations resolved to partition Palestine a move that the Palestinians and Arabs rejected quickly although acknowledged by the Jews. The move by United Nations appeared complex of course with the internalization of Bethlehem and Jerusalem in addition to seven parts.
For example, “a partition plan for Palestine”, proposed the separation of Jews cohabiting in Jerusalem from other Jews through a large Arab corridor. Through these partitions, the Jewish state was to occupy 56 percent of the Palestine territory and the Arabs to occupy the rest. Nevertheless, following mutual antagonism between the two groups, the plan failed to work (Isseroff, p.1).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Israel and Palestinian Conflict by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Establishment of the State of Israel The meditation of religion continued to affect the region negatively.After the plan failed to work, conflict escalated even more. The Palestinian Arabs became so violent, attacked the Jewish convoys, and restricted them from entering Jerusalem. On realizing this, the Zionist also retaliated back and demolished numerous villages belonging to Palestinians.
Contrary to the expectations of the Arabs, Israel became an independent state in 1948; something that sparkled further retaliatory attacks from neighboring Arab countries towards Israel. However, the Zionists had an established Israel Defense Force that fought these enemies and finally won the War of Independence.
Nevertheless, the conflict did not end and it forced the two groups to enter into another agreement, armistice agreement, in 1949. Israeli took control of the environs of Jordan River and Mediterranean Sea; Jordan administered West Bank and East Jerusalem, and Egypt took care of Gaza Strip.
On the contrary, the neighboring Arab countries refused to absorb the whole population of Arab refugees permanently. Instead, they demanded that they return to Israel, as this was their rightful home. Today, there are over a million Palestinians living in refugee camps under deplorable and despondent conditions simply because Israel cannot allow an influx of Palestinians into Israel, as this would lead to Arab majority.
Notably, Israel blames the neighboring Arab countries of the Palestinian refugees citing that they should absorb them into their countries permanently. Ironically, some Palestinian groups such as Fatah do confess that yielding to the Palestinian ‘right to return’ would signify the vanishing of Israel as a Jewish state. In most cases, this has been the fundamental cause of Israel and Palestinian conflict (Radley, pp. 586-614).
Arab Rejectionism and the Six-Day War The Arab-Israel conflict continued even as the neighboring Arab countries refused to recognize Israel as a state. Some of them organized terrorist attacks on Israel for example, the 1959 Yasser Arafat led attack and Egypt’s 1964 PLO attack.
In 1967, Israel attacked Palestinian regions including West Bank, Gaza Strip and East Jerusalem and made one million Palestinians under Israel rule. Nevertheless, division broke among Israelis on the aftermath West Bank and the novel religious-nationalistic association that threatened their interests.
Since 1967, the focus of Palestinian confrontation has been on the liberation of these two regions. Nevertheless, dividing Jerusalem and its environs to Israel and Palestine remains a predicament as Israelis believe that this is a holy place that in inseparable (Oren, pp. 8-47).
Palestinian State and the Peace Process It is quite clear that meditation of a certain religion is very dangerous to the county’s security. The conflict between Israel and Palestine is mainly the difference of religious fundamental ideologies between Jews (who observe Christianity) and the Arabs who are mainly Muslims.
When United Nations declared Zionism as an act of racism, it lost the ground of arbitration. The two groups are reluctant to lower their stances on the land issue and give peace a chance to prevail. The world has witnessed unprecedented violence over the legitimacy of Israel and uprising in Middle East for decades now.
The Oslo peace agreement of 1994 has not yielded peace in the religion and extremist attacks continue to hammer the region. Even after the Oslo agreement, Israel continues to establish Jewish settlement schemes in West Bank and Gaza Strip contrary to the agreement. This has not only hampered the peace process but also instituted further attacks where hundreds of Jews and Palestinians die on each attack.
The Palestinians have resorted to a terror network of extremism comprising of Hamas, al Qaeda and others carrying out suicide attacks in regions dominated by Israelis. Although President Clinton presented a proposal to establish a Palestinian state comprising of Gaza Strip and West Bank, the Israeli continue to hold their religious fundamentalism hence, rejecting this proposal.
In the recent, Israel has dismissed Palestinian workers leading to an increase in poverty levels. Additionally, due to this ongoing religious bigotry between Palestine and Israel, there is restricted freedom of movement for fear of attacks (Great Transition Initiative, pp. 3-5).
Conclusion The Israel and Palestinian conflict lies in the fact that each of the two nationalistic movements, Palestinians and Israelis, allege to own a similar land. Principally, the religious fundamentalism regarding this land is the main cause of this conflict. In addition, the two groups do not trust each other and each has its own demonization and presumptions on the other.
To Israelis, many Arab sates are not only undemocratic, but also weak economically, culturally and socially. They also rebrand them as aggressive and terroristic. On the other hand, the Arabs believe that Israelis are vanquishers and majestic aggressors, who for eternity aspire to manage the entire Middle East. Even as Israel rejects teachings of Muslim in its schools, the Arabs also promote anti-Semitic typecasts and conspiracy theories aimed at underpinning Zionism.
Works Cited Great Transition Initiative. The Israeli-Palestinian Conflict: Overcoming the Impasse. 2009. Web.
Howard, Sachar. A History of Israel from the Rise of Zionism to Our Time. New York: Alfred A. Knopf. 1976. Print.
Isseroff, Ami. Israel, Palestine and the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict. Mideast Web. 2010. Web.
Lesch, Ann, Tschirgi, Dan. Origins and Development of the Arab-Israeli Conflict. West Port, Connecticut: Greenwood Press. 1998. Print.
Oren, Michael. Six Days of War: June 1967 and the Making of the Modern Middle East. Presidio Press. 2003. Print.
Radley, Rene. The Palestinian Refugees: The Right to Return in International Law. The American Journal of International Law, 72(3), 1978, 586-614.
Definition: What is news? Definition Essay best college essay help: best college essay help
Several kinds of information constitute news. These include facts, figures, Interpretation, opinion and announcements. Facts, together with figures refer to statements of unchanging elements in a news item. If it is changing, fact refers then to the last known state of that element.
Interpretations try to draw meaning from occurrences. It is the effort put into understanding the situation under consideration. Opinions seek to inform the reader or listener about the aspects of a situation based on law, economics, or a multidisciplinary view of the situation under review. Its purpose is to predict effects, describe impact or present possibilities in relation to the occurrence of an event. Finally, announcements form a critical component of news.
This informs the recipients about an event or a change. Its purpose is to update on the latest state of a news item. It includes aspects like major job appointments, upcoming events, death and funerals, among others. Public announcement of road closures fall under this category.
We use news for many different purposes including acquisition of facts, formation of opinions, settlement of arguments and for planning of activities. Many things are just necessary to know regardless of whether there is anything expected from us in relation to it. This includes matters like terrorist threats, progress of war, presidential visits, among others. It keeps us in the loop and greatly aids our social interaction.
Formation of opinion is important in issues where we need to take a stand such as participation in elections and referendums. Settling arguments becomes necessary when there are factual errors in understanding, or differing viewpoints on how a matter will evolve. Finally, news is useful to us for planning our activities. The weather report is invaluable for us when we are planning to travel.
Good or reliable news must come from trustworthy sources such as a well-known media houses, official communication by campus administration on notice boards, or trusted persons. If it comes from other sources, then it needs to be verifiable by independent parties. Credible news influences action.
For instance if the government raises terror alert levels, then signs of enhanced security such as in airports and public places ought to be visible. These factors also determine whether one can trust a news source. Any news that sounds sensationalized, or that comes from suspicious sources or that is out of context attracts suspicion.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Generally, any news that sounds ‘off’ and is not verifiable does not command confidence. This applies for official communication and for personal communication. The most suspicious news sources are online news sources presenting partisan views because they often present their views as though they were fact.
The definition of news therefore must include the following elements. It requires informative characteristics, an element of ‘newness’ and must have an objective. Before an item qualifies to be news, there has to be an additional amount of information it is adding to what the recipient already knows.
Whether it is personal communication, press release, blog reports or announcements on a notice board, additional information is necessary for an item to become news. Secondly, it requires an element of newness. If it sounds old, then it fails in its function as news. Finally, the item must have a clear objective.
Good news items evoke some kind of reaction, and inspire thought or action. Therefore, a fitting definition of news is an item of communication through mainstream, official and personal means of communication that passes on new information to the recipient to achieve a clear objective.
Integrated Marketing Communication (IMC) and Customer Satisfaction Strategy Report essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Measuring customer satisfaction
Gaps in consumer experiences and expectations
Introduction A unique thinking Cap is a company that deals in different kinds of head covers and wigs. As a mater of fact, it specializes in hats, turbans, and other types of head ware.
This head wares can be used by people who are suffering from hair loss as well as cancer patients. The market for head wares and wigs has been experiencing a lot of competition in recent years. This competition has been brought about by changing market trends in fashion. To respond to such market changes, the company has continually come up with good hat designs.
Advertising strategy To enhance its operations, the company has been forced to come up with good advertising strategies for sustainability. A unique thinking Cap’s marketing goal is to increase sales and awareness about the company’s products.
In addition, the company aims to increase the number of repeat clients and enhance its presence in the market through marketing. Therefore, the company will employ a good advertising strategy to reach a wide market base (Joshi, 2005, p. 11). As much as its products have a broad market appeal, more attention will be focused on women.
In addition, it will also focus on cancer patients and holiday goers. This approach will see the company increase sales in these market segments. Because there is a lot of competition, the company will use its unique designs to suit different market tastes and preferences (Petley, 2002, p. 9).
Through this, the company will be in a better position to increase the number of repeat clients. More attention will focused on city and urban dwellers within the age bracket of 20-40 years. Because this target market has more access to the internet, the company will rely on online advertising to reach a wide base.
Measuring advertising The main aim of advertising will be to increase sales and build the company’s brand. Because the company will spend money on advertising, it is important to measure its effectiveness (Petley, 2002, p. 12). In this case, the company will carry out an audit and analysis to see if there is any increase in sales (of products that are promoted like hats). A unique thinking Cap will also come up with a good customer feedback program for consumers to tell the company how they learnt about its products.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Since the company will also use its website for advertising, the number of visitors will be critically analyzed to see their movements. Any increase in the number of visitors will imply that the company’s advertising strategies are effective (Petley, 2002, p. 23). The company will come up with a toll free line for orders from customers.
The number of calls will be monitored to see if there is any increase in orders. In this case, the company will be able to tell if its advertising approach has reached the right market. Consumer surveys will also be used to evaluate the effect of the company’s advertising activities in the market.
Promotional strategies It should be known that the company will use various approaches to advertising. In this case, advertising will take various forms like TV commercials, Print advertising, direct mail, yellow pages and Web Ads (Petley, 2002, p. 8). As much as the company will use various forms of advertising, it will also use different promotion strategies for success and sustainability. Most of these promotional strategies will be aimed at different market segments to give them a personal touch and attention.
The company will use media releases to give out more information about its products. This will enable it to reach a large number of potential customers. Since the products will target a broad market base, the company will also use events. These events will be made memorable to leave a lasting impression to different customers like the youthful group (Joshi, 2005, p. 23). Since our product line includes different hats, networking will be used to reach new customers.
This will be done within the industry and clients. Promotional products will be used to target specific segments like cancer patients and people who are suffering from hair loss. In this case, the company will be able to thank its other loyal customer’s apart from this segment. To enforce this, the company will be periodically coming up with promotional hats to entice the market.
Measuring customer satisfaction The company’s prime goal is to ensure that customers are satisfied through its broad range of products. This will guarantee it a large customer base and market position (Petley, 2002, p. 43). As long as customers are satisfied, the company will continue registering an increase in sales and profitability. In this case, there will be a good approach of measuring customer satisfaction in relation to its products.
A unique thinking Cap will come up with different consumer surveys to determine customer satisfaction in relation to its products. This will give the true picture of the company’s products in the market place. Through direct communication, the company will personally get information from consumers. This will be done through toll free calls. Feedback from customers will give the true market position of the company’s products and tell if different customers are satisfied (Petley, 2002, p. 16).
We will write a custom Report on Integrated Marketing Communication (IMC) and Customer Satisfaction Strategy specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Sales will also be evaluated to see if there is an increase or decrease from previous figures. An increase or decrease in sales speaks volumes on consumer perceptions about the product. If customers are satisfied they will continually buy the product hence an increase in sales. The company’s market position in relation to other competitors will also be evaluated. This will explain its performance as far as customer satisfaction is concerned.
Gaps in consumer experiences and expectations Consumers always have their own expectations in relation to a company’s products and services (Joshi, 2005, p. 31). After evaluating customer satisfaction, the company will come up with various mechanisms to address gaps in their experiences and expectations. For instance, it will continually come up with new designs to keep up with current trends in the market.
This will be done after an extensive marketing research has been done to know their tastes and preferences. In the long run, the company will satisfy different market needs.
Gaps can be brought about by misinformation in relation to the company’s products (Joshi, 2005, p. 17). In this case, the company will continually advertise its products to create more awareness. Through feedback, the company will be able to tell what customers want as far as its products are concerned.
This means that their input and concerns will be put into consideration in the production of goods. In addition, consumers can be welcomed to give their suggestions in relation to their individual experiences. This suggestions will be highly considered in redesigning products to give them a new look and lease of life in the market.
Conclusion Although there is high competition in the market place, the company will continually review its marketing strategies to increase profitability. This will enable it to build a good brand position and image in the market. Because of changing market trends in relation to fashion, the company will redesign its products to suit different market tastes and preferences.
Reference List Joshi, R, M. (2005). International Marketing. New York: Oxford University Press.
Petley, J. (2002). Advertising. North Mankato, Minnesota: Smart Apple Media.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Integrated Marketing Communication (IMC) and Customer Satisfaction Strategy by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
Alexander the Great Research Paper essay help online
Introduction Alexander III of Macedonian (356-323 BC) was a famous king in the ancient Greece, who reigned between 336-323 B.C. He was born in Pella in Macedonia to Philip II, king of Macedonia, and his fourth wife Oympias of Epirus.
King Philip conquered the Greece and was set out to expand his territories. Unfortunately, he was assassinated and his young son, Alexander, took over the empire. Alexander was a great military leader, led his empire to many conquests, and was determined to accomplish his father’s vision despite the challenges that were ahead.
One of his achievements was the conquest of the civilized empires and expanding his kingdom. Alexander died young, but his contribution makes his legacy immortal (Rosellini and Serino 2003). Alexander conquered many of his neighbors like the Persian and also India. His accomplishments appear like a myth considering the difficulty of building such a strong empire.
Alexander was a great leader; this is demonstrated by the way he encouraged his soldiers to continue moving forward. He employed good strategies and logistics in commanding the army and ruling his empire. Whenever he conquered a city, he took the surviving army and added them to his troop, creating a mighty army. This can be illustrated by works of one of the eminent philosophers of the ancient era, Aristotle.
Family Alexander’s father was a brilliant king who ruled Macedonia from 359- 336 BC. He took up the kingdom at a time they had just suffered a defeat to Illyrians. Philip led his forces into battle against the Athenian and Theban armies and gained victory, as well as attained Greek State.
His objective was to unify the Macedonians and expand the kingdom. Alexander was educated by Aristotle of Stagira, who was one of the earliest philosophers. He received variety of teaching like doctrines of politics, literature, and learnt to play the lyre. In addition, Alexander was a fearless young man. At the age of twelve, he was able to ride one of the untamed horses named ‘Bucephala’.
At the age of about eighteen Alexander went to the south where his father had a campaign. There Philip fought one of the fiercest battles and gave his son one of the wings of the army (Abbott 2004, 162). The character of Alexander in his early life was, however, that of a naughty, proud, and uncontrollable child. Nevertheless he enjoyed complete parental love, this changed as King Philip later divorced Alexander’s mother (Abbott 2004, 162).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Career Alexander’s career began at twenty, following King Philip assassination, whereby the young Alexander had to assume his father’s position immediately (Briant and Kuhrt 2010). Alexander reigned for a period of twelve years, and died under mysterious circumstances at the age of thirty-two years.
Despite the length of his reign as a king, Alexander accomplished “very brilliant series of exploits, which were so bold and so romantic” (Abbott 2004, 153).
His career began with an enormous task of facing his enemies who had assassinated his father and other challenges since he was quite inexperienced and young. The first responsibility Alexander had was to stabilize his empire. Thus, he attached and killed some of his father’s assassins, causing the collaborators to flee while others chose to stay back and serve the king.
Persian war Alexander invaded the Persian in 334 BC, and with his army of approximate 42,000 soldiers formed mainly by Macedonian mercenaries, crossed the Hellespont. After his victory at the Battle of the Granicus, Alexander overthrew Darius Codomamnnus and accepted the Persian capital and its treasury of Sardia. He further went to the Ionian coast.
In the second reign, he made Babylon his capital and began oriental court. This decision caused tension among the governors of Macedonia and the Greek. They did not approve such choice. Alexander, however, did not change his capital. In the background of this pressure Alexander took up his campaign to Persia, conquering the people of the country and then taking their wealth and the surviving soldiers to his empire.
The wealth he captured from the Persians was very significant and was used to sustain the army that had been formed by Phillip. It goes without saying that Alexander understood the outstanding financial obligations to the Greek soldiers as well (Worthington 2003, 77). The success of Alexander’s army in Persian territory had motivated him to explore other places. He had learnt the weakness of his enemies and was set to exploit this useful knowledge.
The Greek cities had been taken captive by the Persians and first Alexander was determined to liberate them. This success was facilitated by the fact that his army had superior weapons like armed Cretan and Macedonian archer, shields, long spears and chariots. Alexander also took many other people with him. These people’s professions included scientists, architects, explorers, engineers and court officials. They worked with the army, for instance, they were building bridges.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Alexander the Great specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Battle of Granicus To tackle the invader, the Persians had an army in Asia Minor, which was larger than Alexander’s. Besides this, the only line of communication was a narrow line in Hellespont where he had conquered earlier, making this as a sound strategy of the Persian generals. When the two parties met at the banks of river Granicus, the generals of the Persian were convinced that their forces were superior to Alexander’s; however, in the turn of events, the Macedonians had won (Briant and Kuhrt 2010, 8).
Asia Minor During the winter of 334-333 BC, Alexander invaded the Asia Minor. He succeeded to conquer the western region and made the tribes of Lycia and Pisidia his subjects. Later, he advanced along the coastal region of Perga. One of experienced Greek commanders of Persian team died unexpectedly. This news spread and Alexander took advantage attacking the rest of the region (Briant and Kuhrt 2010, 9).
Invasion to India Prior to his invasion to India, Alexander made radical changes in the army that had conquered Persia. Some of the strategies he used were as follows: release of some soldiers, admitting new ones, and grouping solders into several troops. He led the strongest troop while his commanders took charge of the rest (Briant and Kuhrt 2010, 60). These were to help him acclimate to the different climate and topology. This time round, Alexander was able to defeat the rulers and capture their empires.
Alexander death Ever since his death, there are still unresolved issues surrounding his demise. Indeed, it seems hard to accept that a young man could die of natural causes that sprung up out of nowhere. Alexander died in Babylon in 323 BC, at the age of thirty two after twelve years of rule in his vast Empire.
There have been many theories to account for his death but none has proven to be true, with some histories speculating that he was poisoned while others reckoning that he succumbed to malaria (Bosworth and Baynham 2002, 247). At the time of his death, his kingdom stretched from Macedonia through Greece and the Persian Empire to the fringes of India.
In addition, he had plans to expand his holdings. A year after his death, series of civil wars headed by his former generals led to the split in his empire into three kingdoms; Macedonia, Syria and Egypt. These kingdoms became great rivals and went into wars in spite of their common heritage, culture, and background (Abbott 2004, 189). Therefore, the vision of Alexander of establishing a strong Empire with one government was never achieved.
Alexander’s Contribution One of the largest contributions of Alexander is development of the Hellenist civilization, a blend of the eastern and the western cultures. Many cultures captured mingled and developed a new idea of psychology; the Hellenist and roman civilization eventually formed the bases of the current western civilization (Bosworth and Baynham 2002, 124). The Greek language was learnt in the kingdom and various Greek profound works were written at that period.
The King also built Alexandria and Pegamum Libraries, which were centre for literature criticism and compilation of anthologies and catalogues (Rosellini and Serino 2003). Alexander also contributed much in the building and control of Empires. Primarily, he used law courts, assemblies, and governors to establish his reign, a practice that has later been used in the governance in other states.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Alexander the Great by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In addition, the present Greeks benefit from the work of this great king due to tourism, making it one of the biggest sectors, where visitors tour numerous places to see the monuments and other artifacts related to the events. Alexander also influenced science and agriculture.
In the field of war, they developed advanced weapons, which contributed to their military prowess. They also drew charts of the territories; these latter developed map making. Moreover, there were new discoveries. New breeds of animals and plants were introduced, while in agriculture new methods were employed, for example, irrigation channels were introduced (Abbott 2004, 243).
Alexander also created a uniform economic world, trading among the people starting world’s economy. He opened trade areas for the merchants in various regions, thus, this trade areas formed a trade route, which is known as “Silk Routes.” The trade also benefited from the release of the Persian bullion. Some of the commodities trades were silk, spices gold, foodstuff and others.
Monuments One of the monuments of Alexander the Great is located in the city founded by Alexander in 331 BC (Rosellini and Serino 2003). This was located in Egypt where visitors went to learn the culture and tradition of the Egyptians. The most famous is ‘cleopatra’s Needles,’ and a column called ‘Pompey’s Pillar’.
Moreover, Pompey was erected in memory of Pompey who was killed in the Egyptian coast after being defeated by Ceaser. One of them had fallen; they had been transported during the Augustan age from Heliopolis. These artifacts were donated to Great Britain in1878, with one located along the Thames and the other to Unites States which was set up in Central Park (New York) in 1881 (Rosellini and Serino 2003).
The shield from the battle of Granicus, it had these inscription in bronze “Alexander, son of Philip and the Greeks, from the barbarians of Asia” (Kastrom 2008, 17). Alexander had a golden sarcophagus but was melted down to make coinage by the Ptolonius XI and was replaced with another one made of alabaster. The tomb of Alexander is situated in Alexandria where many visitors, mainly the Roman rulers and other tourists flocked regularly to witness the legacy of one of the most successful leaders in history.
However, after some time, the tomb, which is located at the cemetery near Latin Quarter of Alexandria, was later closed to the public because of safety precautions. Another monument was on Mount Athons, which is a statue of a giant man with one hand holding a city and the other a bowl of waters from all the rivers in the mountain (Rosellini and Serino 2003). Primarily, Alexander had this monument placed in Alexandria city instead of Athons.
Conclusion Alexander the great may have had a humble beginning in life, but his work and leadership left a legacy that will live for a long time to come. Although he died at relatively young age, he unconditionally contributed immensely to the transformation of the society by utilizing his brilliance and brevity to fight the enemies, following the assassination of his father. Indeed, his contribution spanned across, social, economic, and political spheres, not forgetting his impact in the emergence of western civilization.
Bibliography Abbott, Jacob. Histories of Cyrus the Great and Alexander the Great. Whitefish, MT: Kessinger Publishing, 2004.
Bosworth, A. B. and Baynham, E. J. Alexander the Great in Fact and Fiction. New York: Oxford University Press, 2002.
Briant, P. and Kuhrt, A. Alexander the Great and His Empire. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 2010.
Kastrom, Panagiotes. The Monuments of Athen –A Historical and Archaeological Description. Whitefish, MT: Kessinger Publishing, 2008.
Worthington, I. Alexander the Great: a Reader. New York, NY: Routledge, 2003.
Rosellini, I. and Serino, F. Monuments of Egyptians and Nubians. New York, NY: American University in Cairo Press, 2003.
Parapsychology – Science or Pseudo Science? Argumentative Essay essay help online: essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
Parapsychology: Paranormal Behavior may be Useful for Science
Parapsychology: Paranormal Behavior and Schizotypy
Introduction According to Radford, there are numerous therapies that have been reported to be beneficial despite failing to satisfy scientific evaluation criteria. In these reports some of the therapies require dilution of herbs to a degree that leads to the question, how potent are these herbs? Such questions arise owing from the fact that some of these herbs are diluted to an extent that would require the patient to consume huge amounts to generate the effects of any medicinal properties the herb may possess (2203).
Such a position suggests the pseudo science as opposed to science. Science would justify the use of a drug through measurements and the measured effect of varied doses whereas in this case the doses are so weak it is unlikely that they provide any tangible benefits to the user. It is notions such as this that this paper seeks to identify within the context of parapsychology.
Parapsychology: Paranormal Behavior may be Useful for Science Many researchers have over time argued that paranormal beliefs are not related to neuroscience. The position held by neuroscience with regards to paranormal beliefs is that these experiences are based on a sub set of delusional beliefs that bear no correspondence in the healthy mind (Brugger and Mohr 1291).
However it has been argued that study of paranormal beliefs may provide the much needed link between abnormal and normal behavior. This study can be useful in providing a bridge between major gaps that exist between neuropsychology and cognitive psychiatry.
Proponents of the study of paranormal beliefs suggest a janusian peculiarities associated with specific beliefs that are useful in understanding the pathology of belief and their clarification of some of the cognitive bases of human behavior. Based on this it is argued that investigations into the paranormal mind may provide a solution to the persistent ideas surrounding similarities between madness and genius (Brugger and Mohr 1291).
Paranormal behavior is defined as anomalies related to behavior and experience that exists outside of known explanatory mechanisms used to account for organism-environment or organism-organism information and influence flow. This would include anomalies such as Extra Sensory Perception (ESP) which includes telepathy, clairvoyance and precognition (Brugger and Mohr 1291).
It has been argued that despite the existence of varied scientific positions on the relevance on paranormal behavior, neuropsychology may gain insights into mechanisms of belief formation which can not be discovered through analysis of the normal and abnormal brain alone. The position presented in this paper suggests that parapsychology is science and investigation into this field may be useful to other areas of science.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Parapsychology: Paranormal Behavior and Schizotypy It has been reported that research in recent years has indicated that there may be a relationship between paranormal behavior and schizotypy (Hergovich, Schott and Arendasy 119). Schizotypy has been defined as the initial stages of schizophrenia and it includes cognitive, perceptive and affective symptoms.
The degree to which individuals are prone to schizophrenia can be measured by assessing various traits that characterize the schizotypal personality. Among the symptoms of schizophrenia that are evident in schizotypy include delusional thoughts and or unusual experiences.
There is plenty of anecdotal evidence of the existence of a link between schizophrenia and paranormal behavior. Evidence of this is also seen in statistics that indicate a higher degree of belief in paranormal events is often associated with higher incidence of schizophrenia. Evidence of this is seen in high schizotypy scores as witnessed in members of occult sects (Hergovich et al. 119).
The results of a recent study by Hergovich et al indicated that a link does in fact exist between schizotypy and paranormal behavior (Hergovich et al. 124). This is further supported by the presence of reputable data that points to the underlying cognitive and neurological basis of the relationship.
However, despite of this it was still not possible to confirm whether schizotypy and paranormal behavior were different concepts. It is still unclear whether paranormal behavior is one facet of schizotypy. This scenario arises due to the fact that one popular measure of schizotypy, the Magical Ideation Scale is also used to measure paranormal beliefs. An analysis of the points presented in this paper posits that paranormal behavior may indeed be a neurological disorder or a facet of the disorder.
Conclusion In this paper two positions have been presented on the issue of paranormal behavior with a view to considering parapsychology as a science or pseudo science. Based on the evidence in the reports it would appear that parapsychology is indeed a science.
The first reason behind this conclusion lies in the fact that it is still unclear whether paranormal behavior forms one of the manifestations a neurological disorder or is a concept on its own (Hergovich et al. 124). It is clear that inability to accurately measure has led researchers to this conclusion. That being the case, paranormal behavior may indeed be a rational phenomena and parapsychology a rational science.
We will write a custom Essay on Parapsychology – Science or Pseudo Science? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Further it has been indicated that the study of the healthy brain and abnormal brain alone are not adequate to provide solutions on similarities between genius and madness (Brugger and Mohr 1291). It has been suggested that paranormal behavior appears a promising solution owing to the fact that neuroscience already recognizes paranormal behavior as bearing similarities with known cognitive bases of human behavior.
Works Cited Brugger, Peter and Christine Mohr. “The Paranormal Mind: How the Study of Anomalous Experiences and Beliefs may inform Cognitive Neuroscience.” Cortex 2008:1291-1298. Print.
Hergovich, Andreas, Reinhard Schott and Martin Arendasy. “On the Relationship between Paranormal Belief and Schizotypy among Adolescents.” Personality and Individual Differences 2008: 119-125. Print.
Radford, Tim. “Fringe Science to Fraud.” The Lancet 23/30 December 2000: 2203.Print.
“Artemis Fowl” and “The princes and the goblin”. Compare and Contrast Essay scholarship essay help
The elements of comparison that immediately come into focus when there is mention of the book ‘princess and the goblin’ and ‘Artemis fowl’ range widely. The variance of themes span from the essentials that describe a society such as food, clothing, money and the fundamentals that describe a place such as its geographical landscape or terrain.
The landscape at the heart of the story in the book ‘princess and the goblin’ is a mountainous terrain that has very many subterranean hollows. Winding caves and caverns characterize the landscape in this book. Some of the caverns have water coming out of them, while some shine when light gets inside these structures.
In this book, two characters of very distinct backgrounds and with very different lifestyles get to interact, and end up being friends. The two come from the two different social groups that define the living standards of the region. Irene, the princess, born of the king and therefore enjoys every ounce of leisure life could offer. She has spent her life enjoying the comfort of the palace built by his father on one of the mountains.
The palace is beautiful and it is what the princess has grown up to believe is the whole world, until her curiosity leads her out of the palace into the outside world beneath. There are seemingly a different type people beneath the palace, strange people who it seems have different lives, and are of a different race, these are the goblins.
Legends attribute their existence to the fact that they all lived together in the same kingdom, until the king levied upon them higher taxes, tried to impose more severity, and handled them with stricter rules. As a result, these people escaped from the kingdom, but instead of going far away from the kingdom, they sought refuge in the underground caves and caverns from where they came out only at night (Macdonald, 1990).
The tale has it that these people hardly walk in groups, they come out only in the dark and never show up to large groups of people. This tale goes on to say that they operate in large groups of people in the areas of the mountain that are least visited, deeper into the mountain and that they even gathered in the open air.
As a result of them hiding away from the sun, dwelling in the cold and dark dungeon that was the mountain, their bodies had changed greatly both in form and texture through the course of time. They looked abnormally strange to the extent that no literary genius could put to pen the matching description of their appearance.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The goblins, in as much as they grew more disheveled in face and form, they grew smarter and brighter in the head. They had advanced intellectually to the point that they could do things that were unheard of in the world of mortals, yet all this creativity they dedicated to making the life of the people living on top of the mountain a living hell (Macdonald, 1990).
This community was very cruel to the people living on the mountain (suns), but they treated others of their type with affection and love. Their wits saw them establish a government run by a chief. The main business of this government besides running their own personal affairs was devising trouble for their neighbors on the mountain (Macdonald, 1990).
They held onto the grudge they bore against the suns people with a passion, they professed it with a near religious zeal; their perception of the suns was negative. They viewed them as the people who occupied their former abodes, and more so as the descendants of the king who caused their expulsion from the mountain. For this reason, the princess had never seen the sky at night the whole of her life.
Also at the heart of this kingdom is a young girl called Irene, she happens to be the king’s daughter; the princess. On one, boring, rainy day she decides to take a stroll through their old huge kingdom house. Due to the complexity of the structure of the house, she gets lost in the rooms and wanders her way into her great grandmother’s secret room.
Her grandmother been living beneath their house for ages and therefore knows a lot about the kingdom, yet the occupants of the kingdom didn’t know she was there. She is stunningly beautiful for a grandmother and Irene soon bonds with her. Upon returning to the castle, she tells her nanny Lootie about her encounter with her grandmother, an assertion to which Lootie does not believe and a quarrel ensues.
On the first sunny day, they set out for a walk and stay out late. This is their first encounter with the scary goblins, but they are saved by a young boy called Curdie, who sings’ rhythms which the Goblins find unbearable and they leave the two alone. Curdie has saved their lives and Irene promises him a kiss but Lootie interrupts.
This marks the beginning of a relationship that would go along way affecting the lives of the people around them, at one point even the fate of the kingdom. This happened when they boy eavesdropped on some goblins and heard them talking and planning an attack on the suns kingdom. He also got to know that their heads were hard but the lower parts of their bodies were weak (Macdonald, 1990).
We will write a custom Essay on “Artemis Fowl” and “The princes and the goblin”. specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Artemis Fowl is a book based on the story of a young boy living with his mother. The father, who happens to be a crime lord, has deserted the family and they are the only members. This boy, at only twelve ears was intelligent, a genius for that matter and had the determination, zeal and desire to be rich. In his quest to attain wealth, he conducts an extensive research on fairies and discovers their existence.
He hatches out a plan to kidnap a fairy, this involves trailing them and learning their ways. Artemis and his friend, Butler track down a rogue fairy pretending to be a healer in Vietnam, they intend to get from her the ‘book of the people’, a holy book for fairies that is written in gnomish. At the same time, a police captain Holly short happens to be going after another troll which has escaped from the fairy city deep underground from the earth’s surface. (Colfer, 2001)
Captain Holy is assisted by her friends and they debilitate the troll, this exercise consumes all of her magical ability, forcing her to carry out a sacrament that would help bring back her magic. Using his wits, Artemis translates the book using a computer, and while at it he learns the essentials of the ritual. From the details in the book, they locate over 100 places where the ritual could be conducted.
Four months later they find Holly on the spot conducting the ritual, they tranquilize him with a hypodermic syringe. The Fairy council sends a group of fairies to examine Fowl Manor. The members are equipped with a special ability that allows them to travel faster than the human eye can follow, this was called shielding ability, but Artemis expects this and installs a camera that could resonate with their speed by freezing the image.
Butler debilitated the threat while Root cordoned Fowl Manor by initiating a time stop and entered discussions (Colfer, 2001). The amount demanded to release Fowl manor was 24 carats of gold. Artemis, armed with the knowledge he gained from decoding the book, took the chance to disclose his ability to undo the time stop.
Following Artemis guidance, they break into the Manor. He digs underground to get to the house and finds a safe where a copy of the book was stored. This gives a hint to where Artemis got his knowledge about fairies. In the meantime, Holly digs a space through the concrete wall of her cell, gets an acorn that had been smuggled inside. She takes it and completes the ritual, this enables him to regain his magic and he sets off to the main house.
The fairies honor their end of the bargain and give Artemis the ransom they had initially agreed upon. They give him the gold, but in the face of all that and coupled with all the riches bestowed upon him, he cannot cure his mother’s condition. He requests holly to grant him a wish; he wants her to cure his mother’s insanity, which had been caused by the loss her husband’s disappearance (Colfer, 2001). As result she is bed ridden.
In return Holly offers to grant the wish and cure her mother’s insanity but at a price, he demands to be given half the gold Artemis had. The fairies had other intentions, they intended to kill Artemis by infecting him with a biological bomb and get the gold, but this flops when Artemis drugs himself and his comrades with sleeping pills. The sleeping pills enable him to escape the time-stop, when he wakes up he finds his mother’s health in top condition, having recovered from her insanity.
Not sure if you can write a paper on “Artemis Fowl” and “The princes and the goblin”. by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In both stories, there is a common theme that comes to light. A theme that has been a factor in both instances, it has also been the driving force behind most of the events in these books. This is money. Because of money the goblins were expelled from the kingdom that they rightfully belonged, one that was rightfully there’s.
The king used it to expel them from the kingdom by raising the tax rates imposed on them, purposefully in order to get rid of them. Money has caused there to be division and classification according to how much one had, them that lacked had to escape the kingdom, and moved to inhabit the subterranean dungeons. As a result of the limited exposure to the sun and other environmental factors, they had grown scarily grotesque.
This had caused all the difference in the lives of these people, hence the contrasting lifestyles. The people who had money lived and enjoyed their lives, though they were not at peace wherever they were, its like they lived in total seclusion, in that some of them had never seen the sky, let alone know. They were confined in their freedom, and did not even know the beauty and glory that lay beyond the confines of their kingdom.
In Artemis’s case, the quest for money and wealth almost caused him his life were it not for his intelligence and ability to see ahead and think faster than his adversaries. The biological bomb they had sent him kills all forms of organic life, and his life, however bright was no exemption. After outwitting them all and having amassed all that wealth that was to the tune of twenty four gold carats, he discovers he still has needs that the money can not buy.
The money cannot buy him happiness; it cannot repair the broken relationships, it can neither heal illnesses nor better them, and certainly too much of it does feel uncomfortable.
It surprises us at the end when he gives out half the amount of gold he had worked so hard to attain, but what is all that when the person who is closest to you, your mother, is still sick? It surpasses logic. He did it out of the love, it is what matters most and that is what counts. He was happy eventually when the mother recovered, and he still had half the gold.
In the case of the kingdom, this people harbored anger and scorn towards each other. The goblins were so cruel to the suns to the point the established an own government whose sole purpose was to create disturbance and mayhem to the suns people. Money had caused this problem, the goblins wanted to attack the sun people, and submerge their kingdom as a result of the hate they had for the suns (MacDonald.1992).
This is salvaged after a boy overhears their conversations and alerts the suns . The get ready to protect the kingdom so by the time the goblins attack, they defend. These two, Irene and Curdie, save the kingdom not for the money but because of the love and the indifference of heart they saw among the people of the two communities.
In both cases, money has been of utmost disservice to the peace that has existed. Whenever the characters considered money as a factor, there was division and war. Money has proved its ability to buy almost anything that has economic value, but it has failed to buy virtues upon which good life is based upon, such as love, peace and harmony.
It happens that people who have all the money don’t have it all when it comes to these virtues; instead money cultivates greed, envy, war and instability in the case of kingdoms and power centers. Money could not buy the suns people the peace they so yearned for, neither could it heal Artemis mother of her condition.
He had to make a wish to the Fairy, it is only because the fairy had been frustrated by Artemis that he decided to punish him by charging him half the gold he had. Artemis needed joy and happiness, and he could stop at nothing to get it, his only joy was his mother’s well-being, and he reaped the fruits when he sacrificed half his wealth. His mother was well, the other kingdom was rescued after the money factor was put aside and they all lived happily ever after.
Works Cited Colfer, Eion. (2001). Artemis Fowl: Artemis Fowl series. NY. New York. Vicking press.
MacDonald, George (1990). The princess and the goblin. Paperback. Trafalgar Square Publishing.
The LinkedIn Network and the Problem of Employment Report (Assessment) writing essay help: writing essay help
Table of Contents A Brief Overview of Technical Communication
A Practical Approach to Technical Communication
Completing the Profile
A Brief Overview of Technical Communication The contemporary economy provides the population of the globe with new quests every day. Challenges that should be achieved are encountered every moment; these tasks require creativity and an idea of what to do. The problem of employment can be considered one of the burning issues of the contemporary world community.
So, every person that seeks for a job opportunity should apply the most appropriate methods to place an application, establish useful contacts, and find a good job. In this respect, it is necessary to mention about the technological progress and helpful innovations that are aimed at facilitating the process of searching for necessary information, its synthesis, and assessment.
Some programs are created for professional use only whereas others can be implemented in fields that do not require in-depth knowledge of computers, software, and technology. One of these programs is the LinkedIn that is used by ordinary users to facilitate the access to their personal information, establish contacts to use those in future, and help employers hire them to the most appropriate positions.
Though there are many social networks aimed at helping users from all over the web to search and share information, it is clear that all these applications have some features in common and certain differences as well.
So, the main features that help to differentiate between the LinkedIn and other social networks include the opportunity to share information about job objectives, establish connections of different degrees, and present one’s profile in a professional manner.
All users should find it useful and easily applicable to their resumes because a user can use the existing profile with a resume or create a new file that can be used to fill in the boxes required to complete the profile.
A Practical Approach to Technical Communication One of the greatest benefits of the Internet is that people from different parts of the world can share information, search for information, and store different facts, files, and sources in the Internet databases.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this respect, the LinkedIn network facilitates the process of searching for definite people in terms of their education, career, objectives, and other parameters. So, if you have graduated from a university, you are sure to find your peers by means of searching for them by name through a specific search box tool. The same operation can be performed by employers who want to find an applicant for a certain position.
The benefits of this network are obvious, especially for those who spend a lot of time searching for specific information through the Internet. Moreover, recruitment can be accelerated by means of using the LinkedIn network because recruiters do not have to scan databases while searching for applicants hence being able to view more applications at once and choose the most appropriate.
The more people talk about the usefulness of the internet and technological innovations that can be applied to almost all fields of science and technology, the more relevant these innovations seem to be in terms of their application to management and career planning.
Though some people find it daunting to learn simple rules and implement those in practice via completion of a LinkedIn profile, it is really simple in application and useful in terms of results. Thus, every user can increase his/her chances to find a relevant job by means of using the LinkedIn. As every step requires good grammar, you can complete the profile with the help of a Word processor and then transfer the data to the profile.
Completing the Profile One can find clear instructions on the steps to be taken while completing the profile with the help of the LinkedIn network on the Internet. There are instructions and comments concerning every step and every aspect to bear in mind while filling in the boxes.
One of the most important aspects that you should take into account while completing your profile is that you should not talk about your preferences or hobbies because this network is used for employment: some people search for a job and find good positions while others are looking for appropriate applicants for certain positions. So, your resume information is the basic data to include into your professional networking profile.
The next step concerns the connections to establish and expand. If you are a student or/and are looking for work, you can use a special box to mark the field that interests you most in terms of professional activity to be engaged in. If you already have a job but want to keep in contact with your colleagues, peers from the university, and other people who have a profile on the LinkedIn, you can find those people via a special search engine and expand your connections adding friends of your friends to your network.
We will write a custom Assessment on The LinkedIn Network and the Problem of Employment specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Though the information from the profile is used basically for professional networking, it contains a specific section that contains some data about your preferences, hobby, and other things that can be related to your professional activity or be simply useful for an employer to know about.
In this respect, you have to be creative to produce the most positive impression. Note that spelling and grammar errors should be eliminated from the profile; every fact should be checked before saving the information. Moreover, you can add more information by means of asking your instructors (if you are a student and searching for a job) or colleagues/employers (if you already have a job) to provide some references and recommendations.
A picture is an integral part of the portfolio because people should know how you look; the more professional you look in the picture, the more seriously your portfolio will be treated by employers and colleagues. If some websites contain links to your page or provide additional information that can be useful for people interested in your application, you should include links to those websites. Help other Internet search engines identify your profile and link to it.
Conclusion Every word written about you on the Internet can be helpful in terms of searching for your profile and offering you a certain position. The LinkedIn network is a social network used for professional connections, sharing information on the job opportunities, and finding people that can help you in building other connections.
The more detailed and valid information is included into your profile, the easier can be access to it. Besides, the way of presentation used in the LinkedIn profile enables applicants and employers to find the most appropriate opportunities and options. Every box of the profile increases your chances to succeed while searching for a job.
The Cultural Patterns of the Mexican Americans Term Paper college essay help: college essay help
Summary The article depicts how Mexican Americans are the most dominant in terms of percentage total population of the various Hispanic American groups. Their rapid rate of growth is mainly as a result of high migration rates and partly due to high rates of birth. The rates of growth of all Hispanics groups exceed the national average, a trend that is anticipated to spill over into the current century.
An assessment of the cultural patterns of the Mexican Americans relative to that of the Anglo Americans has also been examined in this article. Further, the article reveals how fluctuation in immigrations rates of the Mexican Americans relies on labor demand, the prevailing conditions in Mexico and a variation in the Federal Immigration policy. The issue of immigration of the Mexican Americans, their subsequent colonization and the eventual emergence of intergroup competition has also been explored.
The continued colonization of the Mexican Americans in the form of low-wage jobs for the better part of the 20th century was met with resistance and protest by the Mexican Americans as they endeavored to enhance their collective position.
This culminated in the formation of such ideological movements as Chicanismo that sought to fight for fairness, justice, and equal rights of the Mexican Americans. New leaders and groups emerged thanks to the Chicano movements (for example, Reis Lopez Tijerion and Cesar Chavez, among others). However, external and internal forces limited the desire by Chicanos to achieve their objectives.
The article has also address the immigrations of the Puerto Ricans and the eventual change in language and culture of the group through transitions. The push and pull factors of immigration that affected the Cuban Americans, the ethnic enclaves that the group was faced with, and how they managed to adapt to the American culture is also addressed. Discrimination and prejudice of the Americans against the Latinos, and the pluralism and assimilation of the group into the American culture, has also been addressed.
What it means to be a Latino in America The prejudice held by the Americans against the Latinos dates as far back as the 19th century. During this period, there were conflicts that helped to shape up the ascribed status of the Latinos as a minority group.
During the conquering and the subsequent subordination of the Latinos, they were often characterized as lazy, inferior, low in intelligence, irresponsible, and dangerously criminal. The racism and prejudice, augmented by echoes of racist beliefs and ideas carried by the Anglos as they migrates Southwards, aided in the validation and justification of the exploited and colonized status of Latinos.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To be a Latino American means having to endure illegal deportations. It means being ready to have ones legal and civil rights abused. Latino Americans also have little choice but to accept low-paid jobs as laborers in the unskilled sector.
It means having to contend with temporary or seasonal work and no job guarantee and once work ends, chances are very high that one could be forced to return back home. The Latinos Americans are periodically the victims of powerful economic and political interests and this normally dictates the flow of the Latino population into the United States.
Being a Latino in the United States therefore implies having to contend with pre-defined social systems of the group with an already established colonized status. Accordingly the minority group is often forced to endure the kind of treatment that is only subjected to colonized groups, even as new immigrants continue to arrive into the United States.
As an American of Hispanic origin, one has to learn how to endure increased levels of racism, prejudice, and discrimination. In addition, the minority group is often faced with bitter resentment from other groups within the Anglo population who harbor the feeling that the Latino laborers who are otherwise regarded as an attractive source of cheap labor, are a threat to their financial and job security.
As victims of an economic and political machination, and the ensuing resentment from the Anglo population, the Latinos have often lacked in the necessary resources that WOYDL otherwise enable them to overcome exploitation that they have had to face at the hands of their employers, or the discrimination and the rejection that the group has to endure, by others.
Being a Hispanic American implies having to contend with differences in power, competition and prejudice. It means having to struggle every day in an effort to enhance one’s economic, social and cultural status. It implies having to endure control and repression by way of being accorded little political power and fewer rights in comparison with the Anglo Americans.
The plight of the Latinos in America may best be described as continued colonization in that they have been faced with split labor markets (as exemplified by the low pay that they often get for the same, if not more, work accomplished in comparison with say, the Anglo Americans, end up getting paid more), low wage, and less desirable jobs.
We will write a custom Term Paper on The Cultural Patterns of the Mexican Americans specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It means having to resign to the fact that one cannot do away with a workforce that has been split along the gender divide, in which the Latino women are often assigned the most deplorable, of jobs, in effect meaning that they are the lowest paid workforce in the market, both in the rural as well as the urban settings.
As a Latino woman living in the United States, one is often forced to join the labor market, albeit the unskilled sector, in an effort to supplement the little income that the husband brings home. It means having to juggle between work and their role as mothers and wives. On the other hand, their male counterparts are often relegated to the back-breaking and nearly suicidal jobs of working in the fields and mines, often having to sacrifice the joy of seeing their families for days on ends.
Being a Latino in the United States means having to settle for the lowest ranks on the organizational ladder, with only a handful of Latinos ascending to the highest levels of the corporate ladder. This is often the case, even as an increasingly larger number of the Anglo Americans with similar academic qualifications and work experiences are in a position to climb up the career ladder with little or no resistance, and within a short duration of time.
For much of the 20th century, the Latinos, just like their African American counterparts, were often denied access to the larger society and public institutions, thanks to customs and laws that were discriminatory to them. This was especially the case in the segregated South. For example, unequal and separate systems of schools were established to accommodate the Latino children.
In a majority of the communities, the Latinos were often faced with disenfranchisement, not to mention being accorded few civil and legal rights. In line with the Jim Crow Model, primary elections were labeled ‘whites only’, meaning that the Latinos did not have the right to vote.
Furthermore, the Latinos were also subjected to the widely practiced residential segregation. Although there was evidence of rampant discrimination against the Latinos, sadly, the criminal justice system (in this case, the court system and the police), ignored or abetted this rampant discrimination.
Even when the Latinos formed resistance and protest groups with the aim of enhancing their collective position say, at the workplace, this in effect turned the workplace into an arena of conflict. Thanks to split labor market issues, the prejudice against the Latinos increased with a number of labor unions attempting to exclude the Latinos.
While the Latinos have been faced with various forms of discrimination (both at an individual and institutional level) nonetheless, it is important to note that it has not been so rigid as to rival those systems that had been instituted to control African American labor under the umbrella of slavery and segregation.
Not sure if you can write a paper on The Cultural Patterns of the Mexican Americans by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Nevertheless, the extent to which the Latinos in the United States have been subjected to one form of discrimination or another is yet to dissipate to a similar level as that meted out to immigrants groups of European dissent. Since they have been in the United States fro a relatively longer period of time, more than any other Latino group, the Mexican Americans could have probably also been affected the most by the various types of institutionalized discrimination
Will The Da Vinci Code be still relevant in 2070? Essay essay help online
The cause of novel’s popularity Before we get to address the question of whether Dan Brown’s novel The Da Vinci Code would still be relevant by the year 2070, we will need to discuss what caused this novel to win instant favor with readers today. Even though some critics suggest that it was due to novel’s particularly high literary quality, we cannot subscribe to such a point of view.
After all, novel’s plot appears unnecessarily overcomplicated, the situations that characters find themselves dealing with – unrealistic, and the characters – utterly predictable. For example, the character of Leigh Teabing does not only appear but also talks as if he was the incarnation of ‘Englishness’. Nevertheless, as we are all aware of – after having been published, The Da Vinci Code became a bestseller within the matter of few days. How can it be explained?
The reason why Brown’s novel was able to attain such popularity is that the motifs, contained in it, correspond to the unconscious anxieties, on the part of those for whom it was written – the dwellers of Western post-industrial megalopolises. In its turn, these anxieties derive out of the process of urbanites growing increasingly non-religious.
Nowadays, the process of Western countries’ secularization became unstoppable. Even today, the number of native-born Westerners who consider themselves truly religious is best defined as utterly neglectable. The validity of this statement appears self-evident, once we assess the strength of people’s religiosity in countries that feature world’s highest standards of living – Denmark, Sweden and Norway.
According to most recent sociological surveys, only 1% of these countries’ native-born citizens affiliate themselves with any religion, whatsoever. The reason for this is simple – people who enjoy a nice life, do not need some tribal God, with a lot of rules and little mercy, representing an integral part of their worldviews.
One of the most important aspects of post-industrial living is the fact that such living becomes increasingly rationalistic. Nowadays, we are fully aware of the fact that, in order for an individual to attain prosperity, he or she would simply have to obtain good education and start working hard, as opposed to praying to Saint Mary, so that material riches would fall out of the sky, as many people in such ‘culturally rich’ but intellectually backward Catholic countries, as Mexico, Peru and Philippines do.
It is namely Westerners’ tendency to rationalize life’s challenges, which explains why The Da Vinci Code connects with these people’s mode of existence – even before having been exposed to Brown’s novel, they felt that the story of Holy Ghost impregnating Saint Mary was nothing but the fairy tale of the worst kind.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More People simply became tired of self-proclaimed ‘servants of God’ popularizing two thousand years old nonsense about talking donkeys, sun standing still in the sky and universe’s creation in six days, as the ‘word of God’. This was the reason why reading of The Da Vinci Code came to them like the breath of a fresh air.
The significance of the novel and its future In his novel, Brown was able to confirm something that rationalistically minded citizens have been suspecting since long time ago – Jesus was just as sexual and mortal as we all are.
As one of novel’s most prominent characters, Sir Teabing had put it: “A child of Jesus would undermine the critical notion of Christ’s divinity and therefore the Christian Church, which declared itself the sole vessel through which humanity could access the divine and gain entrance to the kingdom of heaven” (216). Today’s Christianity is best described as ‘dying’ religion, as opposed to the ‘alive’ religion of Islam, for example.
What Brown achieved by publishing his novel, is depriving Christianity of the remains of its theological validity – hence, driving one of the last intellectual nails into this religion’s coffin. Therefore, we cannot agree with Catholic critics of The Da Vinci Code, who often refer to the plot of Brown’s novel as being based upon pseudo-historical speculations, and therefore – not worthy of readers’ attention.
Apparently, it never occurred to Christian critics that, while referring to novel’s affiliation with the literary genre of fiction as the foremost proof to the sheer fallaciousness of the claims, contained in it, they actually contribute to promoting Brown’s cause even further – whatever the improbable it might sound. The reason for this is simple – while being encouraged to analyze what accounts for fictious motifs in The Da Vinci Code, readers are being simultaneously provoked to analyze what represents fictious motifs in the Bible.
In his book, Dawkings (2006) had made a perfectly good point, while stating: “The only difference between The Da Vinci Code and the gospels is that the gospels are ancient fiction while The Da Vinci Code is modern fiction” (97). Despite the format of Brown’s novel, it does operate with a variety of historically proven facts, which Christians do not like discussing, simply because these facts leave very little doubt as to the Bible being anything but the actual ‘word of God’.
For example, in his dialogue with the characters of Langdon and Sophie, Sir Teabing provides readers with the insight onto the fact that, before being incorporated into Christianity’s dogma, the divinity of Jesus was actually voted upon by attendees of Council of Nicaea (325 A.D.): “At this gathering (Council of Nicaea)… many aspects of Christianity were debated and voted upon – the date of Easter, the role of the bishops, the administration of sacraments, and, of course, the divinity of Jesus” (199). In other words, Brown’s novel is in fact utterly effective, for as long as dismantling Christian myth is being concerned.
We will write a custom Essay on Will The Da Vinci Code be still relevant in 2070? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Thus, the significance of The Da Vinci Code should be discussed within the context of an overall process of Christianity’s desacralization. And, there are good reasons to believe that by the year 2070, this process will result in the status of Christianity being reduced from that of one of world’s most influential religions, to two thousand years old folklore of Jewish sheep herders. In very near future, science will become people’s ‘religion’, at least in Western countries.
When this happens, Brown’s novel will be deprived of its actuality. After all, if someone today wrote a novel, aimed to expose ancient Greek god Zeus as such that never existed, it would be very unlikely for this novel to become a bestseller – people already know that. In a similar manner, since by the year 2070 just about everybody is going to be fully aware of the imaginary essence of Christian fables, this will result in Brown’s novel being deprived of its controversial appeal.
Therefore, it would only be logical to hypothesize that by the year 2070, The Da Vinci Code will no longer be considered relevant, simply because by that time, the foremost idea contained in it (namely, Jesus being mortal and sexual man), would be recognized as self-evident.
References Brown, Dan. The Da Vinci Code. Sydney: Anchor Books, 2009. Print.
Dawkings, Richard. The God Delusion. Toronto: Bantam Press, 2006. Print.
Process Analysis on Wildland Fire Fighting Essay college essay help online: college essay help online
Overview Of Wildland Fire Fighting and Management Wildland fires are extremely complex and potentially dangerous to the ecosystem hence the need to understand the fighting mechanisms as well as management efforts to contain such an occurrence (Nix par 1). When approaching the issue of wildfires, our basic foundation remains on the premise that wildland fires are neither innately destructive to the forest nor are they in the best interest of the forest (Nix par 2).
However, wild land fire operations are contained in a high risk environment where firefighter and non fire fighters can incur severe injuries in a matter of seconds especially due to burn overs (Nix par 2). Therefore, it is crucial for the relevant authorities to device mechanism and strategies aimed at improving their response to wildland fires and promote effective management to ensure that they protect life and resources from the negative implications associate with occurrence of wildland fires.
Wildland fires result may result from human activities or from natural phenomena such as volcanic eruptions and lightening (Goldammer Ahern
The Problems of Terrorism in Modern World Research Paper best college essay help
Terrorism has no single definition. However, it can be termed as organized acts of terror, mainly unleashed through unlawful activities, and which is intended to create fear and intimidation to a particular individual, organisations or a state.
Terrorism is carried out with various motives, including political, religious and ideological motives. The acts of terrorism may target governments, non-governmental organizations or even individuals. Terrorism in governments involves attack of the government leaders, or other economic or social institutions. The acts can also involve attack of civilians.
Terrorism is inspired by many reasons, which mainly include philosophical, racial, and ideological or religious believes. Other reasons may include desire for social solidarity and desire to seek attention and recognition from various institutions and governments. On the other hand, the use of force and intimidation by some governments and authorities to obtain political, social or economic benefits is also perceived as terrorism.
There are many things that act to encourage terrorism attacks. One of them is vulnerability. This is a state of being exposed to acts of terrorism, or the likelihood of being a terror victim. One may be vulnerable to terrorism in many dimensions like physical vulnerabilities. Physical vulnerability can either be in terms of geographical location.
One is likely to be more vulnerable to terrorists’ acts depending on the region or state where they live as posited in (Hulnick, 2004). Countries that are terrorists’ camp sites have high incidences of terrorists’ attacks. Many groups and organisations of terrorism cause direct and personal threats to many individuals. In many incidences, innocent civilians have lost their properties and lives from acts of terrorists.
Physical location also determines one’s political, and also the belief system. If such systems are contrary to terrorists’ desires and wishes, then you are more likely to be vulnerable to their attacks. Various regions and states of the continents have different degrees of terrorism vulnerability. Some States and countries that are more powerful and influential either socially, economically or politically, are at times major targets of terrorists (Ginges, 1997).
This is because terrorists seem to perceive that such countries and states may use their positions and wealth to fight back the terrorists’ acts and plans they propagate. The location vulnerability of terrorism can be reduced by being selective in terms of where one lives. Terrorists’ acts may also target various cities and streets. Therefore, selecting physical location in terms of operations and resident will reduce the chances and exposure to terrorism.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Physical vulnerability may also involve structural systems. These include buildings and other physical systems. High rise buildings with many floors are more likely to be attacked by terrorists than low rise buildings. Buildings that are used by governments, anti-terrorists organisations or agents are at high risks of attacks from terrorists’.
Various governments’ agencies, corporations and ambassadors may be vulnerable to terrorism depending on such governments’ stands and reactions towards terrorism. The knowledge of terrorism will be helpful in reducing chances of attacks. If one understands the relation of a government with terrorists, he/she can make decisions that involve less risk exposure and therefore, this makes one less vulnerable as a target of terrorism.
Resources distribution is also another physical cause for vulnerability with terrorism. Communities and societies that have less resources might feel segregated, which creates a need for such communities and societies to find means to create more resources and recognition. Lack of fair political or economic mechanism to distribute natural resources may also cause terrorists threats. This means that the class or group that is segregated may use terror to fight for equitable distribution of resources.
Therefore, equitable distribution of resources and proper political and economic mechanisms will help in mitigating vulnerability to terrorism. In conclusion, hardening against vulnerability to terrorism has to involve knowledge about geographical location, structural systems and resources allocation and distribution. This knowledge will be vital in adjusting accordingly to terrorism threats, and taking decisions that reduce the risk of attacks from terrorists.
References Ginges, J. (1997). Deterring the terrorist: A psychological evaluation of different Strategies for deterring terrorism. Terrorism and Political Violence, 9, 170-185.
Hulnick, A. (2004). Keeping Us Safe: Secret Intelligence and Homeland Security.
Genealogy of Morality Essay essay help online
This passage is taken from first treatise on “Good and evil”, “good and bad”. This treatise looks at the judgment given in the deriving of values (Nietzsche et al. 10). That is it looks at how the values are formed and how they can be judged to be real values of humanity or not.
This poses the question of how values really come to humanity and if they are representative of all people and of equal value to those who are required to uphold them. The quote describes the distance that has come between those who are rankled high and the masses who are ranked lowly (Nietzsche et al. 10). There is an indifference towards the masses and the transformation model that Nietzsche’s offers demands the pathos of distance.
The distance can change with the slave revolt to morality if the human image is overcome. Humanity has become embedded I nihilism. This leaves it vulnerable to spiritualization and looking to the external to indicate its morality. However if humanity’s self image is broken and the spirit set free it can work with the intellectual to find greater and otherwise unknown comprehension of the human nature.
The right to create values was taken by those in high ranks who became the ones to judge what is good based on their own experience (Nietzsche et al. 10). They based their perception of what is good on what they received and deemed good while the masses were obliged to accept that as common and if common then as the norm of the values.
Usefulness itself would refer to the utility of the values. If those who are ranked highly give a value that is not of use to humanity or disregards those considered lowly then it has no value and it is useless to have such a value. This passage presents the philosophical arguments on values.
This passage is located in the preface. It is the starting point of Nietzsche’s discourse. It sets the stage for Nietzsche’s philosophical thoughts. By beginning to consider the human person in relation to the self, the thoughts about humanity can be better understood since humanity is made up of the sum of the individuals.
The ‘we knowers’ in the passage refers to those who think and feel that they are in the know based on their knowledge, education and experiences. They regard themselves as rather less ignorant that the other people and believe they know it all as philosophers (Nietzsche et al. 1).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nietzsche introduces some reasons as to why we are unknown to ourselves. It would seem that we are unknown to ourselves being that we do not look for ourselves. It would be hard to find that which we are not concerned with. There is no attention to the self and as such self awareness escapes us. The main concern seems to be with able to find and bring something (Nietzsche et al. 1). The attention is outside ourselves and there is little room for inward glance.
The second reason is that experiences do not form part of what is taken seriously understood and treasured (Nietzsche et al. 1). There is no concern to internalize the experiences. They just keep adding up in life without being meaningfully utilized because there is little time to pay attention to them. Life is rushed about and experiences do not form a concrete part of our lives.
For these two reasons people are not their own knowers. They are more concerned with the outside world and even when they get experiences that should resonate with the inside they do not pay attention. This passage sets the stage for the next passage that introduces the beginning of the problem that Nietzsche discusses in the book.
This passage is located in the preface page three. It is the point from which Nietzsche begins to lay down the philosophical content of the treatise. It presents the problem that will be explored in the following treatise.
The original problem that Nietzsche considered was the question what in fact is the origin of our good and evil? Where does it comes from? However the original problem is soon transformed into the problem of the circumstances man was in while he came up with value judgments of good and evil (Nietzsche et al. 3).
In addition the new problem also examines the value of the judgment particularly in their effect on human growth and condition. Have they beneficial or harmful to the fullness of man? The original question was reframed through philosophy by abandonment of the theological and concentration on answers that would not be found in the mere outside world.
Nietzsche talks about ‘under what conditions’ (3) since the human values were not made at once but rather evolved. They were formed over time and in different manner. As such humanity came up with values is response to certain circumstances. Human being are the ones who attach value to the values they hold (Nietzsche et al. 3).
We will write a custom Essay on Genealogy of Morality specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This is important to know in philosophical study since it can be understood how values have changed with time and how they will continue to change with time. This is a good understanding in studying humanity and shed light on human condition.
After this passage Nietzsche goes on into the first treaty whereby he talks about good and evil and how humanity came to develop their values as well as what is at the heart of the values that have been developed so far. Do they truly represent what humanity values and are they truly valuable to humanity?
Work Cited Nietzsche et al. On The Genealogy of Morality. Indianapolis: IN: Hackett Publishing Company, 1998. Print.
The Right to Abortion Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me
Arguments and counter arguments have been fronted with such fierceness and eloquence for and against abortion from different quarters of the social and spiritual divide. Abortion, an age-old phenomenon is defined as a premature termination of the unborn. Far and wide, arguments have been presented in various forms that span the general to specific issues.
It is a controversial topic that spans the social, moral, medical, and legal fields. The hostility against abortion affords counter arguments that justify its legality. Therefore, abortion is the right of every woman to decide when it should occur.
Despite the controversy surrounding a specific and working definition of when life begins, it is well worth noting that life begins a few weeks to birth. Before conception, the fetus entirely depends on the mother and any circumstances besides abortion may lead to its termination.
In addition to that, the growing embryo is not a fully developed functional human being therefore the argument that life begins at conception is preposterous and purely religious. That notwithstanding, the interest of the family and the mother are of paramount importance in this debate.
A mother should not be compelled to painfully bring up a child for eighteen years without due preparation and the social and psychological consequences faced by the unprepared mother. Some of the strong reasons presented by proponents of abortion include circumstances such as rape, mistaken pregnancies due to the failure of contraceptives, the threat to a mother’s life if she continues with a pregnancy, a deformed and disabled foetus, and work place career advancements.
On the other hand opponents of abortion argue that life begins at conception and terminating the foetus’ life amounts to a crime against humanity. They assert that terminating the life of a foetus at conception or during pregnancy amounts to killing a human being and lay emphasis on the foetus as a human being with all the fundamental rights of a person.
They argue that it is the killing of an innocent defenseless person in society when carrying out an abortion. They further assert that life is a God given gift and no one is entitled to terminate it under any circumstances.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition to that, opponents of abortion argue that human beings are supposed to show commitment to life of any form. They should be caring for the frail and weak in society and that spans the unborn fetus. They further affirm that happiness to life does not consist of money alone, but a complete and responsible life. Abortion is seen as a sin against the unborn as enshrined in the fifth Decalogue of the Ten Commandments in the religious eye.
Despite the arguments and counter arguments surrounding the issue on abortion, the age-old phenomenon is the legitimate right of the affected woman to decide to terminate it or continue with it. The life of the mother is far more important than the unborn foetus and everything should be done to preserve it. The right of the mother is entirely justified.
Physical, Human, and Economic Geography of Italians Research Paper custom essay help
Introduction Italy is located in continental Europe, in the South Central, to be specific. Its neighbors include France Switzerland and Austria to the north, Slovenia along the Alps, and the Italian Peninsula, the islands Sicily, and Sardinia to the south in the Mediterranean ocean.
Italy is known in history as the home of some of the world’s most celebrated artists like Titian, Leonardo da Vinci, Michelangelo and Botticelli among many others. In addition, Italy is well known for historical tourism structures such as the Leaning Tower of Pisa which is made from marble. The people of Italy speak Italian language.
Most of the people are Roman Catholics. The people of Italy also engage in economic activities like merchandise, mining, tourism, fishing and many other activities. In addition to this, Italians are well known for their fashion in cloth industry. This report discusses the physical, human, and economic geography of Italians. It also gives a brief description of Italy as a country.
Historical Setting Italy is known to be the headquarters for the Roman Empire in ancient times. This is because its capital city, Rome, was used to rule a large portion of Western Europe.
The country has always attracted foreigners from ancient Greek settlers to modern tourists. Artists, pilgrims, romantic poets and mercenaries were also frequent visitors of Italy’s major cities (Woolf 13). The Celts inhabited northern Italy especially along the Lombard valley. Other people who settled initially include the Etrurian people who settled in Tuscany. This was during the period in which Italy was not yet born.
Characteristics of the population of Italy Most of the country’s population lives in cities and towns. The large population occupies northern Italy, the west coast in particular. The southern parts of Italy are more rural although not productive for farming activities due to climatic factors.
The behavioral characteristics of the population, dates back from the seventeenth century when cities began to grow in number. Most administrative centers experienced a sharp growth while others stagnated at a particular size. Thus the increase in urban population caused a decrease in the size of the rural community (Woolf 57).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Geographic Setting of Italy Italy covers a total area of 116,340 square miles, the islands of Sardinia and Sicily being included. Its population is 58 million people (How Stuff Works 4). The capital city of Italy is Rome. Italy also has several other major cities which include Milan, Naples, Genoa and Venice.
The continental Italy is a peninsula in the Mediterranean Sea that is, it projects outwards from continental Europe into the sea. The republic of Italy encompasses two islands in the Mediterranean. The islands are Sicily and Sardinia. Due to political boundaries, the northern part of Italy is situated between the gulf of Trieste and the Rhone at its efflux from the lake of Geneva.
Therefore, the Rhone, the Pennine Alps together with some parts of Adriatic Gulf and the Mediterranean Sea separate Italy from her neighbors France, Germany and Switzerland.
The coast of Italy is composed of the Adriatic Gulf and the Mediterranean Sea up to the region where the Maritime Alps appear to end just near France’s frontiers (Brun 586). Generally speaking, most of the northern fertile areas are covered by the Po valley which receives and transports all the waters that come from the Apennines northwards. It also receives all the water that comes from the Alps towards the south. The river follows a parallel course with the Adige. The Adige enters the Adriatic by a separate mouth with the Po.
Geologic Setting of Italy A large part of Italy is covered by mountains which include the Alps. Most of the Alps in Italy are composed of the rock dolomite. Other mountains in Italy include the Apennine Mountains which dissects the middle part of Italy from north to southern parts thus separating the eastern and the western coasts of the country. South of the dolomite mountains lies the Po Valley. This is the basin of river Po.
Italy has also been shaped by major geologic phenomena. Crustal subsidence occurred when Wurm Regression surface lowered within the Naples Bay. Glacial activities are also present in the northern parts of Italy. Seismic and volcanic activities also occur in Italy especially in the mountainous regions of Pozzuoli Bay (Dvorak
Views in “A Dove in Santiago: Anovella In Verse” Essay college admission essay help: college admission essay help
Is there something that could level the absurdity of a suicide? Probably, this is only a human’s life that can. The question of what crimes people have been given the chance to live for remains open. The only that people can do is merely guesswork.
The Dove in Santiago, a poem by Yevtushenko, is a moving attempt to figure out if there are answers to all these questions, an attempt so moving in its futility.
People are born to live, but the life that they are granted with is full of misery and torments, it seems completely deprived of any common sense. The absence of any reasons to go on with this experience is evident, and yet people are trying to escape this fact, searching for the hidden truths that they have thought up themselves not to go completely mad.
The poem is breathing this idea with every line. The torn and tossed style and the manner of writing, the words that seem to have collided accidentally, the scraps of ideas that rush through the main character, Enrique. He is all torn just like the rest of the world.
Yet this mess is governed by a law that lives within it. The mechanism of the world, so easy to watch and so hard to understand, so easy to break and so difficult to mend, consists of the parts that are interdependent.
There is no chance, or accidents. Once something goes wrong, the whole structure collapses, leaving the remains of the world without a crutch to lean on. Every single action that a man takes drags a string of consequences, either tragic or comic. This is a black-and-white pattern that follows people throughout their entire life, making the rest of the world depend on Mr. Doe. A crazy idea as it is, it is one of the three pillars the world is based on. Which are the other two is a mystery.
“Everything is linked.” These simple words from the poem make the whole lots of truths come together in a fancy stir, shining people’s lives with a happy nonsense. A world is a string of beads, and whenever you want to take one out, you cut the whole string. We are all interconnected in the great circle of life. That sounds way too familiar to me…
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While it is more or less understood with the writer’s philosophy, it is far more complicated with the reader’s perception of the poem. The reader’s philosophy, at times not hat sophisticated as the author’s one, and sometimes being almost equal to Yevtushenko’s, is bound to be different and make even a broader question to discuss.
What do people feel as they read these sharp, sad and troubled lines? There must be the feeling of a slight misconception – not about the poem, but about the way the world turns around – and a touch of ease. Eventually, you find out that the world is not a desert with rare planets of different people colliding to push each other even further.
The thought of all things depending on each other as close as a baby depends on the mother is a relief. There is not a single thing that will pass without another event happening. A butterfly that has been stepped on might be the initial reason for a revolution in an eastern country.
There is very little that is needed to understand the interdependence of all existing in the world. A man commits a suicide and kills a dove – the symbolism of the poem is amazing, Enrique kills the symbol of peace and love, taking it together with his own life! – and that is his contribution to the earth to keep rolling. There could be no other warning so clear to tell people that they should be careful about what they are doing.
The world that the mankind is bound to live in is tragic in its irreversibility. Once done, an action cannot be called off. And this might give people some food for thoughts. At least, while thinking, they will not have so much time to make a lot of mess.
Legal Immigration versus Illegal Immigration in America Research Paper essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu
Table of Contents Introduction
Legal immigration in America
Effects of legal immigration in America
Illegal immigration in America
Effects of illegal immigration to America
Solutions to illegal immigration to America
Introduction Immigration occurs when people from a different area come to settle to another area already inhabited by the natives. People migrate from their home areas to other areas because of many factors which are usually called push factors. Push factors are those factors which motivate a person to move from their country of origin.
Migration can be subdivided into various groups which include economic migration. In this case, people move from their country of origin to the desired country because they are looking for higher wages. Other factors which determine immigration are the accompanying costs. These costs include transportation costs, costs related to work time and loss of family and social bond.
A person cannot migrate to another country if these costs are too high. The increase in technology especially in the transport sector has decreased the travel time across land and seas. This in turn has decreased the cost which makes migration less tedious.
People can also migrate due to employment reasons such as in a contract, or due to religious reasons like missionaries. Diplomatic missions can also cause persons to migrate. These reasons are the ones which cause legal and illegal immigration in which their difference is demystified in this paper.
It is worth noting that many people like to immigrate to America for economic reasons. Due to inhibiting factors, some end up using illegal channels, hence the term illegal immigration. If the correct channel is used the process becomes legal immigration.
Legal immigration in America Legal immigration occurs when the person who is moving from their country of origin uses the correct bureaucracy to gain entry into the desired country of destination. In the United States of America, legal immigrants are those people who have passed interviews in the American embassies located in their country of origin.
Other ways in which a person can immigrate legally to the U.S are through diplomatic missions, work contracts and religious activities among many others. A native of a particular country can also qualify to immigrate to America if they win a green card in the green card lottery.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this case the person becomes a U.S citizen automatically. This can make a person gain dual citizenship, although it depends with the constitutionality of the idea in their country of origin. Legal migration is good for America because they are more likely to be law abiding, legal immigration brings the best skills from other countries, pay into the American’s social security system, and so forth.
The federal government has been able to enact policies which give legal immigrants basic rights just as the legal citizens of United States of America. This is because they passed through a tedious process of getting the visas or green cards, a process which is vital for them to get legal documents. The high skills and difference in culture, which are normally brought in by legal immigrants results in scientific and cultural achievements. Thus, the U.S has been able to benefit by tapping into these advantages.
Effects of legal immigration in America Legal immigrants bring with them new skills which are needed in the American economy. The process of legal immigration is accompanied with competition in the labor market which. They bring with them cultural diversities. The process comes with scientific achievements.
Legal immigrants also participate actively in the labor force. The wages of some of the labor especially in the agricultural sector are usually extremely low. This is often rejected by the Native American because they are unattractive. Legal immigrants can offer such labor with these wages.
Illegal immigration in America Illegal immigration is the illegitimate entry into U.S of individuals who are not citizens of America. An illegal immigrant can also be a person who has an expired visa because he continued living in the host country due to various reasons.
Some of them do not want to go back to their home country because they will be faced with an uncertain economic future, for political asylum or if married to an American spouse would not want to be separated from the their family by being deported. These people are legal immigrants but their illegality comes due to the fact that they overstayed their temporal legality (Haines
BLUE NILE Inc. Strategy and SWOT Analysis Essay custom essay help
Introduction Blue Nile was founded in the year 1999 (Thompson 1) and it has since grown to become the world largest online retail dealer of best high quality diamonds and gems. The company markets its product online through the internet.
An Evaluation of the Company’s Strategy Low cost strategy
The Blue Nile Company has few employees as most of its products are marketed online and thus this has enabled the company to operate at low costs compared to its other industry competitors. This low costs operation enables the company to sell its diamonds and gemstone products at lower prices thus having a cutting edge over its competitors.
The company’s strategy of operating in virtual stores, thus displaying its products in the internet without having the real products and only purchasing the required diamond or gems after an order has been placed, enables her to minimize risks and the costs involved in carrying large inventories and purchasing huge stocks which no customer demands for.
Another cost saving strategy which enables the company sell its products at cheaper prices is the lean operating costs that the company employs. Rather than employing everybody on permanent basis, the company hires experts for example from the financial and merchandising sectors on contract basis and only when their services are required rather than employing them on permanent basis where they could be demanding for wages daily or monthly without having done anything productive.
This has resulted in the Blue Nile Company offering high quality diamonds and fine jewelry at attractive prices which are affordable to most of its customers.
Education information and certification
Providing its customers with useful information about their stocks and a trusted guidance throughout the purchasing process is another strategy the company is using to stay as the global leader in jewel online trading. The educational information provided, the in depth product information, the grading reports, and the wide product coverage gives its customers the confidence that they know what they are dealing with.
The information provided includes the shape, color, cut and carat weight and when the customer is knowledgeable about these qualities then he can decide on the value and affordability of the products. The company has developed the 5Cs: Carat, Color, Cut, Clarity and Cut grade. This in-depth information has enabled the customers educate themselves on the quality and values of their products (Thompson 4).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Marketing approach
To boost her brand recognition, enhance the consumers’ mobility, and increase the customer base. In doing this, the company has created a user friendly interactive search tool that allows shoppers to customize their search quickly and identify the characteristics and the desire in a jewel then make an order to the company.
The company offers information about the qualities and characteristics and thus the customers can search for the diamonds and gems according to quality, price, weight and other traits as their pockets could allow. Advertising is another marketing strategy the company is using both online and offline so as to reach a wider pool of customers.
Customer service and support
To complement the information provided in their website, the company has developed a call center through which their customers call for enquiries about the purchases and refunds among other enquiries. The call service response does not take longer than 10 seconds and this has helped improve the relationship between the company and its customers.
To enhance customer value and confidence the company has designed an order fulfillment by entering the customer orders accurately and then delivering the shipment order to the company suppliers who delivers the diamonds or the gemstones as per the orders. The company then makes the jewels and delivers them quickly and securely making no inconveniences to its customers. In line with the customer service, the firm has also the product line expansion where it has been offering both customized and non customized jewelry items.
The BLUE NILE business model The cost minimization model which gives the company the ability to purchase diamonds and gemstone only when an order is made is a good model as it has enabled the company to conduct its business with minimal inventory, helped the company build a brand name and brand awareness hard to be copied by the competitors.
Negotiated agreements with various suppliers enables the company to be secure from overdependence on one supplier and thus reducing the chances of exploitation by a single company. By allowing the “ build your own feature” to operate, this allows the company make orders of only the required materials and thus reducing the chances of buying idle stocks which lenders working capital inactive.
SWOT analysis of the company Strengths Low number of employees, competitive pricing and lean costs
Since the company sells its products mostly online with the little number of employees, this enables the company on cut on its expenses and thus enabling it to provide their products at cheaper prices compared to their competitors. As stated by Thompson (3) the company sells its products at 20 to 40% cheaper compared to other industry competitors.
We will write a custom Essay on BLUE NILE Inc. Strategy and SWOT Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Customization ability
The build your own feature that allows the company to make the jewelries according to the customer requirements is another major strength in comparison with the other jewel makers who cannot be able to do this.
This is another major strong point for the company as it is able to provide the customers with all the required information about what it offers. The company also offers informative knowledge on how to determine the value, quality and price giving the customers confidence that Blue Nile is a company you can trust.
Weakneses Virtual shops
Most of the customers purchase their diamonds and gems online without having the physical touch or feel of the jewels. Their rivals in the industry can take advantage of this by convincing the customers that when buying jewels its always best when you can have a feel of what you are buying.
Opportunities Products diversification
The business offers necklaces, earrings, and rings. To expand its market base the company should start investing in making sunglasses or glass frames, women purses and male wallets, door handles and other appliances which their diamonds can be used on. This could ensure that the market share of the company grows.
The company should expand globally and be more vigorous in marketing its products abroad so as to increase its revenue returns.
The company has been facing stiff competition from other rival companies like Tiffany and Diamonds.com which offers similar products to what the company is offering and the fact that these competitors are convincing their customers that a customer deserves a touch of the jewel before buying is a major threat as most of the Blue Line Company stores are online.
Conclusion Though online trading is rather risky and exhibits low trust and confidence among the customers, the Blue Nile Company has proven that its not only books which can be traded online but expensive jewels can also be traded online as long as the suppliers creates trust and confidence on its customers.
Works Cited Thompson, Arthur. Blue Nile Inc. World Largest Online Diamond Dealer. Alabama: The University of Alabama, 2007
Not sure if you can write a paper on BLUE NILE Inc. Strategy and SWOT Analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
Analysis of the movie The Crucible Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
The Crucible is a movie that was written by Arthur Miller adapted from his play, which he authored in 1953, going by the same name. Miller released this two hours and three minutes movie on November 29, 1996. The film as directed by Nicholas Hytner portrays the events taking place in Salem, Massachusetts in 1692. The people of this community were religious and were devoted to serve God (Leeper, Para. 2).
The main actors in this movie include Daniel Day-Lewis who acted as John proctor, Winona Ryder as Abigail Williams, Paul Scofield as Judge Thomas Danforth, and Joan Allen as Elizabeth Proctor. Other actors who contributed to the film include Bruce Davidson as Reverend Parris, Rob Campbell as Reverend Hale, Jaffrey Jones as Thomas Putman, Karron Graves as Mary Warren, Charlayne Woodard as Tituba, among others. The movie shooting took place on the island of Hog in Essex, Massachusetts. The Crucible has some historical accuracy.
The movie starts by a scene where young girls in their teen age gather in the woods and dance while chanting. These girls secretly organized this ceremony to give them a forum to perform magic in order to entice some village men to love them.
Leeper says, “The opening sequence shows a voodoo-like ceremony in the woods complete with mystic chalk symbols drawn on the ground, and Tituba chanting a perfectly recorded version of the Yanvalou chant (Para. 5).” From this it is evident that Tituba (Charlayne Woodard), a black American Slave, was leading the ceremony.
Abigail Williams, who wished for John Proctor’s wife to die, slaughtered a hen and drunk the blood. Before the ceremony climaxed, Reverend Parris (Bruce Davison), who was Abigail’s uncle, came across them. The ceremony came to an abrupt end and the girls started running away. In this event, Betty, Parris’ daughter and Ruth the daughter of Thomas fell and became unconscious. The parents of these girls suspected that their daughters were demon possessed. They then called Reverend Hale to come and look into this issue.
The girls had to look for means of rescuing themselves from this problem and so Abigail indicated Tituba as a witch. Tituba, after subjection to torment, confessed to be a witch. This made the girls to name other people whom they had seen practicing witchcraft. Elizabeth Proctor, John’s wife was one of the named people. This was Abigail’s plan to kill her in order for her to get back John Proctor.
The community at that time was religious and did not entertain witchcrafts. According to their judicial systems, anybody who denied the accusations was supposed to die. The suspects were supposed to be hung. This meant that John Proctor’s wife, Elizabeth Proctor, was to be hung if she denied the allegations, as was Abigail’s plan. John defended his wife against the accusation, an issue that turned against him. He was accused of being a witch and was hung. Elizabeth survived execution of the sentence because she was pregnant.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Arthur Miller’s play and movie was a reflection of what used to happen in the United States of America. It was a portrayal of the trials, which used to take place in Salem, Massachusetts. There was a committee headed by Senator Joe McCarthy. The committee sought Un-American activists and questioned them. Those who pleaded guilty were let free and those who refused to name others were persecuted. In addition, those who pleaded innocent were hung.
It was a situation where reason was not used in the judicial system and people were made to confess things out of fear. Those who wanted to fight for their reputation, like John Proctor in the movie, were killed by hanging. This House of Representatives’ Committee on Un-American Activities summoned and questioned Miller in 1956. The committee convicted Miller of “Contempt of Congress” because he failed to name the people who attended with him the secret meetings.
The Crucible is “based on an actual historical event of the past, but it is neither a historical play nor a historical romance” (Ram, 116). Miller himself said in a note about the historical accuracy of his play that the “play is not historic in the sense in which the word is used by academic historians” (Miller and Blakesley, xvii).
There are historical characters presented in this film. Miller used the exact names of some of them. He also accepts that he never captured the whole of their characters and personalities. All he portrayed was what he could capture from the documents of their trial cases. Some of the historical characters depicted in the movie include Betty Parris, Elizabeth Proctor, John Proctor, Abigail Williams, Samuel Parris, Reverend Hale among others.
Miller must have researched well into history and therefore tried to put this movie to be accurate with history as much as possible. Leeper suggests, “If The Crucible is not historically accurate, it transcends it” (Para.5). Even though the movie tried to be historically accurate, there are minor deviations from history.
The characters he employed in presenting his message in the movie were not the real historical individuals and thus were prone to have some differences. The chant by Tituba at the onset of the film shows that this might have happened sometimes later than the real setting of the play depicts. The movie also portrays another lapse of historical accuracy in the execution of the death sentences.
The movie shows a group of people hanged at the same time. In the real historical setting, these people were hanged at different times. “Rebecca Nurse was hanged on July 19, Proctor on August 19, and Martha Corey on September 22 — not all on the same gallows” (Burns, Para. 20). Reverend George Burroughs prayed on the gallows and not Proctor as it is in the movie. The movie proves to be in tandem with the historical happenings in Salem, despite these minor deviations.
We will write a custom Essay on Analysis of the movie The Crucible specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The events taking place in The Crucible are examples of what is happening in our society nowadays. Some people live in fear and as such are not free to express themselves and point out what is right. Like the trials which were taking place in Salem, our judicial systems have become very unfair condemning the innocent while letting the guilty free.
This further aggravates the people’s fear making them to confess falsely on what they have not done. The form of judgments made in Salem, Massachusetts is still seen in our governments where people do not use reason to pass judgments but use the opinion of many. Even though the events taking place in Salem may not take the same form in our societies, they still exist.
Works Cited Burns, Margo. “Arthur Miller’s The Crucible: Fact and Fiction.” 17th Century Colonial New England. 9.30.2010. Web. http://www.17thc.us/docs/fact-fiction.shtml
Leeper, Mark. “The Crucible (1996)”. Movie Reviews. N.d. Web. http://www.eclectica.org/v1n3n4/leeper4.html
Miller, Arthur and Blakesley, Maureen. The Crucible By Arthur Miller. London: Heinemann, 1992. Print.
Ram, Atma. Perspectives on Arthur Miller. New Delhi: Abhinav Publications, 1988. Print.
The Type of Consumerism in the 21st Century Essay argumentative essay help
The spirit of the times is characterized by a different type of consumerism. In ancient times people consume products via barter. A farmer grows wheat and then he goes to his neighbor who happens to be a fisherman and they exchange goods. A lumberjack would do the same, he would offer his service or sell lumber in exchange for a sack of salt or a sack of flour.
But in the 21st century consumerism is no longer dictated by the needs of men but by the influence of marketers, advertising agencies, writers, artists who have the power like the Pied Piper of Hamelin. These are people who can make you do things and buy stuff without even knowing why you are driven to do so. It can be simplified as doing it out of the backend or in other words they create the market even before the actual product.
A good example is the phenomenon of the Harry Potter franchise. It began as an idea in the head of J.K. Rowling the author. At first, no one had a clue as to what she was trying to say. Those who are familiar with her rags-to-riches story know that many publishers rejected her manuscript. In other words no one wants to know. It was only after one publisher took a gamble and her books became a bestseller when people began to notice.
A short while after that the spirit of the times kicked into high gear. J.K. Rowling was approached by film producers to buy the rights to her book so that they can turn it into a movie. The moment Rowling signed the dotted line the wheels began to turn in Hollywood and the marketing blitz began.
The first thing they did was to hype the best-selling book. The second thing they did was to hype the author’s sudden rise to riches and fame and then they made the movie. By the time the first installment of the Harry Potter movie series came out even those who have not read the book wanted to see the film.
The interest to the movie was of course driven by the fans of the book and of course their parents, their friends, and then the web grew bigger and it did not come as a surprise that the movie generated hundreds of millions of dollars in revenue.
But what came next was a testament to the spirit of the times there were products that were created as a direct result of the success of the book and the movie. There are T-shirts, toys, and video games. In order to sustain this marketing frenzy J.K. Rowling had to write a few more books. Then cycle repeats itself. The movie producers buy the rights to the books and create the next sequel to the first one.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The rest of the industry built around the Harry Potter franchise continues to work at a frenetic pace as well because the demand for more of the Harry Potter merchandize. Millions were being sold all over the globe. It has brought the whole Harry Potter industry into a new level. The brains behind the astute marketing of the books, movies, and other products were able to create a demand that a few years before did not exist.
The spirit of the times is all about consumerism that goes beyond the basic needs of man. In the past it was all about food, clothing, and shelter. In the present the same thing applies, people still need food, people still need to be clothed, and they still need to have a roof over their heads. But this time around those needs are easily satisfied and therefore it is no longer enough to have basic commodities, these products must be enhanced. Therefore, the fried chicken must be packaged and sold together with a toy from a popular movie.
Man requires clothes but this time around the T-shirt has the face of Spider-Man or Wolverine printed on it. Man requires a home but this time around the home has to contain gadgets and gizmos. The gadgets should be a multi-tasker, able to make calls, provide the news, tell the time, behave like an alarm clock if needed, provide a map, and even order pizza.
There are many who object the crass commercialism that defines the age that we live in. But there seems to be no way out. It has been ingrained into the social fabric of this country. The next generation does not know how to live without the stimulation that these products can give. It will continue as long as the formula keeps on working. Shrewd businessmen controlling all forms of media will always find a way to exploit this weakness.
The spirit of the times is all about creating a demand, creating hunger and then satisfying that need. It is bizarre in the sense that man can live without it and yet after a series of marketing campaigns people are convinced that they needed to acquire the latest iphone, the latest laptop, an expensive watch, an expensive shoe. The brains behind the marketing campaigns were able to create a deep-felt need and then turn around to produce the remedy for that longing and desire.
Another good example of the spirit of the times is the Star Wars franchise. The producers of the film capitalized on the success of the first three installments of the movie and then they turn around to create a demand by saying that there is a prequel to Star Wars, The Empire Strikes Back and Return of the Jedi. It can be argued that these three movies are already perfect and there is no need to explain what happened to Luke Skywalker when he was a boy and the reason why Darth Vader became the villain.
A simple prologue and epilogue would have sufficed and the audience will still be satisfied with the story of the first three movies. However, the marketing geniuses at Hollywood began to work their magic and they succeeded in whetting the appetite of the movie-going public by telling them that it is imperative that they should go watch a movie to know more about the life of Luke Skywalker. As a result the fans of the Star Wars trilogy had to endure long lines and to spend money just to watch the prequel.
We will write a custom Essay on The Type of Consumerism in the 21st Century specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The negative impact is clearly seen in the accumulation of expensive toys that clutter the home. These things are made of plastic and paper and this means that these are not durable goods. It will only take a short time before people will see their favorite toys in the trash bin.
In less than a year a game console will lose its appeal or worse it would break down. Another wave of demand will be created first Batman then Spider-Man, X-Men, Harry Potter and Iron Man. Every change of season and every change of mood will increase the stockpile of rubbish but the producers and the manufacturers of expensive but disposable items will continue to make profit.
This cannot be helped because humanity has evolved into a species where the attention span is less than five minutes and yet requiring stimulation. Boredom is a word hated by children, teenagers, and adults. There is constant need for distraction. Gone are the days when a teenager is contented to sit on a corner and read classics.
The whole planet operates at a much faster rate and everyone should keep up. It is no longer enough to focus on the basic needs for a long time ago man already understood that man does not live on these things alone. This realization did not come from years of meditation; it was the advertising agencies and the marketing experts who were able to create a demand before the actual product. It is difficult to understand but it is everywhere. The evidence is seen in homes, the schools, and offices all over the world.
Conclusion The spirit of the times is more than crass commercialism it is the creation of demand in the minds of the general public and when that idea becomes a desire the companies and individuals who worked hard to create such impact will then benefit from the demand.
Interestingly the demand for a product was non-existent at first but then those who want to sell it has succeeded in creating that hunger that desire. It may seem harmless at first but a closer look at the toys, gadgets, and products that were manufactured to satisfy this demand one will realize the amount of money wasted on these things.
However, the desire to acquire and to experience something has been created in the hearts and minds of individuals that they will not find rest and peace until they can have the latest gadget, watch an overly-hyped movie, buy a game console etc. It will take sometime before people began to realize that they are wasting time and it is time to go against the status quo.
Should Service Learning Be A Requirement For College Graduation? Essay college admissions essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Students Serve the Community While Learning
Service Learning: Elemental for Higher Education
Service Learning May Impede Learning
Introduction According to Herman Melville, human being cannot live for themselves. This means that their lives are connected in numerous ways that are invisible and along these connections; their actions act as causes and then the outcomes or reactions come as results. Agreeing to Melville’s philosophy when addressing service learning means that students must have action on the community and then these causes bring results.
For instance, through serving learning, a college student can impact positively on the lives of people he/she will be serving and thus cause a positive change. In final assessment, this student is likely to benefit from the service learning by attaining contentment and hands on experience. An experienced optician can help a student optician to ma eye examinations in poor neighborhoods.
However not everyone believes that service learning is a good venture and they oppose it terming it as self serving since students and professional are used to accomplish the same tasks. Again even the activities that are not entirely helping the students to learn his/her future career can still have positive outcomes. This paper addresses the impact that service learning has on the students and the community to gauge whether it would be viable to make it a requirement for learning or not.
Students Serve the Community While Learning College administrations have in the past made remarks that the current generations of graduates do not have civility or community worth ethics. They claim that these young adults have gotten too self absorbed and are now loosing the sight of community good. Caret Robert however does not think this is true. At Towson University, students just like many others across the country are positively engaged in the community and are making a big impact on the community (Egger para. 2a).
September usually has a week of serving the community and during that period students raise awareness of the greater god that results from serving learning.
Service learning can be described as the teaching method which involves service to the community as part of its curriculum. It offers the students practical experience in the real world regarding specific fields of study and at the same time, it meets the needs of the community being served (Egger para. 2a).
The teachers involved in such programs are qualified professionals in community-oriented practice (Egger 189b). They provide the best way for students to reflect and integrate their community experiences into their wider educational knowledge perspective.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Through these experiences, the students are above to discover how events in politics, economics and general social lives affect the community and programs running in real life.
They start thinking about creative strategies that are linked to their knowledge in theory but not bound to it alone (Egger para. 2a). They find their roles in the community and identify their responsibilities as productive members of the society. Family studies at Towson University offer an exceptional way of integrating class work and community service (Egger 189b).
Students wishing to make a positive impact on the community can engage in such services. It’s estimated that at least 30% of student have been engaging in volunteer community work while still in school. Baltimore area lone has over 100,000 students and based on this percentage, then it mean over 30,000 students are serving their communities. Therefore service learning is the best way that universities can bring real change to the community.
Service Learning: Elemental for Higher Education What is the general purpose of the higher education, for mere career or for lifelong benefit? This is a question that many people have been seeking to address. Ernest Boyer believes that in order to bring change to American colleges, students should be trained to be responsible citizens in the long run rather that teaching the solely to build their careers (Caret para. 2).
This way, the colleges will proudly connect theory to practice and therefore meet the challenges of social problems especially for universities in urban areas. Universities cannot be left to be areas of riches, self-importance and floral splendor when there is violence and despair loom in the community (Caret para. 2).
Service learning has the potential of enriching the process of learning and rejuvenating the society and provide fresh dignity to the service to the community scholarships (Egger 191b). Emphasizing that the worth of community serves is voluntary. Universities build a culture of service (Caret para. 3). There are two salient methods that this has been happening, through curricular and extracurricular activities. Professional schools are better placed to provide several ways of experiential learning experiences.
Service Learning May Impede Learning Egger John explains that he was taught that self – interest can by no means conflict with the love of the society. This to him mean that subjects like arts, chemistry and history are meant to promote they way individuals understand the nature of human behavior and hence build their capacity to cooperate in the community. Educated people respect the society and this arises when they realize person achievements.
We will write a custom Essay on Should Service Learning Be A Requirement For College Graduation? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In a society of individuals, everyone struggles to make his/her life better and this makes others better and social bonds strengthen as these individuals interact (Bringle and Hatcher 223). They hence develop mutual respect even for unintended persons because of the predictable outcomes. Egger argues that education promoting civility does not inn anyway deal with “good works” as Caret approves. Civility can be remedied by liberal arts lessons.
All that is required is to put emphasis on merits to an individual for respecting the society and involving others in trade. Unfortunately, Egger does not think this is being done and that is why students are disrespectful and distrustful of the human freedoms particularly the free markets. The solution for this is not to get s substitute like service learning (Bringle and Hatcher 223).
Service learning diminishes reverence for the society as it seems to imply that students owe other less privileged members of the community time and effort. Teaching that one has a responsibility to people he/she does not like, does not knew or whose misfortune one was never responsible engenders sense of antipathy and contempt but not compassion to fellow humans.
Liberal education requires that students respect fellow human but not to mean that they owe them something (Bringle and Hatcher 225). This means they respect other’s rights and freedoms while pursuing individual dreams. The purpose of higher education is training the minds of responsible members of the society and not to enhance their emotions.
Works Cited Bringle, Robert and Hatcher, Julia. Implementing Service Learning In Higher Education (Excerpt), Journal of Higher Education,67.2(1996): 221-238
Caret, Robert. Local Students Serve As They Learn. Baltimore, Maryland: Baltimore Examiner, 2007, Print.
Egger, John. No Service to Learning: “Service-Learning” Reappraised, Academic Questions, 21. 2(2007): 183-194
Egger, John. Service ‘Learning’ Reduces Learning. Baltimore Reporter, 2007
Not sure if you can write a paper on Should Service Learning Be A Requirement For College Graduation? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
Comparison of Two Kinds of People Compare and Contrast Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me
Among the great diversity one sees in the surrounding world, some distinct types of people stand out and allow categorization, comparison, and contrast between and among them. However, there are some interesting practices of comparing and contrasting non-compliant people; such activities may be highly productive for analytical thinking. Hence, the subjects of the present paper have been randomly chosen without any combination by category.
A politician and a scholar will be compared according to some characteristics they may have in common, and the disparities in activities, style of thinking and perception they may have. No specific representative of the kind is taken as an example, and all inferences are made on the basis of generalizations and stereotypical visions of the typical representatives of the kind.
A politician is a public person, in contrast to a scholar who usually deals with his/her scientific experiments and studies in a laboratory or cabinet. This is the main difference of politicians and scholars; the former have to be in public places, communicate their opinions and thoughts to masses of people, and always remain in the focus of mass media attention.
Scholars are usually known by their works, and there are only a limited number of people who knows them in person. However, nowadays the situation has changed drastically, with the intensifying mass media impact on all kinds of activities.
There are many scholars who conduct active social and enlightenment work, so they often become public personalities as well. Similarly to the politicians who bring their political agenda to the nation or the focus group and try to attract followers and supporters, scholars may also be interested in arising curiosity and attention to some scientific findings or studies, thus performing public presentations, giving interviews and press-conferences etc.
Another criterion for comparison may be found in the attitude to the truth by both kinds of people. Scholars are the active seekers of the truth, and they usually devote their lives to the quest of true facts and revelation of natural laws. Politicians have a very arbitrary attitude to the truth, as they surely manipulate it for the sake of their individual political interests.
Politicians constantly pose the truth intro the focus of their political attention as they claim they fight for its protection and restoration, they are guided only by integrity etc. Nonetheless, as practice shows, politicians often exaggerate their devotion to the laws of truth, law and morale, and often have to conceal certain facts in order to maintain their positive public image.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More One more criterion chosen for comparison is the perception of the job these two kinds of people have. Politicians are considered to be the elite group of people associated with luxury, wealth, and status. The political field of activity is traditionally associated with serious, prestigious positions and high stakes of the political plays.
The party winning the race for the majority in the government, or the official who manages to become a Senator or Minister, are supposed to get enormous profits from such new appointments. Scholars, in contrast, are considered to be more motivated to work because of their own inclinations to scientific discovery, and they are thought to earn not much, even for grand discoveries.
It is obviously not the case for advanced countries such as the USA, Canada and Western Europe – these countries foster their talents and provide adequate remuneration for their findings. It is still a problem in less developed countries where the contribution of scientists is still undervalued.
As one can see from the present comparison, different kinds of people that may seem to have nothing in common can still be compared. As in the case of a politician and a scholar, there are several criteria that clearly suit for characterizing both kinds of people discussed. The attitudes to life and profession, the central concepts of their perception, as well as the nature of their work may become the basis for comparison, revealing both common and different traits.
Seven Habits of High Successful People by Stephen Covey Essay essay help online
The Seven Habits of Highly Successful People by Stephen Covey was a bestseller book in the late 80s and early 90s; it sold more than 15 million copies and was translated to more than 38 foreign languages (Covey 1).
The author remains a very influential management guru of his times and indeed even in today’s world because not only was his book used as a blueprint to personal development in organizational contexts but also in other disciples such as social sciences, psychology and the likes (Covey 1). In the book, the author presents a set of ideas that if applied, aligns one towards the attainment of success by following a guideline of habits which he notes, are universal and timeless.
However, observers note that the book is quite simple to understand but not necessarily simple to put into practice. Based on the analysis of the book, this study will provide a detailed summary, analysis and critique of the book’s principles with regards to its inspirational and aspiration teachings.
Summary Habit 1: Being Proactive
Stephen purports that the destiny of an individual is usually dictated by the choices he/she makes (Covey 11). This means that people are often empowered to choose their status; say, happiness, sadness, decisiveness, failure, ambivalence, courage, success, fear or any other attribute that defines a person.
Of importance is peoples’ acknowledgement that every new opportunity gives an individual the chance to make a better choice. In so doing, people get a new opportunity to do things differently so that they can increase their productivity levels.
Habit 2: Considering the End
Covey notes that people should always consider where they would want to be in future while undertaking their daily duties. This should be done alongside an analysis of the current position they are in, their dreams, ambitions, goals and the likes. This is important because Covey notes that people often find themselves in positions of success but they derive very little satisfaction from it.
In fact, some people always achieve these high levels of success by trampling over the things they valued most in their lives (Covey 12). Such things could be family, friends, a dream career and the likes. Covey therefore gives an example by noting that “If your ladder is not leaning against the right wall, every step you take gets you to the wrong place faster” (12). This exposes an important aspect of imagination for the determination of the future.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Habit 3: Prioritizing Issues
Covey observes that human beings cannot do everything that comes along their way, at the same time. This is okay because it prevents overstraining oneself. Prioritization empowers individuals to decline taking up things they can’t do and instead focus their energies on matters of higher importance. Covey observes that people are usually the creators of their lives and therefore they are in charge of their destiny.
Habit 4: Think Win-Win
Thinking of a win-win strategy is not really about being extra nice or losing one’s edge, but more of collaborating and negotiating with third parties (Covey 14). Many people adopt a wrong way of living by comparing themselves to others and evaluating their actions in the eyes of others. This has created a negative culture of basing success on the failure of another person. For example, people often see themselves as a success when a fellow person falls.
The same is also true where some people perceive themselves as failures just because they have seen another person succeed. This is created by the variation in human potential and the inequality in opportunities. Some people therefore ensure that if they fail, they have to bring other people down with them, and if they succeed, they cut links with those who’ve failed or in some cases; they succeed as a way of revenging.
Covey notes that many people like to play this game because it is part of human nature but he questions what fun there is in doing so. Through this trail of thought, he proposes that a win-win situation needs to be upheld because it eliminates the animosity in human relationships and fosters cooperation.
Habit 5: Seek to Understand and then to be Understood
Highly effective people always don’t rush to explain their side of the story before they get to understand another person’s point of view. This fact elevates the most important skill to human interaction and understanding; communication (Covey 18). Partly, the societal system is to blame because people spend endless years learning how to read, write; but little time is dedicated to listening.
In fact, people rarely get life training lessons on the importance of listening to other people. Because of these shortcomings, most people often rush to be understood first and their points put across before others can air their views. In doing so, many people become very inconsiderate because they totally disregard the views of other people, pretend to listen or selectively understand a person’s views, thereby letting many points go unheard.
Habit 6: Synergy
Synergy is a common trait among highly effective people. Majorly, it underlies the premise that two heads are better than one and team work is an integral component to the success of any business. This concept also embraces open-mindedness to induce creativity so that new solutions can be found towards solving old problems.
We will write a custom Essay on Seven Habits of High Successful People by Stephen Covey specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More However, this process is not easy at all. Most importantly, it doesn’t happen overnight because people have to come together to contribute pieces of information and varied experiences towards the overall attainment of their ultimate goal. In this manner, a very comprehensive and hybrid solution can be obtained; better than one which could be obtained if only individual effort was employed.
Habit 7: Emphasis on Strengths
Covey sometimes refers to the emphasis on strengths to “sharpening of the saw” (19). This primarily means capitalizing on one’s greatest asset. It is also what highly effective people thrive on. It means achieving a balance between various functional areas on ones life for self renewal (Covey 21). First, one area of core competence is the physical aspect of it, where people practice beneficial eating; exercising and resting to improve their physical fitness.
Secondly, improvement can be done in areas of social and emotional wellbeing where interpersonal relationships can be enhanced to improve personal effectiveness. Thirdly, people can improve their mental wellbeing by learning to write, read, and learn and lastly, one can improve his/her physical wellbeing by engaging in natural mediation through music, art, prayer and other forms of self mediation (Covey 21).
Analysis Habit 1
With regards to being proactive as the first characteristic of highly effective people, people should be in a position to take responsibility for their actions at all times. In other words, it is not wise to keep blaming other people for one’s shortcomings; like managers blaming lower level employees for their failure; or employees blaming the managers for their failure.
Proactive people are therefore able to take a proactive stand and accept their responsibilities and shortcomings. This fact deters people from blaming their living environments, working conditions, genetics, circumstances or other parameters which may pose as an excuse for their shortcomings.
Proactive people understand that their actions and behaviors all depend on their intuition. The opposite of such kind of people are reactive people who are more likely to blame their primary environments as opposed to their actions (Covey 21). These are the kind of people who always seek external factors to use a scapegoat for their shortcomings.
Having the end scenario in mind entails having a wild imagination. Imagination is the ability to envision where one would be in the future because the eyes cannot see it at the moment. This element also observes that most things are always created twice; one, in the mind and two, in reality.
Just like a building follows a construction plan, the physical creation of a dream or goal follows the mental picture of it. The second habit therefore notes that if people fail to have the strategic foresight or dream about their destiny, they allow other people to control their future.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Seven Habits of High Successful People by Stephen Covey by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Imagination therefore needs to incorporate unique attributes within an individual which ought to be nourished within the framework of ethical guidelines, moral upbringing, and personal principles towards the achievement of the final goal. Also with the end in mind, one can be able to wake up each morning with the aim of accomplishing the desired goal by flexing personal will towards the attainment of a desirable end result.
Recapping the fist two habits of an effective person, we realize that the choice of being proactive is voluntary while in the second habit, the ability to create an end vision about one’s life is imaginary; however, this third habit makes the imaginary aspect to one’s destiny, real.
The third habit therefore encompasses the first and second habit and normalizes the process because it outlines that efforts need to be factored into the overall process on a daily basis. Many dilemmas regarding time management are also addressed in this context but this is just a fragment of the whole analysis.
More specifically, this third habit revolves around the management of one’s life. In detail, it involves a deep analysis of one’s life, values and purpose. Emphasis should therefore be made on the things which appear to have most importance in value. People therefore need to utilize most of their time in doing the things they find most value in; through organization and time management (in line with the resolutions made in the second habit).
The fourth habit being adopting a win – win scenario; it is not essentially easy to quantify it because its success lies in the hands of men and in the hearts of people who endeavor seek to foster mutual benefits (Covey 21). This is the attribute which effective people have been able to master. Effective people therefore ensure that human relationships are to a great extent beneficial to all and have a mutual benefit to all parties involved as well.
If opportunities were equated to one big pie, everyone would have a share and it would taste really good if everyone were a part of it. Covey points out that people who have properly mastered the art of adopting a win-win scenario in contemporary business set ups, posses a number of traits. First, they posses a high integrity; meaning that they adhere to their strong moral values and principles.
Secondly, they have a high level of maturity which means that they have a lot of courage when expressing themselves, and they also consider other peoples’ feelings while doing so. Lastly, these kind of people have a lot of abundance in terms of mental capability because they operate under the belief that everyone will get a share of whatever resources there is to divide (Covey 29).
The lack of ability to listen to other people often occurs because many people are tuned to listen just so they can respond to a given issue instead of understanding. People therefore spend most of their time listening to others while preparing to ask another question. This is wrong because important issues pass by without proper consideration.
Also, people should refrain from listening to other people through their life experiences and comparing other people’s stories with their own autobiography to see how it measures up. This leads to premature conclusions of what other people intent to put across.
Covey gives examples of common statements people make such as “Oh, I know just how you feel….. I felt the same way…….I had that same thing happen to me…..Let me tell you what I did in a similar situation” (25). This is wrong. Because many people listen to others through their own selves, their reactions fall within a given set of responses. These responses are outlined through the processes of judging, evaluation, probing, advising and interpreting other people’s information.
Synergy is a process that effective people employ to help them discover new solutions as a group (a goal which they wouldn’t have otherwise achieved through individual effort). Synergy firmly embraces the idea that the whole is always greater than the combination of different segments towards a solution.
Covey asserts that “One plus one equals three, or six, or sixty–you name it” (31). Synergy therefore thrives on open interaction and honest exchange of ideas so that new insights can be obtained. In fact, since everyone has a different opinion towards the achievement of a common task, the probability of inventing a new approach is very high. In fact, the diversity of opinion is the real driver towards accomplishment of productive synergy.
An emphasis of strengths as the seventh attribute requires one to engage in a rejuvenation of the four functional areas of human life. These areas as outlined above include physical rejuvenation, social and emotional rejuvenation, learning to write, read, and learn plus natural mediation through music, art, prayer and other forms of self mediation.
Improving in these core competency areas means that one can effectively improve in the other six functional areas. One’s capacity to handle new challenges and problems can also be enhanced in this manner. A lack of rejuvenation in these functional areas means that the body will become weak, the mind mechanical, the emotional status in disarray, the spirit dead and ultimately, someone is bound to be very selfish in nature. These attributes lower the effectiveness of a person.
Critical Analysis Becoming a highly effective person is a process of internal self analysis. Most of the issues identified in this study are internally motivated and largely depend on self-will. They also largely outline areas which concentrate on strengthening the functional areas of human growth.
The first habit of being proactive seeks to motivate people to take responsibility for their actions and helps them focus on areas they would best make a change; as opposed to areas they have very little impact on. The habit of end consideration empowers people to know the direction they are following and expend their energy towards the accomplishment of their ultimate goals in life. This principle also encourages people to appreciate what is of importance to their lives and concentrate less on what is unimportant.
Covey talks of issue prioritization which more or less revolves around accomplishment of specific goals but it encourages people to take up what they can do and avoid situations of burnout where they try to do everything at the same time. The fifth habit as identified in the book is however closely associated with the fourth because it encourages people to understand others’ point of view as opposed to theirs.
The sixth and seventh habits can also be employed concurrently because they incorporate the employment of synergy and emphasize on the strengths of an individual (because the latter can be used to develop synergy if used collectively). Comprehensively, the development of a highly effective person revolves around the 7 key areas of competence described above.
Conclusion The most unique attribute human beings have is the ability to choose the kind of channel they will take when dealing with issues that plague their lives. Even though conditioning the different circumstances they faced with will probably have an impact in changing the course of their lives, it doesn’t necessarily happen in a huge way.
Covey points out that an individual is totally responsible for the type of events that characterize his/her life. In other words, the power to feel happy, sad, annoyed or such like attributes all depend on the individual involved. The book explains how human beings can achieve a positive attitude and acquire traits that make them effective. Collectively, this book is quite captivating and has the potential to change lives if applied in the right spirit.
Works Cited Covey, Stephen. The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People. 2010. Web.
Racism in the Penitentiary Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online
Table of Contents Introduction
Factors Contributing to Racism in Prison
The Root Cause of Prison Racism in America
History of Racism in United States
The Nature and the Effects of Prison Racism
Effects of Racism in Prison
Introduction Racism in America has been a topic of discussion for a long time in the view of the fact that the country hosts people of different races. It occurs every where; in hospitals, learning institutions, prisons, and in social institutions, to name just a few. In the same country, there are a lot of people who have been put in prison as studies of Quigley( par. 3) explain that around 2.4 million American citizens have been imprisoned excluding the number which is held under probation and parole, who are over five million.
Most surprisingly, further studies indicate that despite the fact that racial minorities like the blacks and Latinos are less than a quarter of the total population, they comprise around sixty percent of the total prisoners. Therefore, it is clear that racism and racial inequality has not been eradicated but has taken a different form.
According to Quigley (par 4.), racial disparity in the juvenile justice system is also paramount. It is quite explicit that racism in American prisons is a real phenomenon. With that background in mind, this paper shall discuss more about the same problem and narrow down to root causes, history and explore the reason why it takes place as well as its impacts and consequences.
Factors Contributing to Racism in Prison There are many factors that contribute to racism in prison and in most cases; the same contribute to racism in the free society. For instance, superiority complex contributes to racism not only in prison and other penitentiary institutions, but also in the free society (Bhavnani, Mirza and Meetoo pp. 42).
The feeling of whites as the most superior race has persisted for a long time and the same is also present in prison facilities. Since racism is also a problem of the prison officials, whites are treated better than the other racial minorities especially if the official happens to be a white.
The nature of prison life is also a causative factor to the racism in such institutions. There are many gang activities in prison formed by the prisoners and more often than not, each gang contains members of a similar race. Given that gangs are involved in violence, prisoners are forced to join a particular gang of their race in order to be protected from the criminal activities of the other gangs. Therefore, it is clear that the existence of various gangs in prison is an important factor attributing to racism.
It is amazing but also true that some racists groups in the free society contribute greatly to the racism in prisons. Such groups incite criminals of their race by influencing them to establish racism groups in prison. A t times, they send some information and literature to them either in books or tapes to help them spread racism ideologies among the prisoners. Prisoners hailing from the racism groups are treated as heroes and often do appear in publications that spread racism ideologies (Quigley par 4).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Root Cause of Prison Racism in America Laws in the American constitution have contributed greatly to racism in American institutions, prison facilities included. For example, the 13th Amendment of the American constitution created a loophole which helped to influence racism in prisons as it stated, “Neither slavery nor involuntary servitude, expect as a punishment for crime….
Shall exist within United States” (Truax par. 4). Although several states continued to revise such laws, new laws which were formed continued to contribute to racism in prison. Immediately after the abolishment of slave trade, slaves continued to be imprisoned after committing crimes such as refusing to work, insulting the workers and even handling money carelessly.
Slavery codes were changed to black codes and since they allowed blacks to be imprisoned after committing petty offences, the same can be viewed as the root cause of racism in prison. Having discussed the causes of racism in prison it is important to explorer on its history which also helps explain the root cause.
History of Racism in United States Prison racism in United States has been in existence for a long a time; since the era of slave trade although blacks were rarely imprisoned as they were more valuable while working in the plantations. However, there were local jails and other facilities which used to control and limit the freedom of the blacks. The number of the blacks in prison increased following the end of the civil war and after the abolishment of slave trade.
Studies of Acoli (par. 5) indicate that once blacks were arrested even for the very minor and petty crimes, they were sentenced more harshly, compared to their white counterparts. Further studies indicate that immediately after the civil war, the percentage of the black citizens increased to thirty three percent.
The trend continued during the cold war era. Racism was not only being exercised by the prisoners but also by the prison guards bent on the fact that most of the guards were whites. Black prisoners were not only mistreated, but they were also deprived some of the important social amenities that are necessary even to a prisoner.
Prison life in America was a reflection of the life in the free society. During the civil rights era, life in prison was segregated and the same condition was present in the society. White prisoners and the prisoners from other races were treated differently. While the whites were allowed to be clerks, electrician and other good jobs, black prisoners were given the lowest jobs like garbage disposal, working in the farms and washing clothes.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Racism in the Penitentiary specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Moreover, blacks were segregated in all other places in the prison life. For example, they were supposed to live in their known separate cells and the same segregation existed even recreation facilities such that black prisoner used to stay at the back while the white prisoners occupied the from seats.
Nevertheless, civil rights movements which were upcoming during the same era influenced the prisoners to contest gains racial discrimination which was taking place. Consequently, there was lot of violence in prison because the white prisoners and administrators were resisting any change.
On the other hand, black prisoners were not ready to take anything less than equal rights and abolishment of discrimination (Acoli par. 8). Although there was some improvement, prison racism was not abolished completely since the same problem is still present even in the twenty first century.
The Nature and the Effects of Prison Racism United States has the highest number of people in prison at any given time than any other country in the world. The most amazing issue is the fact that majority are racial minorities.
The problem is evident in the whole process of criminal justice system starting from the arrest up to the sentencing and provision of various services like probation and parole. Of all other Americans who have been sentenced death, forty two percent are African Americans. Similarly, African Americans women are imprisoned in higher rates than the white women, actually four times more. In addition, African Americans receive harsher jail terms compared to their white counterparts Fisher (par. 5)
Budgeting Preparation in Economics Sector Research Paper online essay help: online essay help
Budgeting entails preparation for the achievement of specific targets and missions within a given duration by calculating the necessary funds together with the funds at hand. The budget is meant for use by the government in putting its policies to work by regulating the money spent by various agencies in the government (Robert
A Comparative and Contrast analysis of Everyman and The Wanderer Essay online essay help
Everyman is an old English morality play with an anonymous writer. The play presents the idea of salvation in the Christian context. It is believed that the author of the play wrote it during the late fifteenth century (Frohman, 10; Flesch, 179). The play shows Everyman traveling on a long journey to account his life to God.
The teaching the play presents is that God records Everyman’s character and actions, which represents the actions and characters of an ordinary person, after death as in a book. On the other hand, The Wanderer presents the case of a man who is in exile and roaming the earth (Channing, 1). This man laments for the loss of his family members, friends and he hates being away from his kind king.
In the middle of disillusionment and despair, The Wanderer remembers that it is good to have faith in God in order to be saved. According to The Wanderer, salvation is based on faith in Christ rather than in a man’s own deeds. The Wanderer and Everyman have both similar and contrasting ideas.
The author of Everyman used allegorical characters to present his message (Cummings, Para. 6). These characters include Death, Everyman, God, Fellowship, Goods, Good Deeds, Knowledge, Strength, Five Wits, among others. The first scene of the play shows God looking at Everyman from heaven.
He sees that Everyman loves the goods and possessions of this earth and has forgotten him. Everyman is young, rich and preoccupied with worldly things. He not only forsaken God, but also despises his fellow human beings who are poor. God therefore becomes angry with Everyman and send his servant Death to take a message to Everyman that he has to embark on a long journey (Effinger, para.1).
Everyman is therefore required to put himself in order and be ready for the journey because Death reminds him that there is no returning from that journey. Because of his love of the world, Everyman tries to bribe Death to leave him to continue enjoying his life on earth. However, Death refuses. Everyman tries to ask his Friends, Fellowship and Kinsmen to accompany him for the journey but they let him down.
After prayers and penance, his friend Good Deeds, whom he had forgotten for a long time, gets enough energy to accompany him and assist him in presenting his case before God. All the other friends who had promised to go with Everyman like Strength, Discretion, Beauty and Knowledge leave Everyman as he enters the grave.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The wanderer is an old English poem that presents an old warrior who roams the world in search of accommodation and help (Gerould, 63). The poem is a monologue where the aging warrior presents his grievances. The unknown author gives the introduction and conclusion of the poem.
The wanderer is sorrowful for being in exile (Alexander, 63). He laments for losing his family members, friends, and his home and remembers his caring king. Through his dreams, the Wanderer sees himself in the company of his friends and kinsmen and sees himself embracing his king.
He wakes up from his sleep to find himself in his exile, faced with gray winter, snowfall and hailstorms (“The Wanderer Summary”, Para. 1). Further, on the Wanderer’s second monologue, he considers giving up self-control since he considers them similar to ways of meeting diversity. The wanderer also sees many negative things and destruction happening in many places as he travels than in his own society.
This poem also links the values of pagans and Christians in an unfair combination. The author’s voice in the poem refers to God and shows the importance of having virtues like faith, an issue that the wanderer seems to have forgotten. The Wanderer through his lamenting, however, gives an indication of upholding values like loyalty, generosity, courage and strength. The wanderer appears resigned in life. The wanderer appears resigned in life (“The Wanderer poem,” para. 3).
However, at the culmination of the poem he brightly illustrates his lack of companionship and anticipates for the previous days in which life was more interesting. He finally concedes to his faith in God.
There are several themes and characters presented in both Everyman and The Wanderer. Some of these point towards similar ideas while others are contrasting. In both episodes, faith in God is presented and God is shown and acknowledged as the sole controller of the universe.
Men are seen to forget God and concentrate more on the cares and concerns of earthly issues and only come to remember God when they are in problems. Everyman forsakes God and loves earthly goods and riches than God. This is why he is not ready to leave his earthly possessions and even offers to bribe Death to leave him stay on Earth.
We will write a custom Essay on A Comparative and Contrast analysis of Everyman and The Wanderer specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Everyman remembers his good deeds when he finds that no one stands with him. We are also informed that he remembered the days he used to serve his God. The Wanderer also is too much worried of his fate on earth and forgets his God as he journeys the earth. The wonderer comes to remember his God when he is aging and admonishes us to put faith in God.
They also agree that man needs some virtues while travelling through this world. They agree that man often needs to put his relationship right with God. He needs generosity, strength, good deeds and courage. For Everyman, he needed Good Deeds to present his case before God when he reached heaven. He also needed Strength, Beauty and Five Senses to go with him in the journey.
The wanderer also admonishes us that we need strength, courage, generosity, loyalty and faith in God throughout our journey on Earth. These works use allegorical characters to present their message. While Everyman uses allegorical characters such as Goods, Good Deeds, fellowship, Five Senses among others (Cummings, Para. 6; Lawrence and Reich, 204), The Wanderer uses an allegorical character of “the life of a man in the image of a sea-journey” (Gordon, para. 1).
There are a number of differences that can be identified from the two literature materials. Everyman is a play while The wanderer is a poem. Everyman uses many allegorical characters to present the message while the Wanderer uses one soliloquy character to present the message. The narrator in The Wanderer makes the introduction and conclusion. Everyman believes that good deeds are necessary to save a person.
This is why he goes for repentance and penance to give Good Deeds strength to accompany him in his journey. The Wanderer on the other hand believes in salvation by faith. He believes that faith in God is enough to save a person without deeds. Thus, The Wanderer presents the theme of salvation by faith in Jesus Christ, while Everyman presents the theme of salvation by works.
In conclusion, the two literature materials present the themes of Christianity, isolation and betrayal by the trusted friends (Marin, Para.2; Marsden, 327; Treharne, 42). They use characters that are in a journey on earth. The Wanderer is in exile while Everyman is traveling to God. Even though these materials present similar themes and messages, they also conflict in some ideas. Conspicuous in the texts is the difference in the means by which people gain salvation.
While Everyman believes it is by works, The Wanderer believes it is by faith in Christ. Everyman and The Wanderer reflect the life of ordinary men on earth and their Christian walk. Everyman shows the evils people do against their fellow human beings and against God. The two stories reflect the life on an ordinary person on earth and advices people to live a life they know they will give an account of at last.
Works Cited Alexander, Michael. The earliest English poems. London : Penguin, 1991. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on A Comparative and Contrast analysis of Everyman and The Wanderer by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Channing, William E. The wanderer: a colloquial poem. Boston : J. R. Osgood and Co., 1871. Print.
Cummings, Michael J. “Everyman: A morality Play Written in the Late 1400’s by Unknown author.” Study guides. Web.
Effinger, Sandra. “The Summoning of Everyman: A Student Guide.” MsEffie. Web.
Flesch, William. The Facts on File companion to British poetry 19th century. New York: Facts on File, 2010. Print.
Frohman, Charles. Everyman : being a moralle playe of the XV centurie. Whitefish, Mont.: Kessinger, 1903. Print.
Gerould, Gordon H. Old English and medieval literature. Freeport, NY: Books for Libr. Press, 1970. Print.
Gordon, I. L. “Traditional themes in The Wanderer and the Seafer.” Justor. Web.
Lawrence, Cunningham, and Reicg, John J. Culture and Values: a survey of the humanities. Boston, M.A.: Wadsworth Pub. 2005. Print.
Marin, Lucian E. “The poem the Wanderer.” The Wanderer. Web.
Marsden, Richard. The Cambridge Old English reader. Cambridge: Cambridge University press, 2004. Print.
“The Wanderer Poem.” World Lingo. Web.
“The wanderer summary.” The Wanderer (Magill Book Reviews). 2010. Web.
Treharne, Elaine M. Old and Middle English c.890-c.1400: an anthology. Malden, Mass: Wiley Blsackwell, 2004. Print.
Concept of Bioregionalism in Environmental Ecosystems Essay college essay help: college essay help
Table of Contents The Philosophy
How does it work?
Is it feasible?
Bioregionalism is the phenomenon of understanding the process of environmental ecosystems in a way justifiable to the human cultures. It is a way of merging various human territories into what the universal territory holds in the form of global environment, which is only possible through human motivated effort towards environmental problem solving.
Environmental ecology has long before the Second World War has left reasons for us to manipulate the causes to study this subject. However, it occurred just after the anti-war peace movements of the post world war that the bioregional activists started realizing the hazards in the form of environmental crises caused by wars, human overpopulation, air and chemical pollution, and overconsumption.
The primary cause of our current environmental woes rests with the negation of bioregional process that we often do by not responding to the political and environment power relations of global economy. Bioregionalism requires a complete grasp of local and global integration of economic resources that in this era of capitalism should not have been ‘limited’.
By limited, I mean reserved talks that in this globalized era must not be encouraged. Unfortunately globalization does not go hand in hand with bioregionalism. Both are inversely proportional to each other’s needs and contribute to each other’s development respectively. For example, cheaper energy is not permitted by globalization and expensive energy is not allowed in bioregionalism.
So, we must remain open in our bioregional expressions to break the ice regarding what globalization has to offer us in context with policies and measures. What we are in our closed bioregions is not what today’s globalized era wants from us. In this manner we are isolated within what ecology does not want us to reckon. Isolated in terms of not integrating our ecological affiliations with that of our culture, or when we consider our ecosystem to be a separate entity, though it is not.
Our ecosystem is a part to be stemmed out of our larger landscape that means environmental activities like watershed, rainfalls, culture that makes us close to the nature, local community knowledge, environmental history, and climatic concerns. Environmental activities are not understood by us the way they are supposed to have been analyzed. This ignorant attitude has only left us in dark where habitat destruction is obvious in the longer run.
Thus, in order to preserve our environment and ecological stability, it is necessary to focus on the hazards that are caused by the “commercial, industrial and agricultural globalized developments, natural resource extraction, tourism and war, because all these initiate a new chain of ecological and cultural disruptions” (Mcginnis, 1999, p. 122).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In my opinion, the most significant aspect to analyze the threat of bioregionalism goes against the globalization phenomenon. If we talk about better health, we are not talking about the opportunities which in this case global health specialists are capitalizing on. Similarly, the more pollution factor, the least will be the cleanliness benefitting the global health trends. The more industrialization of the weapons of mass destruction, the more would be the production, the greater destruction caused by the warfare.
The concern arises why human warfare in this modernized age is a concern? Just because of the fact that we have chosen globalization over bioregionalism. We have put an end to all our communication modes along with the patience to bear aside. Since there is no communication understanding, we are more prompted to adopt the warring than to give in any room for peace.
Thus, weapons of mass destruction not only destroy humanity in the wake of warfare, but also disrupt our ecosystem. This is highlighted by many theories of globalization that asserts that our environmental problems possessing able solutions are not limited to overflow through national boundaries and borders.
Communication barrier with no understanding on either side is a common drawback that goes against bioregionalism. This applies to global climatic change, which is already unable to cooperate with our increased globalization trends, thus, leaving room for the water, air and environmental pollution.
The Philosophy The main philosophy behind bioregional assumption is the geographical characteristic that asks explanation of physiographic ‘boundaries.’ Unlike humanly sketched political borders, it is difficult to define a hierarchical legitimacy in halting the spread of environmental causes and issues. For example, pollution is difficult to be dealt with as long as there is human existence. Globalization extension beyond borders has given rise to the economic and political relationships with that of technological cause.
This on one hand has produced tremendous capitalist results, while on the other it is making global world a future plight for us, where everything on earth will be materialized. What would be left with us will be the destruction in the wake of greenhouse effect, climatic severity in the form of increased volcanic disruptions, and tsunamis.
What the globalized trend has made us today is not the answer to the problems of bioregionalism. Instead, globalization itself has raised the concerns that make environmental NGOs to rake over the environmental crises. Thus, it is not wise to turn a blind eye to “the physical realities of environmental, resource, and biodiversity issues by not considering natural divisions within physiographic regions” (Thayer, 2003, p. 19).
We will write a custom Essay on Concept of Bioregionalism in Environmental Ecosystems specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Globalization has given rise to environmental awareness, leading to think about the consequences of the international trade and environmental conservation. The role of transportation in the environmental crises management has helped us in thinking about the policies that govern ports.
Similarly, port areas are considered to be the “functional organization of activities and operations that are designed specifically to attain high standards of environmental protection and the goal of sustainable development” (Pinder
Great Smoky Mountains National Park Term Paper best college essay help
Introduction Great Smoky Mountains National Park is a US national park and a UNESCO world heritage site and covers the ridgeline of the Great Smoky Mountains and part of Blue Ridge Mountains (National Park Service US Department of the Interior 1). It is the most visited park and one of the largest protected areas in the US (Walls 7).
It covers about 2108 km2 and forms part of the larger Appalachian Mountain Chain (Saferstein1). Unlike other national parks within the US, the Great Smoky National Park does not charge any entry fee (Walls 7).
History of the Park The region covered by the park was once the home of Cherokee Indians (Himiak 11). However, President Andrew Jackson signed the Indian Removal Act in 1830 which resulted in the eviction of the Indian tribes from the region (National Park Service US Department of the Interior 1).
The white settlers later on built a rail line passing through the region but then started cutting and hauling of the trees from the forest. This led to the destruction of the forest and its natural beauty until the locals and the visitors saw the need to preserve the forest.
They then (along with the US government) raised some money to establish the park since the US National Park Service did not have enough finances to establish the park on its own (Campbell 3). Individual citizens from North Carolina and Tennessee came in to help assemble the land for the establishment of the park.
Those who still lived in the park, mainly the Cherokee Indians, miners and loggers, were forced out of the park and all the operations which contributed to the destruction of the forest were abolished (Saferstein 56). The park was officially instituted in June, 1934 by the US Congress and dedicated in 1940 by President Franklin Roosevelt (Himiak 22).
The Works Progress Administration, the Civilian Conservation Corps and other federal organizations developed the infrastructure in the park and around Smoky Mountains during the Great Depression (National Park Service US Department of the Interior 1).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In 1976, the park became an International Biosphere Reserve and in 1983, it was certified by UNESCO World Heritage Site. In 1988, the park was expanded to become part of the Southern Appalachian Biosphere Reserve (National Park Service US Department of the Interior 1).
Attractions and Uniqueness of the Park According to the US National Parks (para. 1), the park is renowned for its diversity in plant and animal species. For example, the national park has over 10,000 different plant and animal species, its scenic ancient mountains, the depth of its wilderness sanctuary, and the remnants of the Southern Appalachian Mountain culture, among others. It has ridges of endless forest covering the border between North Carolina and Tennessee.
The park has one of the largest temperate, deciduous and old growth forest blocks which date as far back as during the time of the European settlement in the region. The trees species alone are over a hundred. The animal species include over 66 mammal species, over 43 amphibian species, over200 species of birds, over 39 species of reptiles and more than species of 50 species of fish. It is also important to note that the park has over 1,800 black bear (National Park Service US Department of the Interior 9).
The park also has a number of historical sites, such as the Cades Cove, Cataloochee, Mingus Mill and Mountain Museums. These historic sites have many preserved historic buildings such as the log cabins, churches and barns which provide an outdoor historic gallery. The Great Smoky Mountains National Park has some high altitude mountains like Mount LeConte which is very popular with hikers. The park has some of the most spectacular waterfalls like Laurel, Abrams, Whank, Grotto and Hen Wallow Falls.
It has other beautiful sceneries which include Fontana Dam situated between Rocky Mountains, the Deep Creek rivers and waterfalls, the Balsam Mountain which offers a stunning mountain view for summer wildflowers, the Roaring Rock which offers a glimpse of rushing Mountain Rivers and old-growth forest and the New Found Gap among many other beautiful types of scenery.
Around the park, there is the Andrew Johnson Historic site which was established in honor of the United States’ 17th president. It includes the late president’s home where he resided before and after his presidency.
There is also the Big South Fork National River and Recreation Area covering about 125,000 acres around Cumberland River and its tributaries (Kephart 4). This region has many natural and historic features which include beautiful sandstone bluffs and scenic gorges. In the nearby North Carolina, there are the Pisgah and Nantahala Forests which offer rich wildlife, spectacular waterfalls and areas for camping.
We will write a custom Term Paper on Great Smoky Mountains National Park specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Activities The park offers a wide range of activities which include wildlife viewing, hiking, fishing, camping, horseback riding, boat riding among other activities. Hiking is the most popular activity in the park and the park provides many routes for hiking on the elevations of the mountains (Public Service Ads 1). Fishing is the second most popular activity in the park done in the waters within the park. Fontana Dam provides cool waters for boat riding and fishing in the park.
Transportation The main entrances to the park are located are on the New Gap Road, US Highway 441. From the south, the park can be reached through Sevierville and then through Pigeon Forge using US-441 and finally to the park using the Gatlinburg entrance. From the north it can be reached through the interstate highway, through to Maryville and then Townsend and finally to the park using the Townsend entrance. Cherokee entrance can be reached through US-19 and then through Maggie Valley road to the park.
There are also two airports around the park: McGhee-Tyson Park in Tennessee which is a few kilometers from the Gatlinburg entrance and Asheville Regional Airport in North Carolina which is about 60 miles away from Cherokee entrance to the park. Although there is no public transport to the park, there are private commercial bus services and trolley services such as Cherokee Transit, connecting the park to the main cities around the region.
Inside the park, there are also roads that lead to the various sites and sceneries such as Ramsey Prong Road, Capes Code Loop Road, Foothills Parkway and many others.
Infrastructure and Concessions The park has many well-maintained roads connecting it to the outside regions and within it for exploring the park. The park is also connecting to the outside world through the two airports in the regions around it. It has lodges, motels and restaurants as well as camp sites for tourists. It provides recreational vehicle camping and background camping (Walls 7). Some of the lodges in the park include the Mt. LeConte Shelter, Laurel Gap Shelter and Kephart Shelter (Public Service Ads 1).
The Park’s Visitors The park is the most visited national park in the US and records over nine million visitors annually (National Park Service US Department of the Interior, 1).
It experienced the highest visit among the US national parks in 2007 with a record of 9.4 million visitors which was more than double that of Grand Canyon National Park which was the second most visited (Walls 5). Most of its visitors come from the surrounding regions and towns which include Gatlinburg, North Carolina, Tennessee, Cherokee, Townsend, Pigeon Forge, and Bryson City among many other areas.
The most visited centers in the park are and Oconaluftee Visitors’ Center and Sugarlands Visitors’ Center. The categories of visitors recorded in the park include both those who go purely for recreation and those who go for other purposes such as studies and scientific research.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Great Smoky Mountains National Park by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Most of the visitors in the park are hikers who go to hike in the rails and the unpaved roads within the park. It is open to visitors throughout the year, but the most appropriate period to visit the park is during the autumn when the region experiences warm days and cool nights (Public Service Ads 1).
Concerns extraneous to the Park There are several factors that affect the park. Among these include air pollution, urban encroachment, inadequate funding and invasive species among other problems. According to Camille (28), the air quality around the park is affected by pollution from industries and automobiles and mostly from the coal fired power plants which release greenhouse gases into the atmosphere.
The severe air pollution negatively affects the biodiversity in the park (National Parks Conservation Association 1). Air pollution causes diseases in the plants which have killed almost all the chestnut trees and is also threatening future of butternuts and dogwoods as well as beech trees.
Some normative plant species also affect the survival of the native species within the park. Invasive insects also threaten the future of Fraser firs and hemlock trees (Maldona 14). Generally, the invasive species destroy the biodiversity and hence undermining the ecological health of the wildlife in the park.
The park’s efforts to preserve its cultural resources are negatively affected by the underfunding of the park’s management and that of the National Park Service.
Summary The Great Smoky Mountains National Park was established in 1934 by the US Congress to protect the beautiful forest and forest features around Smoky Mountains and since then has achieved greater status including being the International Biosphere Reserve and the Southern Appalachian Biosphere Reserve.
It has over 10,000 wildlife species of both flora and fauna, which includes among others the black bear and the old growth forest. It also boasts of many historic sites as well as beautiful sceneries such as waterfalls and gorges. It serves all the US citizens and entry to the park is free. It is also the most visited park in the US. Infrastructure both inside and outside the park is well maintained and includes the road network, airports, lodges among others.
The Great Smoky Mountains National Park is one of the largest and the most visited in the US. It is therefore important that measures that ensure that the park’s cultural and natural resources are conserved and managed sustainably. More scientific research should be carried out to find out alternative measures for encountering the normative species. This implies that more funding should be made to help support the park’s conservation and preservation programs.
Works Cited Camille, Feanne. Smokies top list of most polluted parks. 2004. Web.
Campbell, Chis. The making of a national park. Knoxville, Tennessee: University of Tennessee Press. 1964 print.
Himiak, Lauren. National and State Parks: Great Smoky Mountains National Park. 2010. Web.
Kephart, Horace. Our Southern Highlanders. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press. 1961 Print.
Maldona, Charles. Great Smoky Mountains National Park: Hazy Future. Metropulse. 2009. New Report Ranks Five Most-Polluted. Web.
National Parks. National Parks Conservation Association. 2004. Web.
National Park Service US Department of the Interior. Great Smoky Mountains. nps.gov. November 2010. Web.
Public Service Ads. Things to do: Smoky Mountains. 2010. Web.
November 2010.US National Parks. Great Smoky Mts. National Park: Tennessee and North Carolina. ParkReservations.com and Yellowstone Net, Bruce Courtley, 2007. 12
Walls, Michael. Parks and Recreationin the United States: The National Park System. Washington, D.C. Resources for the Future. 2009. Print.
Germany; History, Geography, Legal and Politics Essay essay help site:edu
Table of Contents The German Flag
History of Germany
Geography of Germany
Legal framework of Germany
Politics in Germany
The German Flag The German flag has three bands of colors running horizontally across it. The colors which, from top to bottom are black, red and gold are also of equal width. The meaning of these colors has been explained in several theories. To bring the meaning comprehensively closer, the two colors, black and gold are associated with the colors of the coat of arms of the Roman Empire.
The fall of the Roman Empire caused these colors to be used in the Habsburg ruling Dynasty of Austria. They later gained their popularity as the ‘Black and Gold Monarch’ during the period of this ruling dynasty (German Culture 2).
It is worth noting that the three bands of colors in the German flag, that is, black, and red and gold, symbolized the movement which fought to get rid of the conservative European order which had been formed after the fall of Napoleon (German Culture 3). The colors are used symbolically as follows; red refers to the Hanseatic League whereas black and gold here directly indicates Austria.
The colors of this flag have a direct affiliation with liberalization in the history of Germany. This combination of colors of the German flag was directly affected by the Austro-Prussian war in 1866, World War I and World War II, in a series of events.
This includes the replacement of gold with white, the replacement of the entire flag with the swastika flag, the return of the black-red-gold flag by the allied forces, the inclusion of communist emblem, by the German Democratic Republic, to the centre of the flag (a hammer and a pair of compasses inside ears of grain). Thus the stability of the German flag was only experienced after the unification of Germany in 1990 (German Culture 7).
History of Germany Germany has a long history since its formation as a country. His history can not be complete without the mentioning of major European and world wars. The history can be dated back in the year 451, when Germany fought together with the Huns in the fields of Gaul against the Roman Empire (Pinnow 10).
Germany in the nineteenth century was characterized by shorter wars. This is quite different with the seven year war of the 18th century because there was a seven week war in the nineteenth century which was called the Franco-Prussian war.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Germany experienced rapid victory in the seven weeks war. The history of modern Germany was shaped in the 20th century. This was the period when Germany was rising exponentially as an economic powerhouse. This was the period of the demise of Weimer Republic and the rising into power of Hitler.
Germany played a major role in the genesis of both the first and the second world wars. After the defeat of Germany in the Second World War, it was divided into Western Germany and the Eastern Germany by the iron curtain. This division was caused by the cold war between the two superpowers that had been drawn into the European war which was caused by German war campaigns.
During this period, the archaic sociopolitical structure combined with a rapid modernizing economy was of much magnitude. It was the magnitude of this combination which resulted in the unleashing of domestic and international conflicts because this magnitude was too much for Germany to bear. Thus the history of Germany cannot be comprehensively covered without the inclusion of the international community (Fulbrook 7).
Geography of Germany Germany is a country in Western Europe bordered by the Baltic to the north, the Rhine to the west, and the Alps to the south. The east of Germany has no natural borders and this has caused a lot of problems in the history of Europe (History World 1). However, according to political boundaries, Germany is bordered by France, the Netherlands and Belgium to the West, Poland and the Czech Republic to the East, Austria and Switzerland to the South and the Baltic, Denmark and the North Sea to the North (Rosenberg 1).
The country covers a total area of 357,021 square kilometers with land covering a total 349,223 square kilometers while the remaining part is covered by water. The climate of Germany is classified under temperate and marine types of climate. Temperatures are usually cool and the skies cloudy.
The country experiences seasons of wet winters alternated by summers and occasional Warm Mountain wind (Rosenberg 12). German’s terrain consists of lowlands in the north and the uplands at the central regions of the country. The Bavarian Alps are also present in the Southern parts of the country.
The country is well endowed with natural resources which include fuel resources, metallic minerals, nonmetallic minerals and forests. Natural fuels include natural gas, coal and lignite. The metallic minerals are iron ore, copper, nickel and uranium while the nonmetallic minerals include salt and potash. In addition to this, there is also plenty of arable land. The forests provide wood for the timber industry. The strategic location of Germany creates a critical factor in trade and transport activities.
We will write a custom Essay on Germany; History, Geography, Legal and Politics specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Legal framework of Germany Germany is governed by a constitution which was implemented in 1949 and became operational to the united Germany in the year 1990. The president of federal Germany is the head of state. However, the head of state does not have much influence on governance. He is elected for a five year term by representatives called the Bundestag and a number of people who are chosen to represent the parliament. The head of Government is called the Chancellor and is chosen for a four year period by a majority vote from the Bundestag.
The Federal Germany is divided into 16 states called Lander. Each of the state has its own government and is governed by its own legislative and constitutional frameworks. The governments can pass laws affecting their Landers except laws concerned with national security, international and financial policies which are the business of the federal government.
Germany is a federal state which means that the legislature is found in both the state and the federal levels. The German constitution offers certain provisions to the citizens, which include protecting the rights of the citizens like human dignity, rights of liberty, and general personality rights among many others. Employment rights which include respect to workers and other labor laws are also incorporated in the German constitution.
Other constitutional legislatures which the German citizen enjoys include the right to informational self determination. Civil law, criminal law, data protection law is also found in this constitution. The parliament is responsible for enacting these laws which are incorporated into the constitution (233).
Politics in Germany There are 16 federal states in the Federal Republic of Germany. The federal chancellor is called the Bundeskanzler who is the head of the executive arm of the German government. The Bundeskanzler is elected by German’s parliament which is called the Bundestag. This classifies Germany as a parliamentary system of Government just like Great Britain.
The Bundeskanzler can not be removed from office until the Bundestag agrees on a favorable candidate to succeed him. The Bundeskanzler has always been the leader of the party which has a majority in the parliament. The chancellor appoints the vice-chancellor, also a cabinet official who couples up to become also a foreign minister. However, since there has always been a coalition government, the vice chancellor comes from the smaller party.
The German’s federal assembly is called the Bundestang. It is elected for a period of 4 years which serve as a one term period. The number of representatives is twice that of the number of electoral districts in the country. The constitution allows for a party to have a minimum of 5% of the vote for it to be represented in the parliament. An alternative would be for the party to have at least three directly elected deputies.
At the federal level, we have the Bundesrat, which is the Federal Council (Fact Index 11). It represents the state governments at the federal level and comprises of sixty nine members. The members are also delegates of the sixteen states. In addition the 69 members may also form part of the chancellor’s cabinet (Politics of Germany 12).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Germany; History, Geography, Legal and Politics by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The current government of the Federal Republic of Germany is built by coalition of two parties.
Works Cited Fact Index. Politics of Germany. Not dated. Web.
Fulbrook, Mary. Ed 2, History of Germany, 1918-2000: the Divided Nation. Malden: Blackwell Publishing, 2002.
German Culture. German Flag. 2009. Web.
History world. History of Germany. Not dated. Web.
Pinnow, Hermann. History of Germany: people and state through a thousand years. Manchester: Ayer Publishing, 1970.
Rosenberg, Matt. German Geography. 2010. Web.
Poverty in the Bronx: Negative Effects of Poverty Essay writing essay help: writing essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Decay of South Bronx
Negative Effects of poverty in South Bronx
Efforts to restore the ruined South Bronx
Introduction South Bronx is found among the administrative divisions New York City, the richest city in the world. There is a region in New York called Southern Bronx, which is different from South Bronx. South Bronx is strictly the southwestern part of the borough of Bronx and Bronx is the only borough in New York city in the mainland.
Though New York is the richest city in the world, we find ten of the poorest congregational districts here, among them, South Bronx. It borders Manhattan to the east, the richest congregational district in North America. South Bronx is the most famous slum in the nation due to its past since it was named, a city without slums (Jonnes, 2002. Rooney, 1995).
Bronx was not always the poorest city in the American nation. In 1930’s, it was a city without slums, it had the lowest rate of unemployment among the five administrative districts of New York and during these days, it was among the first and few regions in New York that undertook privately financed residential construction.
Contrary to its beginning, the face of Bronx today is very different. By around 1970, its beautiful developing face had already vanished and its new face was in ruins characterized by part cleared rubble, half-collapsed buildings, and some completely burnt-out buildings. Wild dogs could be seen roaming through the streets, in and out of ruins and through garbage filled sidewalks, and so much crime among men. South Bronx is a city where extreme violence is common (Jonnes, 2002. Rooney, 1995, pg 5).
Decay of South Bronx South Bronx became the symbol of international decay in the 1960’s and many people who knew the place have no hope of its restoration. It turned from being a comfortable neighborhood for middle class and blue-collar workers to a literally dangerous place to live. The major cause of this decay resulted from world war two (Silverman, 2004, pg 94).
The fall of South Bronx started quietly and it began by collapse of law and order. As Dublin coat of arms suggests, ‘By the Obedience of the People is the Happiness of the City Ensured’, this is fact that did not take root in South Bronx.
McCloskey’s Hell’s Kitchen harbored very delinquent young males and though they lived in institutions that were strongly in control, these young men always prevailed over them. Their ill-mannered conduct continued taking root and with time, crime became prevalent in this region. By mid 1950’s drug abuse was an epidemic, which was out of control since it caught the government unawares thus it was beyond control.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There was no institution in South Bronx that was able to convince these young culprits that drug taking was wrong or even enact laws that would term drug taking a punishable crime. However, with the help of the stern Jansenist church, the family was the only institution that put effort to curb this crime since the church never tolerated any form of delinquent conduct (Jonnes, 2002).
As the epidemic of drug use prevailed, the society that was long before independent started depending on welfare. In the beginning, New York creation of welfare population was just a generous act but by 1970, there was a welfare explosion. South Bronx community had already destabilized and more than half of the families in the society were depending on welfare.
Badly behaved children, men drifting away from their responsibilities, and destruction of the residential premises and other buildings by fire, characterized the societal crisis. This entire crisis was a result of government’s irresponsibility (Jonnes, 2002).
Another factor that contributed to the decay of South Bronx leading to its current poverty state was World War II. When America declared war, more than two hundred thousand men from south Bronx community left their homes and went for battle. It was a very patriotic community devoted everything to the success of its country.
Most of the streets were filled with women and the people left behind were not energetic enough to improve the face of Bronx. The battle lasted several years and this marked a major transformation of this community. There were so much labor shortages in the industries whose main objective was to accelerate mechanization of Agriculture in America, which lead to need for immigration in order to supplement the workforce (Jonnes, 2002. Rooney, 1995, pg 31).
The American government contributed a great deal to the current poverty situation in south Bronx. At one point, it introduced policies on rental costs and did not support the landlords to overcome the deteriorating income. The property owners started withdrawing while the tenants started migrating to better places.
The factories that used to provide job to the community started suffering from acute labor shortages. The abandoned houses became harboring blocks for gangsters and drug dealers. The government also failed to control the fires that were prevalent due to poor electrification and carelessness, which consumed thousands of buildings and property.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Poverty in the Bronx: Negative Effects of Poverty Essay specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Negative Effects of poverty in South Bronx In social development, housing is ever a dependent factor especially on the social status of the community. Growth and development of the housing sector is greatly influenced by availability of jobs, stability in the family set up and crime control. When these factors are responding positively, creation of housing is made easier.
The case of South Bronx in this field is a bit wanting. There is a lot of crime, instability in the family set up since men have drifted away from their responsibilities and unemployment is prevalent leading to extreme poverty. The result of this is drag in creation of housing and decay of the housing developments that took place in 1930’s. Rental housing became unprofitable as the community continued deteriorating thus investors withdrew to better means of investment (Jonnes, 2002).
Poverty in south Bronx has always had a close relationship with drug abuse and crime. There have been several reported cases of molestation of female teacher by unknown intruders in the classes, and this is all due to poverty related issues. For instance, there was a case where a teacher’s sweater put in fire while still on her body.
Another female teacher claimed that her idealism was badly battered and she was planning to leave the school to avoid being hurt. The school was generally indiscipline with kids loitering around with bottles of wine and several cases of fires set by students (Rooney, 1995).
Sexually transmitted diseases especially AIDS have been a very common phenomena in this region. Twenty percent of the sexually active men are infected and statistics show that AIDS has been the leading cause of deaths of young women in south Bronx. 5% of children born in the regional hospitals are infected with AIDS while others have traces of drugs in their blood (Rooney, 1995, Sam and Lake, 2010).
Drug trafficking and drug abuse has been so prevalent in this region. Young teenagers are the most affected since their jail sentences on these cases are not as hard as those inflicted on older culprits who get mandatory jail sentences.
Drug abuse and trafficking hit south Bronx unawares in 1950’s and it took roots since the government and the institutions concerned were reluctant on the issue and there was no proper control when the issue arose. The leading drug trafficked is crack cocaine due to its high pay. It is projected that a teen can make $3000 in a day through this business.
A certain teacher was reported saying that the face of a certain school was teenager loitering in the playground with bottles of wine. Drug abuse is not only a problem to the youngsters but also the older men whereby many men have dropped labour due to drug abuse. Teenagers have also dropped out of school due to issues related to drugs (Sam and Lake, 2010; Rooney, 1995, pg 39).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Poverty in the Bronx: Negative Effects of Poverty Essay by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More South Bronx is the leading district with teen pregnancies in New York. The number of pregnant teens outnumbered that of the rest of New York in 2005.
This scenario results from the prevailing poverty in south Bronx leading to many idle teenager girls with low access of employment and education. The setting of the community does not impose so much stigma to unwanted pregnancies among teens thus they end up not being very keen to use birth control measures. Abortion cases are also very common among teens since most of these pregnancies are accidental (Trapasso, 2008).
Efforts to restore the ruined South Bronx Charlotte Street in the centre of the borough of Bronx marks as the sample of the poverty prevailing in south Bronx. It was the worst hit region and its features have brought so much confusion to the American government on what to do in order to solve this shame to America. In the effort to restore the region, two presidents of America have visited Charlotte and their objective is to mobilize resources of the US and rehabilitate the region to start a new face of the region (Rooney, 1995).
The Bronx borough has put much of its attention to south Bronx. Since 1980’s, the region has been going through urban renewal whereby old buildings have been rehabilitated and new residential houses have been built. Bronx has channeled half of its housing projects towards Bronx in order to restore the once ‘city without a slum (Sam and Lake, 2010. Purdy, 1994).
In 1935, there was formed an organization known as Aid to Dependent Children which was later changed to Aid to Families with independent children. This organization was solely meant to provide cash assistance to families without supporting fathers probably deceased, absent or unable to work. This was the beginning of war to poverty, which facilitated access to health care, and reduction of poverty, hunger and malnutrition (Brady, 2008).
Conclusion The poverty condition in south Bronx has always been controversial due to the nature of the region in the early 20th century. It started as one of the fastest growing borough in New York and its residents mainly composed of the working class. South Bronx started decaying in mid 20th century whereby it lost a large number of its population, housing and even investments. Low class people started residing here and as poverty increased the level of crime.
Poverty in south Bronx has had a negative impact to the society though the government has been putting effort to restore it to its original status. However, it might take a longer time to take South Bronx where it was since it has lost most of the factor that contributed to its well being like good investments.
References Brady, A. J. (2008). A Place at the Table: Justice for the Poor in a Land of Plenty. London: Twenty -Third Publications. Web.
Jonnes, J. (2002). South Bronx rising: the rise, fall, and resurrection of an American city. NY: Fordham University Press. Web.
Puddy, M. (1994). Left to Die, the South Bronx Rises From Decades of Decay. Web.
Rooney, J. (1995). Organizing the South Bronx. Albany, State University of New York Press.
Sam, L. and Lake, J. (2010). Church Planting in the Bronx, New York. Web.
Silverman, R. M. (1994). Community Based Organizations. Michigan, Wayne State University Press. Web.
Trapasso, C. (2008). Bronx teen pregnancy rate soars. Web.
History to the Eighteenth Century Report (Assessment) argumentative essay help
The eighteenth century was one of the epochs of human history that had the greatest revolutionary happenings that transformed the entire world and the way things are handled. It is the period of human existence that experienced the highest number of performers in all areas of academic study, literary art, economic empowerment and philosophical advancement emerge to prominence coming up with some of the greatest concepts and philosophies that have been invaluable to our general understanding of the metaphysical world that we live in now.
This paper is a study of different aspects of the eighteen century revolution and in doing so, it will respond to different questions about various issues that were pertinent during that epoch of human development.
How did the First Scientific Revolution Energize economics and society? Scientific Revolution was a period in man’s revolutionary history when there was a profuse arising of new ideas and concepts in all the scientific fields such as astronomy, physics, human anatomy, biology, chemist among other sciences which abolished most of the unauthenticated concepts and doctrines that had been in operation from the times of the Ancient Greece to the Middle Ages.
This revolution saw to fruition concepts that had been suppressed by religious groups which held promising results for the new Science Age that was now dawning in. It was the base of what is now called Modern Science where superstition and religious dogmas were replaced with scientific reason and knowledge that would explain every single happening on the basis of empirical evidence supporting such notions.
The accompanying new concepts in physics, biology, astronomy and metaphysical world soon became central in the understanding of universal social concerns and economic trends of the time. Studies were developed steered towards attempting to unite the world into a global market that would transact business with the main reason being to edify human life and alleviate poverty.
These concepts were adopted by scientists who were involved in social sciences and economics to transform the period’s economic trends in investment and way of conducting businesses thereby beginning the concept of universal congruence in economic undertakings. From this, business transactions were encouraged to be geared towards profiting the society in which they thrive and thus societal development was also a key area that was developed in this period.
How did Absolutism assert itself in Europe? Absolutism was a concept that was fronted by H. G. F. W. Hegel as a philosophical account of how understanding of the being can be attained as a whole. According to Hegel, for the subject that is thinking (that is the human) to be able to understand the object (that is the world in which he lives), the subject has to have some sort of identity of being and thought. This was a fascinating philosophical idea that received a lot of attention in the time setting stage for the development of modern philosophy of absolutism in many other respects.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Absolutism within the first decade of its invention as a philosophical train of thought, it attracted a lot attention among the contemporaries and therefore was taken up by storm by many philosophers of the time. The concept entered Europe from Germany, US and Britain where it had first been accepted.
It was out of the influence of such philosophers like Meister Eckhart that the concept entered Europe. Within the first two decades of its inception in Europe, Absolutism greatly became the center-stage concept that was referred to in almost every philosophical argument. This made its assertion easy and appropriate since it would explain many humanistic concerns such as religion, government systems and human activism.
How did Enlightenment Thinkers conceive of Improvements of Human society? Enlightenment thinkers were a group of scientists and reformists who believed in science and acquisition of knowledge as the way to respond to all the challenges facing humanity.
They spent a lot of time devising philosophies and concepts that would explain all human experiences with empirical evidence to clearly outline the details of every explanation in accordance to scientific research methodology. These thinkers therefore perceived the society as being capable of standing on itself and creating responses to solve any difficult it faced.
Improvements in the human society were thought to be driven by personal ambition and objective of equality among all people as well as creating avenues through which the society would be taught to attain education. In a snapshot, these improvements were thought to be realized through education and brotherhood which was a concept that favoured equity and equitable distribution of resources and opportunities to all people in the society.
How did Democratic forms of Government spread in the West? The spread of democratic forms of government into the West was as a result of the oppression that had been seen during the world wars which had painted dictatorial leaderships as tyrannical and oppressive.
Human rights activism albeit in its infant stage, had began coming up with the creation of world organizations that fronted for equality and these compelled government leaders to be accountable to the citizenry to whom they (government officials) were responsible to.
We will write a custom Assessment on History to the Eighteenth Century specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Democratic form of government was a concept that proved very promising as it required that political leaders be led by ideologies which they would sell to the citizenry and competitively seek for votes by convincing the voters of what their parties would do to improve the living standards of the citizens.
Democratic form of government also refuted harshly tyrannical leaderships and oppression as it gave the populace the express right to elect public servants into offices and remove them from these offices when voting time came again. This created responsibility for these leaders thereby making them more accountable to the citizenry. This is how democratic form of government spread in the West.
Bibliography Chambers, Mortimer, Barbara Hanawalt, Theodore Rabb, Isser Woloch, Raymond Grew and Lisa Tiersten. The Western Experience, Volume 1, with Primary Source Investigator and PowerWeb. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2006.
Jürgen, Habermas. The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989.
Toby, Huff. The Rise of Early Modern Science: Islam, China and the West. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003.
Footnotes Mortimer Chambers, Barbara Hanawalt, Theodore Rabb, Isser Woloch, Raymond Grew and Lisa Tiersten, The Western Experience, Volume 1, with Primary Source Investigator and PowerWeb (New York: McGraw-Hill, 2006), 124.
Habermas Jürgen, The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989).
Huff Toby, The Rise of Early Modern Science: Islam, China and the West (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003), 54.
Western Experience to the Eighteenth Century Essay best essay help: best essay help
Introduction Cut off from the rest of the globe, with practically no knowledge of their neighborhoods, the goals of most individuals are to spread out their territories ultimately forming an empire and then eventually, overcoming the world. Traditionally, man has always tried to exert influence on fellow men and ever since in the early days the world was ruled through empires and kingdoms which had kings, queens, and emperors.
These kingdoms had great contribution to the present system of ruling as they provided the foundation of how countries or subjects are governed. Among the positive contributions that the early empires made are associated with civilization and other great discoveries. For example, the Roman Empire is associated with the engineering and the invention of cement while the Greeks are associated with democracy, civilization, philosophy, and mathematics.
Discuss the Problem of Empire in the Ancient World The main problems that faced the earliest empires were how governance, avoiding invasions by other stronger and emerging kingdoms. These problems existed due to the fact that rival empires were growing and expanding and risks of traitors within the kingdom were high as well as attacks from rival empires. To rule successfully, the emperors had to cultivate loyalty from their subjects to ensure his citizens could guard and protect the empire.
This called for the emperors to employ different strategies on how to ensure that their subjects maintained loyalty at the same time remaining united for the sake of recognition and the power of the empire. Opposition and internal revolts within the empire was another problem that the early empires faced this made some of the rulers become to harsh to their subjects in order to ensure loyalty was observed.
How Did the First Empires Come About? The first empires are said to have come as a result of civilization, democracy and rule of law. The strong and the influential people in the society became the rulers by associating with people who believed in their views thus creating a following. They ruled these empires through political and social organizations.
Another factor that led to the emergence of the early empires was the invention of gunpowder. Kingdoms attacked and captured rival and empires at will making them part of their own. For example the Ottoman Empire emerged in 1350as a result of use of gun powder and by the early 1500 through the use of artillery, the ottomans had expanded even to Iraq.
Trade was another factor that led to the emergence of the early empires. It is worthy noting that some of the early empires were established within trade routes. Trade centers were established and with time these trade centers became empires.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More What were the strengths and weaknesses of the universal empires of Assyria and Persia? Assyrian Empire Strengths
The major strength of the Assyrian empire has always been attributed to its effective and organized army. They are widely regarded as the first organized and well trained armies in the world history. The army used superior weapons and was also well disciplined. They also had the capability of using different kinds of military tactics which led to the emergence of the empire army as one of the strongest at that time.
One of the major weaknesses that led to the collapse of the empire was the failure by the kingdom to solve the Babylonian problem by ending the continuing conflicts. These conflicts weakened the kingdom to the extent that Babylonians who had been seen as a weak empire were able to conquer Egypt out of the Assyrians hands.
Another factor that could have led to the weakness of the Assyrians was the fact that their rulers were cruel and harsh to their own subjects and this contributed to growing discontentment among the Assyrians.
Persian Empire Strengths
While the Assyrians were known to be cruel and harsh, the Persians were known to institute a rule that was relatively less incriminating and demanding. Thus, their success in ruling the western Asia and ruling them for a period of two centuries was not only due to their outstanding military qualities and man power resources but also due to how they ruled their subjects.
The requirement that all the Persians serve in the army under a form of universal conscription made the Persian army such strong by providing the required manpower in case of war with the other empires.
The Persian Empire was also the largest by geographical content but despite this the empire was centralized and thus chances of divisions were very low. The king was a very important person in keeping the empire together and despite some of the revolts which were experienced, the empire was never threatened. The rivalry between the rulers under the king also ensured the kingdom succeeded as it was difficult for any conspiracy development against the central authority among them.
The stagnation of the Persian army in making technology advancement led to its fall to the Greco-Macedonian army. The death of Alexandria was another source of the empire kingdom. Since after his death the army commanders began dividing the kingdom and thus reliance on manpower could not be relied on during the wars
We will write a custom Essay on Western Experience to the Eighteenth Century specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More How did the Greeks Fail at Empire yet Succeed at Civilization?
The failure of the Greeks at the empire level was mainly due to the conflict among its groups. These groups never cooperated even during the times of conflict and this was a major weakness to the empire. For example the conflict between the Spartans and the Athens was one of the signs that the Greek empire was on the verge of collapsing.
When the Spartans conquered the Athens and started placing their rules on them it resulted in revolts against the Spartans dominance by both the Athens and the Thebes. These conflicts led to the weakening of the kingdom and for example by the end of the conflict between the Spartans and the Athens, there was no group that was strong enough to unite the other members of the empire. Driven by traditional separatism and the desire for own independence, uniting the Greek states was quite a problem.
The enmity which existed could not allow the states to help one another and thus rather than uniting in the verge of a disaster some remained neutral while others hoped for the punishment and destruction of rival groups within the empire leading to the failure of the kingdom. However, the cultures of Greeks evolved to create the most glorious civilization of the ancient world. The kingdom led in art, philosophy, political culture and science.
The phase commonly known as the archaic period saw the advancements in political supposition and the beginning of egalitarianism as well as art and culture. After the fall of Mycenaean civilization, the Greeks formed small tribes of which some were agricultural and others were nomadic. In their bid to succeed and outdo the other groups, these agricultural and nomadic groups developed technologies which increased their productivity and thus the advancements in civilization.
These ethnic groups made one of the supreme Greece (political) accomplishments. The Greek tribes came together and developed strong city states with each state establishing its own culture and political structure and thus while it was hard for them to adopt the culture or the political structure of the other state, they succeeded highly at civilization
How Did The Roman Empire Arise Out Of A Crisis, Create More Crises, And Yet Survive Several Crises? The crisis
The kingdom slipped into anarchy after the assassination of Commodus whose death brought about civil war within the empire. As if that was not enough, his successor was also murdered and the office put on auction by the body guard leading to various people buying the office but none succeeding at ruling the empire and this led to succession battles.
The rulers who followed tried to increase the emperor’s authority and preserve the unity within the empire and this resulted to an army monarch where state intervention was carried out with ruthless severity. The people charged with law enforcement became selfish and those who opposed the system were physically harassed bringing about widened uprisings within the realm.
The cities which were now centers of civil and military administration became parasitic in a way and their contribution to the economy was just the consumption of farm produce. The end users were, nearly without exemption, either armed forces barracks or local majestic (civil) servants. The state was required to drive the economy but no one was willing or cared about the situation. Thus, as the state broke down so did the Roman economy come to a stop and collapsed.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Western Experience to the Eighteenth Century by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The slaves who used to flood the kingdom were nowhere to be seen and thus the availability of the cheap labor was no longer a guarantee. By the start of the 3rd century, depopulation and disturbance caused by attacks, epidemics, and general turn downs in fertility had resulted in a demographic disintegration.
This exposed how the kingdom was ineffective and profligate through its (Latifundia) system. The previous access to labor at no cost had hampered technological advancements in the agriculture sector and with the nonappearance of slaves, the deficiency in manpower led to curtailed productivity in the empire.
The currency devaluation along with increased supply of the valuable metals brought about (rapid) inflation also increasing the cost of basic commodities within the empire. As the political and military organization of the kingdom collapsed, people localized and the empire became of less importance to its citizens.
The Revival of the Empire
The revival of the empire was brought about when the stability was restored; the army was reorganized by building huge reserves for their support, their source of food and income was guaranteed.
After the demise of Severus Alexander, the ruler powers were fundamentally cut due to the suspicions and fears that if too much power was given to the emperors the kingdom could ride back to anarchy as earlier experienced. The roman citizens did not see the royal leaders as gods as they had been seen before and too much power was yielded to the citizens rather than on the rulers.
This new emerging empire at the beginning of the 4th century was not similar to that of the past. Particularly in the western side of the empire, what previously could have been described as the Roman civilization underwent huge changes the empire was now characterized by strong presence of army in every place. While in the past the army was concentrated along the borders with the cities and interior having none of their presence, they were now felt everywhere.
After Diocletian, the old cities were made more secure by surrounding them with huge walls often from the old debris of the old houses and other structures which had been demolished. Coloni and Serfs took the slaves position in a bid to arrest manpower shortage. Though they (serfs and coloni) had freedom, they two groups were supposed to remain in these estates as they were tied by to pay rents and taxes.
What caused the ultimate failure of the western portion of the Roman Empire, and what were its consequences?
Imperial expansion increased the power of military commanders and to them; they viewed this as an opportunity to seize political power from the civil authorities. In return, this resulted in the rulers accumulating enormous wealth brought about through corruption. Aristocracy was also diverted from civic duties and social duties towards pursuit of wealth and sensual gratification.
Growth of slavery propelled by the large number of war captives served in the enlarging farm and estates. The rich grabbed the land which belonged to the poor peasants and this brought about resentment within the kingdom and it made the peasants become mercenaries since they has nothing to do.
There was also the widening gap between the rich and the poor, the empire neglect of its military and civic duties provided opportunities for ambitious army generals to enlist for support from fellow soldiers and the discontented masses and this was translated to a cycle of factionalism and civic strife which led to military dictatorships.
At its last stage the western empire found had become impoverished, depopulated, and stripped off its territories by the encompassing barbarians whose military skills and dynamism were superior to Romans artillery.
We can summarize that the fall of the Roman Empire took a few centuries due to the slow disappearance of liberty and the decline of private and public confidence on the kingdom. The civil wars that brought the kingdom down were as a result of the lost confidence.
“At the same time, the disappearance of liberty further accelerated the decline of virtue itself. Without the risks, responsibilities, and challenges of freedom, public and private virtue gradually withered, facilitating the Empire’s general decline”.
The empires centralization policy and the uniformity impositions which were later followed by elimination of mediating structures between the civilians and the authority also brought the kingdom to a further decline.
The growing appetite of the government for revenues also led to the decline of the kingdom. The various taxes which existed and included levies on land and personal income were another major factor due to the simple fact that the hardest affected were the ordinary and most productive citizens. Eventually, the taxes became so high that in most parts of the empire the farmers abandoned their lands and refused to till them so as to avoid the ever increasing taxes, as the taxes increased so was the bureaucracy level.
This led to low populations as most of the empire citizens avoided giving birth leading even to the emperor allowing the gothic to stay permanently in the kingdom due to the dwindling population. Christianity also led to the decline of the Roman Empire. The Christian teachings contrasted against the Roman society pillars. Since the reason of fighting anymore was not there, they already had a defined end; the question was just when the end would come.
Conclusion From the above study, we can conclude that the end of the early empires was brought about by many factors depending with the situations. For example, the Roman Empire collapsed as a result of bad govern-ship while others collapsed due to internal conflicts whereas the Persian Empire started weakening after the death of Alexandria. Some say history can repeat itself and thus it is advisable to learn from these empires how they rose and collapsed.
Bibliography of notes How to rule their subjects successfully containing any internal revolt that may lead to the destabilization of the empire
Marko, Marelich. “Ancient Greek Civilization in the Fifth Century.” San Francisco, California-USA, 2006. Web.
Edward, Gibbons. The history of the Decline and fall of the Roman Empire. (New York: The Modern Library, 2003 p.104).
Edward, Gibbons. The history of the Decline and fall of the Roman Empire. (New York: The Modern Library, 2003 p. 104).
Bibliography Gibbons. Edward. The history of the Decline and fall of the Roman Empire. New York: The Modern Library, 2003.
Marelich, Marko. “Ancient Greek Civilization in the Fifth Century.” San Francisco, California-USA, 2006. Web.
Footnotes How to rule their subjects successfully containing any internal revolt that may lead to the destabilization of the empire
Marko. Marelich. “Ancient Greek Civilization in the Fifth Century.” San Francisco, California-USA, 2006.
Edward, Gibbons. The history of the Decline and fall of the Roman Empire. (New York: The Modern Library, 2003 p.104).
Edward, Gibbons. The history of the Decline and fall of the Roman Empire. (New York: The Modern Library, 2003 p. 104).
Jazz Bio on Jazz musician Miles Davis Research Paper essay help free: essay help free
Introduction Miles Dewey Davis III is a renowned American musician and composer who was born on 26, 1926 at Alton, Illinois. He died September 28, 1991. He is remembered for his contribution towards the development of Jazz music. He was the son to Doctor Davis, who is credited to have nurtured the talent in his son of playing the guitar. His mother was Cleota Mae (Cook, 2007). This paper analyzes the life of Miles Dewey Davis III.
Music Career His parents realized their son’s talent at the age of 13 where the father bought him a trumpet and enrolled him to music classes conducted by Elwood Buchanan.
At the age of 16, Miles was playing as a professional musician whenever he was out of school. During his final year at high School he was so refined that he was playing as a reliable member of Eddie Randle’s band, the Blue Devils. At the same time Tiny Bradshaw was strongly persuading him to join their band but his mother insisted that he had to finish his secondary school education before joining the band.
In 1944, after his high school education, he traveled to New York where he was to pursue his dream without the influence of his parents; however he had gone to the state to study music at Juilliard School of Music. In the midst of his studies he started playing at Minton’s Playhouse and Monroe’s night clubs. He did not finish his studies at Juilliard but dropped saying that the school offered a lot of classical European and “white” repertoire. He started playing in clubs as a freelance singer (Ward and Burns, 2000).
In 1945, with Herbie Fields’s group, Miles entered into studio to record as a side man. For the next three years, he was looking for a good collaboration to start recording as a leader, however this was hard to come by. He decided to go it alone in 1948 (Cook
Passing through nature into eternity Term Paper online essay help
The themes of death and immortality occupy pivotal roles in many of Emily Dickinson’s major works. For the purposes of this paper, the focus will be on two: Because I Could Not Stop for Death, and I Died for Beauty, but was Scarce.
This paper compares these two poems to the play Hamlet, William Shakespeare’s tragedy. The basis of comparison herein dwells on the conflicting views toward death and immortality espoused by the three works. Dickinson’s poems personify Death as a male, and a gentleman, in her eyes, attractive, cultured, and refined.
Both Because I Could Not Stop for Death, and I Died for Beauty, but was Scarce depict death as a pleasurable state, one to be wished for and sought after. Dickinson’s view of immortality, similarly, envisions a painless Eden, where both time and worldly cares dissolve into peace, conversation, and companionship. There is a cleaving toward death in Dickinson’s poems, and a view of immortality as an infinite gift.
Conversely, in Hamlet, Shakespeare treats the themes of death and immortality in a more conventional manner. The author describes death as the “undiscover’d country,” the unknown, and as a state to be feared and despised (DiYanni, 2007). The main character Hamlet fears death to the point of paralysis.
Shakespeare also personifies Death in Hamlet, however it arrives through the form of Hamlet’s murdered father, who demands revenge, a request that lays waste to Hamlet’s peace of mind and eventually his life. Indeed, Hamlet knows full well the moment the ghost arrives that his life is forfeit. Regicide, the revenge the ghost exacts, will be Hamlet’s doom. Immortality, in Hamlet’s eyes, resembles the “eternal blazon” that his father describes, full of darkness, punishment, fire, and retribution (DiYanni, 2007).
Thus there is a shrinking from death in Hamlet, in utter contrast to Dickinson’s longing for the grave, and a view of immortality as an infinite curse. The reason for this discrepancy, as this essay will prove, lies in religion. Shakespeare’s tragic hero holds a religious view of death and immortality, one which is punishment focused, while Dickinson’s view of death and immortality, utterly devoid of religion, is much more personal and individual.
Let us begin the discussion with the treatment of the theme of death in these three works. Emily Dickinson’s poem Because I Could Not Stop for Death begins with the lines “Because I could not stop for Death – He kindly stopped for me” (DiYanni, 2007).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While this line certainly alludes to the inevitable quality of death, in that it will stop for all of us, whether we have time for it or not, there is something deeper to note in the language itself. To apply the descriptor “kindly,” especially, is noteworthy. This word immediately generates an image of Death in the reader’s mind as first and foremost, a man, and secondly, a gentleman.
Dickinson employs genteel language to describe Death in decidedly non-threatening terms, and firmly locates Death as a common fixture of the social order. There is nothing strange or frightening in his portrayal. In fact, the complete absence of fear in Dickinson’s voice roots her depiction of Death as tender, kind, obliging, neighborly, and quite friendly.
The next line of the poem reads, “The Carriage held but just Ourselves –” (DiYanni, 2007). Again, the calmness of the voice and the soothing quality of the language underscores Dickinson’s view of death as a pleasurable, desirable state. Dickinson also hints at the intimacy that she shares with her traveling companion when she employs the term “just Ourselves,” further emphasizing the closeness of the exchange with the capitalized “Ourselves” (DiYanni, 2007).
Hamlet, by contrast, in his first encounter with the ghost of his father, expresses a more conventional view when he asks: “Why thy canonized bones, hearsed in death, Have burst their cerements; why the sepulchre, Wherein we saw thee quietly inurn’d, Hath oped his ponderous and marble jaws, …What may this mean, That thou, dead corse, again in complete steel, Revisit’st thus the glimpses of the moon, Making night hideous; and we fools of nature, So horridly to shake our disposition, With thoughts beyond the reaches of our souls?” (DiYanni, 2007).
Note the harshness of Shakespeare’s descriptors, specifically the use of the words bones, jaws, horridly, corse, and the phrases “make night hideous” and “shake our disposition” (DiYanni, 2007). Shakespeare’s language contrasts sharply and definitively with Dickinson’s depiction of the quiet, calm afternoon carriage ride steeped in politesse.
In Dickinson’s poems, a certain intimacy seems to be achieved with, and perhaps as a result of, spending time with Death, or through the act of dying. We see this in I Died for Beauty, but was Scarce most noticeably. The poem’s second stanza reads, “He questioned softly why I failed? “For beauty,” I replied. “And I for truth, -the two are one; We brethren are,” he said” (DiYanni, 2007).
The significance here lies in the use of the word brethren, a word that connotes intimacy, companionship, camaraderie, and trust, and the personification, once again, of the dead neighbor as a gentleman who speaks “softly,” and assures Dickinson that “the two are one,” a reference not only to their proximity in the grave, but also to their shared loved of literature (DiYanni, 2007).
We will write a custom Term Paper on Passing through nature into eternity specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The poem goes on to create an image of friendship and solidarity: “And so, as kinsmen met a night, We talked between the rooms” (DiYanni, 2007). Dickinson speaks of her kinsman almost as a lover.
The phrase “we talked between the rooms” especially symbolizes closeness and shared harmony. Hamlet, again in complete opposition, nearly vomits when he finds the skull of the former court jester Yorick: “Alas, poor Yorick! I knew him, Horatio: a fellow of infinite jest, of most excellent fancy: he hath borne me on his back a thousand times; and now, how abhorred in my imagination it is! My gorge rims at it” (DiYanni, 2007).
The difference between how Dickinson views death, almost as a lover, and how Hamlet views it, as something “abhorred” and sickening, creates a clear delineation between the three works in regards to how death is portrayed and understood.
At this point in the paper, let us turn our attention to several interesting similarities that exist between Dickinson’s view of death and Hamlet’s, particularly when we analyze Hamlet’s view as espoused through the soliloquies. In Because I Could Not Stop for Death, the lines “We slowly drove – He knew no haste, And I had put away, My labor and my leisure too, For His Civility” make mention of the peace and tranquility that death brings (DiYanni, 2007).
The lack of haste here represents the release of death. In these lines, Dickinson points to the pleasure found in the dropping of all worldly cares and concerns. The next line, “We passed the School, where Children strove,” offers a fascinating perspective on the idea that death releases us from the struggles and tribulations of life (DiYanni, 2007).
Note that when Dickinson and Death pass the school where children “strove,” the insinuation resembles empathy and compassion (DiYanni, 2007). Dickinson feels some pity and sadness for these striving children, for all of their efforts and competitions, because she now knows that Death will eventually nullify all of them.
The character of Hamlet echoes these very thoughts in his Act Three, Scene One soliloquy, following the departure of Claudius and Gertrude: “To be, or not to be: that is the question: Whether ’tis nobler in the mind to suffer, The slings and arrows of outrageous fortune, Or to take arms against a sea of troubles, And by opposing end them?
To die: to sleep; No more; and by a sleep to say we end, The heart-ache and the thousand natural shocks, That flesh is heir to, ’tis a consummation, Devoutly to be wish’d” (DiYanni, 2007). With these words Hamlet ponders the release of death, as does Dickinson, and he clearly glimpses the attraction death offers as means to finally be free of the “thousand natural shocks” that life affords the living (DiYanni, 2007).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Passing through nature into eternity by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Much like Dickinson, Hamlet wishes for it. Similarly, in the soliloquy where we first meet Hamlet in Act One, Scene Two, Hamlet expresses a desire for death, if only as means to escape the pain of his father’s death and Gertrude’s marriage, when he exclaims “O that this too too solid flesh would melt, Thaw and resolve itself into a dew!” (DiYanni, 2007). Through these examples we learn that Dickinson’s view of death and Hamlet’s share some commonalties.
The discussion now moves on to the treatment of the theme of immortality in these three pieces. In Because I Could Not Stop for Death, immortality rides in the carriage alongside death and Dickinson. Although it is quiet, there is no sinister element implied by its silence. In fact, once immortality is introduced, it becomes incorporated into Dickinson’s “we” (DiYanni, 2007).
Toward the end of the poem, Dickinson describes being placed in the ground, where she still remains: “We paused before a House that seemed, A Swelling of the Ground, The Roof was scarcely visible, The Cornice – in the Ground. Since then – ’tis Centuries – and yet, Feels shorter than the Day, I first surmised the Horses’ Heads, Were toward Eternity” (DiYanni, 2007). It is vital to note that the poem does adopt a slight chill in these lines, when compared to its opening stanzas.
However, Dickinson’s language still retains the calm sense of peace and tranquility that infuses the entire poem. Here, her view of immortality as unending bears analysis. Essentially, by ending the poem with the words “since then,” Dickinson offers her view of immortality as a place where the dead continue to live, if only to comment on the living (DiYanni, 2007).
Dickinson’s immortality holds that she has preserved her consciousness and insight into the human condition, even though she no longer breathes. We see that in Dickinson’s immortality, the experience of time is much different, as centuries feel like a day. However, the poem alludes to no punishment, no pain, no torment, and no real death, in the sense that she does not end. She simply watches.
The treatment of immortality in I Died for Beauty, but was Scarce follows the same course. Dickinson’s immortality includes a friendly, literate neighbor who remains at her side throughout: “And so, as kinsmen met a night, We talked between the rooms, Until the moss had reached our lips, And covered up our names” (DiYanni, 2007). There is no punishment, no fire, and no fear. Instead, she has a companion who stays with her. In eternity, she is not alone.
When we look at Shakespeare’s treatment of immortality in Hamlet, we find a wholly different view of eternity, one that concerns itself with punishment, pain, torment, and retaliation. When Hamlet witnesses the ghost of his father, he asks what has “cast thee up again” (DiYanni, 2007).
This implies that Hamlet assumes his father has been in hell. The ghost uses terrifying descriptors to impart his experience of immortality to his son: “My hour is almost come, When I to sulphurous and tormenting flames, Must render up myself” (DiYanni, 2007).
Again, when laying out the terms of its revenge, the ghost’s depiction of immortality remains rife with images of pain and punishment: “I am thy father’s spirit, Doom’d for a certain term to walk the night, And for the day confined to fast in fires, Till the foul crimes done in my days of nature, Are burnt and purged away” (DiYanni, 2007). Shakespeare’s descriptions of immortality contrast penetratingly with those of Dickinson’s.
Not surprisingly, Hamlet’s musings on immortality following the encounter with the ghost of his father emphasize its penalizing nature: “To die, to sleep; To sleep: perchance to dream: ay, there’s the rub; For in that sleep of death what dreams may come, When we have shuffled off this mortal coil, Must give us pause” (DiYanni, 2007).
Hamlet’s fear of what the after life holds for him is enough to stay his suicide, as evidenced in his Act Three, Scene One soliloquy: “Who would fardels bear, To grunt and sweat under a weary life, But that the dread of something after death, The undiscover’d country from whose bourn, No traveller returns, puzzles the will, And makes us rather bear those ills we have, Than fly to others that we know not of?” (DiYanni, 2007).
How do we explain the conflicting views of death and immortality in these three works? For the purposes of this paper, let us focus on one plausible elucidation: religion.
The ghost speaks of the torment he undergoes as a result of losing his life before the benefit of confession: “Thus was I, sleeping, by a brother’s hand, Of life, of crown, of queen, at once dispatch’d: Cut off even in the blossoms of my sin, Unhousel’d, disappointed, unanel’d, No reckoning made, but sent to my account, With all my imperfections on my head: O, horrible! O, horrible! Most horrible!” (DiYanni, 2007).
Examples of Hamlet’s religious leanings proliferate the play. When Hamlet finds Claudius alone and at prayer, he stays his own hand and forgoes the opportunity for vengeance on religious grounds: “Now might I do it pat, now he is praying; And now I’ll do’t. And so he goes to heaven; And so am I revenged. That would be scann’d: A villain kills my father; and for that, I, his sole son, do this same villain send
To heaven” (DiYanni, 2007). Hamlet so believes in the conventional religious interpretation of immortality as a place where sinners pay for their transgressions, that he decides instead to kill Claudius while in the midst of sin: “Up, sword; and know thou a more horrid hent: When he is drunk asleep, or in his rage, Or in the incestuous pleasure of his bed; At gaming, swearing, or about some act, That has no relish of salvation in’t; Then trip him, that his heels may kick at heaven, And that his soul may be as damn’d and black, As hell, whereto it goes” (DiYanni, 2007).
When Hamlet contemplates suicide in his Act One, Scene Two soliloquy, he refutes his own desire to end his life on religious grounds, wishing that “the Everlasting had not fix’d, His canon ‘gainst self-slaughter!” (DiYanni, 2007).
Dickinson’s poetry, by contrast, lacks entirely any modicum of religious sentiment or explanation. Though the subject matter of her poems covers the same terrain as that of Hamlet, particularly death and the experience of immortality, there are no direct references to religion, God, or the church in either Because I Could Not Stop for Death, or I Died for Beauty, but was Scarce (DiYanni, 2007). In Because I Could Not Stop for Death, the focus of the poem is the personification of Death and the journey from one of the living to one of the dead, albeit the immortal dead (DiYanni, 2007).
Dickinson’s Death is one of us – he is not described as an ethereal being. He bears more resemble to a man. Dickinson places herself as both Death and Immortality’s equal, through her constant use of the word “we” when describing the carriage ride. Death is a part of the world, in Dickinson’s poetry; he notices “the School, where Children strove, At Recess – in the Ring” (DiYanni, 2007).
Death traverses the “Fields of Gazing Grain,” and passes the “Setting Sun,” with no connotation of fear, punishment, sin, or judgment (DiYanni, 2007). Dickinson does not mention the need for confession in the poem. Similarly, in I Died for Beauty, but was Scarce, no religious symbolism exists (DiYanni, 2007). The notion of punishment is absent.
Therefore, Dickinson’s view of death and immortality remains informed by something decidedly personal and idiosyncratic. The absence of a religious element in Dickinson’s work offers an explanation for the qualitative difference in language when used to describe death and immortality. Because Dickinson does not believe that immortality equates to everlasting punishment, she fears neither it nor death.
In conclusion, death and immortality are important themes in many of Emily Dickinson’s major poetic works. For the purposes of this paper, the focus was on Because I Could Not Stop for Death, and I Died for Beauty, but was Scarce (DiYanni, 2007).
The comparison between these two poems and William Shakespeare’s tragedy Hamlet concerned conflicting views toward death and immortality espoused by the three works, with an eye to why these differences arose, and what these differences tell us about the individual authors as well as the works (DiYanni, 2007). Dickinson’s poems personify Death as a gentleman, a neighbor, and a part of the human landscape.
Both Because I Could Not Stop for Death, and I Died for Beauty, but was Scarce depict death as a pleasurable state (DiYanni, 2007). Dickinson’s view of immortality, similarly, envisions a painless afterlife where both time and the perils of living vanish into timelessness, peace, companionship, conversation, and reflection. Dickinson’s poems cleave toward death, and her view of immortality is as an infinite gift.
In Hamlet, Shakespeare treats the themes of death and immortality in a more conventionally religious manner (DiYanni, 2007). The paper illustrates, through Shakespeare’s language principally, how immortality, in Hamlet’s eyes, resembles the “eternal blazon” that his father describes, full of darkness, sin, judgment, punishment, fire, and retribution.
Thus there is a shrinking from death in Hamlet, in utter contrast to Dickinson, and a view of immortality as an infinite curse (DiYanni, 2007). The reason for this discrepancy, as this essay proves, lies in religion. Hamlet maintains a religious view of death and immortality, centered on punishment, while Dickinson’s view of death and immortality, utterly devoid of religion, is idiosyncratic and self-generated (DiYanni, 2007).
Reference DiYanni, R. (2007). Literature: Reading Fiction, Poetry, and Drama (6th ed.). Boston: McGraw Hill.
Preposition 23: Suspension of Air Pollution Control Act Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help
The Preposition 23 states that the implementation of Air Pollution Control Law (according to Global Warming Solutions Act), will be suspended, until the employment level in California decrease to 5.5 %. In addition, the Proposition 23 suspends the program on greenhouse gas emission reduction that involves cleaner fuel requirements and augmented renewable energy.
It also suspends reporting on mandatory emotions for such emission sources as oil refines and power plants (League of Women Voters of California Education Fund, n. p.). During the period of suspension, the state organizations will not allowed to adopt and propose new regulations and enforce previously accepted regulations.
The proposition 23 received a mixed feedback from the voters. On the one hand, it was approved by the California Air Resources Board that considered it more realistic to suspend the implementation of this law due to the existing $ billion deficit leading to the rise of unemployment rates and to destruction of the economy and society (Official Voter Information Guide, n. d.).
On the other hand, the proposition was highly criticized because it could impose adverse effects on the situation with air pollution in California. Moreover, the voters believe that “…Texas oil companies are spending millions on a deceptive campaign to promote Prop. 23 because 23 would allow them and other polluters to escape accountability and increase their profits” (Official Voter Information Guide, n. d).
A thorough analysis of the situation reveals that the Proposition 23 can save workplaces and, at the same time preserves clean water and air in California; it should also prevent from destruction of economies. Nevertheless, the measure can be also evaluated as the oil companies’ attempt to promote their businesses and to reduce export of foreign oils (Pros and Cons. Suspension of AB 32 Air Pollution Control Law).
Despite the fact that there is equal amount of arguments in favor and against, the majorities of voters did not support the Proposition because they are more concerned with climate change issues. In particular they believe that air pollution and natural disaster refer to much more serious problems (Forum with Michael Krasny n. p.).
However, there were voters that explained their approval by their concerns with the economic situation in California that had considerably aggravated within the period of 40 years. Therefore, the problem is difficult to resort. Two-polar views are presented in Walter’s article called Airing Out Prop 23 where he presents a neutral position on the case (Walter 1).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In my humble opinion, the Preposition 23 has both positive and negative outcomes for the members of our society. Such mixed attitudes to the issue are predetermined by setting different priorities. In particular, some people believe that the suspension of Air Pollution Control Act will have an adverse effect on the ecological environment in California and will impose inevitable losses. However, there are people whose are more economically predetermined believing that a short suspension will improve the economic situation.
I believe that suspension will not beneficial for either of the supporters because the unemployment rate can be decreased by other, more efficient methods. In addition, there should be other methods and programs on providing clean air and waters in California that would not require significant funding. Otherwise, the secretary of state will turn out to be in a tight corner.
Works Cited Forum with Michael Krasny. Preposition 23. KQED Radio. 2010. Web.
League of Women Voter of California Education Fund. Preposition 23. Smart Voter. 2010. Web.
Official Voter Information Guide. Prop 23 Suspends Implementation Of Air Pollution Control Law (Ab 32) Requiring Major Sources Of Emissions To Report And Reduce Greenhouse Gas Emissions That Cause Global Warming, Until Unemployment Drops To 5.5 Percent Or Less For Full Year. Initiative Statute. California Statewide General Election. 2010. Web.
Pros and Cons. Suspension of AB 32 Air Pollution Control Law. League of Women Voters of California. 2010. Web.
Walters, Hedi. Airing Out Prop 23. North Coast Journal. 2010. Web.
We will write a custom Essay on Preposition 23: Suspension of Air Pollution Control Act specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More
“The Place of Nonhumans in Environmental Issues”. Summary Essay essay help site:edu
In an essay entitled “The Place of Nonhumans in Environmental Issues”, in Honest Work, Peter Singer asserts that human decision-making must include a consideration of the welfare of nonhuman organisms if we are to claim moral consistency, and he compares our habitual heedlessness towards animal pain to the attitudes of slaveholders. Peter Singer has popularized the term speciesism to describe this anthropocentric blind spot.
In situations both large-scale and small, from the location of a building project or the wholesale extermination of pests, to the daily consumption of meat for our pleasure, he notes that we ignore the pain and damage we cause to individuals and populations of nonhumans. He makes a case that such prejudice is equivalent to racism and that our use and abuse of animals for food, and for other purposes and in other circumstances is morally equivalent to slavery.
Singer begins by reminding us that, although much human environmental destruction bites us in our human posterior, our nonhuman neighbors get it in the neck. He calls us to reflect on our prerogative to limit our decision-making to issues directly affecting us.
This ignores the damage to individuals and populations of other organisms. For example, in the example of a habitat-destroying construction project, in contemplating whether and how to move proceed, should we weigh the homelessness and deracination of the animals qua animals, or merely the loss of hunting/fishing revenue?
He goes on to assert that our obliviousness to animal suffering, albeit ancient, is without logic, and immoral. He points out that believing that a hurtful action’s moral implications can be inferred from the species of the victim is exactly parallel to slave-owners’ stance towards the importance of suffering by enslaved Africans. Singer then clarifies the subtle point that giving equal weight to the interests of two individuals or groups is different from saying that they are equal.
In specifying what he means by interests (he cautiously avoids rights) requiring evaluation, he limits the field to organisms that can subjectively experience pleasure/pain. There may be scientific suggestions of botanical potential for pain sensations (and he acknowledges this), but his definition is a clear enough delineation for the current state of human knowledge. If it clearly feels pain, then its pain has significance.
Singer also acknowledges that we may assess two different lives with different values. He also admits the inadequacy of all of our current means and methods of arriving at such valuations. He elucidates his principle of similarity in the degree of discomfort which two entities experience, a concept that he recognizes poses dilemmas for measurement.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, he contends that we perform analogous comparisons regularly, taking into account such vague differences as degree of benefit from a particular action. Although such comparisons undertaken between species are even more challenging, Singer insists that we not avoid them simply because they are imprecise.
With this given, Singer challenges us to consider all the instances wherein our decision-making could be shaped by an examination of the pain potential for nonhumans. Pest control and lumbering are two examples he offers where our choices are based on cost and convenience, and could be made differently to reduce the pain to nonhumans. The most intimate relationship that we have with animals, Singer notes, is our daily consumption of meat.
The list of cruelties we perpetrate on animals to ensure swift weight gain, high volume production of milk or eggs, or meat of a character to please, is long, detailed, disturbing, and not novel to anyone in this generation. As he points out, no rationale exists for these appalling animal husbandry conditions, apart from taste and cost, given plant-based alternatives.
Singer finishes by drawing us back to his analogy with slave holding. He calls on us to ask ourselves; if we continue to eat (and abuse) animals on the grounds that their pain is less morally disturbing than that of a human, how are we different from slave-owners who held the pain of their enslaved African captives to be less than that of white folks?
Starbucks in Europe Report best essay help
Background Starbucks is world’s number one coffee and coffeehouse company. It is situated in 55 countries. The first branch was opened by Jerry Baldwin, Zev Siegl, and Gordon Bowker on March 30, 1971 (Starbucks Corporate website, 2010). This paper takes a looks at Starbucks in Europe.
How many store? Starbucks Company has over 666 stores distributed across Europe. The branches have been developed through buyouts and franchising. Though the branches are operated and managed differently they have a similar code of conduct that they must uphold always (Starbucks Corporate website, 2010).
Which countries? In Europe, the company is not concentrated in one nation but has diversified its business to a number of nations; it ventured in individual countries at different times. It is operational in 25 countries and a pilot survey is ongoing to analyse the chances of expanding to Ukraine and Italy. It is available in the following nations; Portugal, Austria, Belgium, Germany Portugal, Russia, Sweden, Czech Republic, Hungary Ireland, United Kingdom Denmark, Netherlands, Poland, Bulgaria, Greece, Turkey, Cyprus Hungary Ireland France , Jersey, Romania, Switzerland and Spain (Starbucks Corporate website, 2010).
Profits in Europe After some takeovers of businesses making losses, the company has reversed the trend in Europe and make profits. In 2007, the company made 1,986.9 millions, in 2008 2, 1856.0 millions and in 2009, 1732.6 million. This is a portion of approximately 6% of the company’s total profit; majority of the company’s profit come from United State. The drop in profits in 2009 is attributed to global financial crisis which started in 2007. The company external auditors are Deloitte and Touché; it is responsible for both local branches (United States Branches) and international branches (Starbucks Corporation Fiscal year 2009 Annual report, 2010). Profits for the past years have been attributed to sales of products in the following proportions;
Product Percentage Beverages 76 Food stuffs 18 Coffee making equipments 3 Whole bean coffee 3 There is a high competition in hospitality industry with a number of new entrants getting into the market every year.
When did Starbucks got into Europe? The group of company got into Europe in 1998 after it acquired sixty braches of Seattle Coffee Company (the company was UK based) for a total of $83 million; it immediately rebranded the outlets as Starbucks. Before opening an outlet, the company undertakes an intensive study to ensure that it makes a sound decision. Some branches are in airports and supermarket chains. To sell wide, the company has entered into a selling contract with Kraft Company which sells to grocery stores; at the same time it sells directly to large companies like Costo Wholesale Corporation.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To ensure a constant supply of raw materials, the company uses fixed price and Price to be fixed purchasing strategy. There is fluctuation of prices according to demands and supply although the company aims to be fair at all time. To acquire assets in Europe, the company used leasing method where it has leased over 80% of all its outlets. After becoming certain that a certain area has a high potential and it has been attained a high brand, then it buys such a property.
What products do they sell? The company has a variety of products which it sells in Europe they are; coffee roasted beans, drip brewed coffee which include brand like cappuccino, latte, mocha; snacks, sandwiches, Panini, salads, pastries, coffee drinks, and tumblers. The company also is a books, films and music marketer in its stores (StarbucksCoffee.net, 2010).
What’s popular in what country? The company’s products have different been taken differently in different Europe countries. Some countries prefer a product A than another company. The trend is as follows;
Portugal, Bulgaria, Coffee hot drinks (espresso-based) Austria , Greece coffee hot drinks (espresso-based) Belgium , Turkey, Cyprus Hungary Ireland France , Jersey Instant coffee Germany hot and cold sandwiches Portugal, Romania, Switzerland and Spain pastries Russia snacks Sweden, Czech Republic, Hungary Ireland, United Kingdom Denmark, Coffee: cappuccino, latte, mocha Netherlands, Poland, Panini How does Starbucks pay producers in Europe? Coffee is the main product that the company buys from farmers. It ensures that it has bought quality coffee and embraces fair trading. Fair trading is ensuring that all parties to a production benefit from the act.
This is in terms of price that the company buys raw materials and corporate social responsibilities undertaken by the company. It buys coffee directly from small scale farmers as well as large scale farmers. In 2004, the company price of coffee beans way more than double the then prevailing rate at an average $2.64 kg for coffee beans; the market rate then was1.20–$1.60.
Is it fair? The prices that the company buys coffee beans from farmers are higher than the prevailing market rate. However it can only buy coffee which is produced in an ethical way and of high quality. In Europe the company in collaboration with Conservation international has embarked on training farmers on better ways of growing coffee.
Those who comply with the teaching sell their products to the company at a premium increasing the revenue to farmers. On the other hand the company being a leading consumer of coffee has “pulled” prices upwards.
We will write a custom Report on Starbucks in Europe specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Charities they are involved in? As a matter of social corporate responsibilities, the company has a number of charity programs which it finances they are; Water conservation financing, this is done through Ethos® Water policy where when somebody purchases the brand then 5 cent goes to the project.
The company is engaged in youth programs aimed at training youth on entrepreneurial strategies. In 2009 a total of $2.1 million was used to finance 71 grants. The company has also entered into Bono’s (RED) For Charity where it donates money to assist those suffering from HIV.
Environmental protection The company has a system called Shared Plane, where it aims at doing business in a way that is friendly to the environment. The system involves the producers and local community to adopt ethical production method which does not pollute the environment. The company has embarked on recycling of its waste products up to 70%.
The move is to ensure that there are minimal disposal to the environment. The company uses large amounts of water in its productions, however in a move to conserve water; it recycles over 70% of its waste water. In the effort to reduce green house emission, the company has embarked on massive energy efficient methods. This involves the use of electricity to roast coffee beans in place of charcoal (Starbucks Corporation, 2010).
References Starbucks Corporation Fiscal year 2009 Annual report. (2010). Web.
Starbucks Corporation. (2010). “Starbucks and Fairtrade Labelling Organizations International (FLO) Announce Next Step in Commitment to Small-Scale Farmers”. Web.
Starbucks Corporate website. (2010).
StarbucksCoffee.net. (2010). Starbucks is heading to Central Europe. Web.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Starbucks in Europe by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
The statue of Augustus and Republican Busts of the Previous Generation Report cheap essay help: cheap essay help
A Roman portraiture and sculpture are characterized by specific stylistics. Each stage of sculpture and, especially, portraiture, is marked with certain elements that were a characteristic of each dynasty.
One of the brightest representatives of such portraiture is a statue of Augustus of Prima Porta. It is not only a statue of a man, it is a symbol of new époque of Rome, new tendencies in sculpture and portrait. Thus, the sculpture of Augustus is symbol of a rupture with “the worst of times” and its traditions, and it is an important mean of propaganda.
As it has already been mentioned, the statue of Augustus marked a new period when Roman Republic became Roman Empire. Everything had changed. An old Iron Age passed and new Golden Age became the riches and the most glorious time in the history of the Roman Empire. The city was restored after the last political conflict (Civil War) in the Republic that exhausted the country.
Augustus called this time “the worst of time”. Constant wars did not let the country to develop its sciences and art. The brightest characteristic of the Roman Republic is the portraiture. A realistic “face” with all its lacks and imperfections is associated with “the worst of times”.
The old “face” of the Republic was very detailed and realistic. That is why it disclosed every wrinkle and every skin imperfection to show the wisdom and courage of the person. A military prowess and blind devotion to public service were the most important traits of every politician.
The sculptors tried to reflect these traits in busts and statues. According to the rules of Republican traditions, the form of the sculpture should preset the idea that the artistic model wanted to express (concern about the nation, wisdom that he acquired during his “cursus honorum”, etc).
The traditions of the Golden Age of the Rome Empire ruined old traditions and reconsidered the meaning of the sculpture and portraits. The image of the sculpture was completely different: not “wrinkles”, but “youth” of a face and the whole pose of a statue expressed the power and greatness of a person. Now, the sculpture was a means of ideology and propaganda.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More A completely different scheme for portrait was adopted. New techniques were based on a traditional Roman art, however, it was original and innovative at the same time. These new statues emphasized the greatness of emperors, their divinity and heroism. The youth, beauty and majestic pose were the major treats of signs of power and braveness. And these are the traits that every portrait possessed.
“Augustus was portrayed in numerous statues and portraits” (Cunningham and Reich 111). The Augustus in Prima Porta was created during the emperor’s reign. It is the manifestation of his talents, authority and connection to Olympic gods.
Indeed, the statue is the best example of propaganda, as every detail, from head to toes on his barefoot legs, symbolizes his leadership abilities. The artist put into the sculpture the orator’s gesture and body proportions of a Greek Doryphoros. The impression as if Augustus speaks to his people and shows them his justice and wisdom.
He looks younger than he really was because youth and brave look of his eyes symbolize his greatness. These features make the statue completely different from the republic statues. In Republic architects considered that and faded and calm look symbolized the wisdom of a king. “New” statue used the pose and “activeness” to express this feature, moreover, it showed that the emperor was ready for radical actions for the sake of his people.
Another feature that distinguishes the statue of Augustus from works of the Republic period is the presence of additional attributes of power and “divinity” of the emperor. The first one is the statue of Cupid, which rides a dolphin. It shows the emperor’s consanguinity with the goddess Venus. It indicated that Augustus, as well as Aeneas, who was the founder of Rome, and Cupid himself, was the son of Aphrodite. Consequently, he was the only and competent ruler of the Empire.
The breastplate is the most significant detail of the statue. The reliefs show his great achievements, victories and people conquered. There, we can see the reliefs of the goddess Diana, Augustus’ patron, Apollo, two sphinx that signified the victory over Cleopatra and many other significant figures from life of Roman Empire. The breastplate is the most significant propagandistic detail of the sculpture.
The Augustus of Prima Porta is one of the brightest examples of early propaganda. In addition, it is not only a symbol of power and divinity of the emperor, it is a symbol of new era without old traditions of life, art and politics.
We will write a custom Report on The statue of Augustus and Republican Busts of the Previous Generation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Cunningham, Lawrence S. and John J. Reich. Culture and Values: A Survey of the Humanities. vol. 1. 7th ed. Boston: Cengage Learning. 2009.
Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) Systems Research Paper a level english language essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Types of UPS
Characteristics of a UPS system
Objectives of a UPS System for Emergency Medical Dispatcher
UPS System Management
Introduction Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) is a device that supports electronic equipments such as computers or other intelligent systems such as automated machines, when there are some power faults.
Uninterruptable Power Supply system forms an interface between the power utility and the equipment that requires protection from the energy uncertainties. The equipment running under the UPS gets supply of power for several minutes before switching the power to an alternative or emergency power options such as batteries in case of electric failures.
In line with Godse and Bakshi (2009), the main function of the UPS is to smooth out voltage and eliminate sever risks such as power disturbances or circuit damages. Good examples of these risks include the slit second power losses that can cause a computer to restart. Others include long power outages, under voltage, over voltage, lightening and short time spikes of the voltage, which can easily damage equipments (Godse and Bakshi, 2009).
This research paper forms an analysis of the Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) system used in emergency dispatch centres, and mainly forms a close reference to the hospital dispatch centres. The centres are Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) or the Emergency Medical Services (EMS).
Types of UPS A UPS is able to stabilize voltage and maintain a certain level of energy flow for a short or a longer while depending on the size, whenever there are power attenuations or fluctuation. The emergency battery in the system helps to maintain supply until the system is switches either manually or automatically to a stable alternative source of energy.
In support of the medical automated systems, some of these UPS systems have a direct connection to the equipment and automatically enhances transfer of power source to an alternative, thus avoiding possible data losses due to shut downs (Schmidt, 2002).
In general, there are three types of UPS systems. To begin with is the offline UPS that have a connection through an electrical transition. The normal electrical voltage continuously recharges the system batteries and the system comes into action whenever there are fluctuations of the electric voltage.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The system fails to protect the system against the power failures due to slow response time. It consumes more time opening and closing the relay time. The second type is the online system that constantly regulates the amount of voltage coming in due to its series connection to the equipment.
Lastly is the line interactive UPS, which has a hybrid technological framework. The UPS connects in parallel with the electronic equipment and has a monitory system to detect high or low voltage supplies and consequently supply compensating voltage (Schmidt, 2002). In considering the automated Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) or the Emergency Medical Services (EMS), the third type would be most viable to implement.
Characteristics of a UPS system The power protection support accorded by the UPS systems is in VA (Volt-Ampere) (Schmidt, 2002). An Emergency Medical Dispatcher (EMS) is a critical application machine that relies heavily on the respondents. For such vital connections, it is advisable to consider a support system that has a 1.6 times more capacity of power supply than consumption by the equipments connected to it. It is also critical to choose a UPS that has enough sockets to support devices that ought to be connected. Different UPS systems have different connectors such as the network, USB or the parallel connectors. Some of these ties are smart ties to control or instruct devices to safely shutdown, especially when the there are prolonged interruptions. However, the UPS systems do not support the telephone connections. This means that lightning can still affect a computer system that has telephone connections for the modem (Schmidt, 2002). It is thus advisable to have lighting arrestors to safeguard the machines.
The Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) is often important for accurate direction and transportation of ill patients or the injured. They also assist in dispatching of medical personnel/technicians through the paramedic programs to the needy emergency centres.
Due to this form of coordination, dispatch centres require constant power supply and in its support, a series of UPS systems can offer the required sufficiency until connection to a stable alternative source. UPS systems connected in series can supply electrical power for long periods before the generators can take over. In such cases, it is important to store the UPS in a different ‘self-sufficient’ room next to the generator especially when the system is manual.
Objectives of a UPS System for Emergency Medical Dispatcher Electric power supplies often suffer from network overloads, emergency interruptions and accidents that can cause blackouts, frequent drifts, sags, power swells, brownouts, surges and spikes (Gregory, 2009). Most electrical equipments can tolerate majority of this faults, while others delicate systems such as the Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) or the Emergency Medical Services (EMS) are critical due to the dispatching functions.
Think of a situation where a person is in urgent need of medical assistance and therefore the dispatcher must provide planned or scripted pre-arrival instructions before the dispatched team arrives for the rescue services, then the power breaks before administration of assistance. Worse still would be the interferences of the medical self-help program and the assistant cannot give out the quality assurance procedures. Power interruptions can interfere with dispense recordings and telephone conversations.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) Systems specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) installations require stable continuity of power supply, since it cannot tolerate any form of faults due to compromise on health. Some of the emergency cases for the dispatch units cater for the emergency labour cases during pregnancy or childbirth, cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) or chocking.
There are some vital requirements for a UPS system in support of an Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) system/machine. To begin with is the need for the hold-up period. The time mainly depends on the conversion time.
The capacitive and inductive elements of a UPS can only store power for a certain limited time-frame for instance, an efficient switch-mode period for such an equipment ranges between ten and thirty minutes. Secondly, the time required for transfer from the main power switch to batteries or generator if it is not the automatic switching system. This time ought to be less than the period the application can hold-up, for provision of a safe margin.
The Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) or the Emergency Medical Services (EMS) is more sensitive compared to normal computerised system and therefore requires more time to allow for safe changeover margins. It is also crucial to consider the power handling abilities of the system. The UPS must supply normal power consumptions over the specified conversion interlude during emergency periods.
The UPS must equally cater for the inrush power. This is a common input power requirement since the new input supplier may fail to produce as per the expectations at the initial point. The effect occurs due to the charge uploads (Gregory, 2009).
Regulation of power occurs when there is a proper power stipulation thus the voltage supply is free from ripple, attenuation and electrical noise. Some of the conversion systems require total isolation between the UPS output and the input power suppliers. This also assists to maintain the right load sequencing to minimize chances for inrush currents that can be fatal to machines.
Before installing a UPS, it is furthermore very important to know the time taken for the system to recharge after current usage. This caters for cases when there are frequent interruptions. Lastly, one must consider the ability to perform a hot-swap. Hot-swap is a manual changeover done while the power is in use especially when there is need to change the battery packs.
UPS topologies The basic elements of a UPS system are chargers, batteries and an inverter. These elements apply for all the three topologies. The first topology is the stand-by or off-line UPS system. They are mainly for the basic power protections, where the UPS provides a direct connection of power to the load.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) Systems by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More “A main direct current line maintains the charge of batteries during low voltage […], the inverter turns on, to have power loads directly from batteries” (Gregory, 2009). The topology is not suitable for the Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) because the conversion period might prolong and thus disrupt operations. The lack of fulltime conditioning of the power is also a loophole for simple filters, spikes and electric noises (Gregory, 2009).
The second topology is the online UPS system. The system has no power breakups and supports zero transfer periods. This means that the system has better frequency regulation mechanisms and voltage supports, compared to the offline or the interactive UPS systems. In this system, the main power has provisions with a double direct power lines, as a concurrent support to both the charger and inverter.
This means that the topology has a permanent power supply, which provides alternating current for the application (Gregory, 2009). This is the automatic switching required for medically approved dispatch protocols, such that when there is failure, the inverter gets power from the direct current supply of the batteries. The AC-DC conversion provides the fulltime conditioning where certification remains safe from all forms of disturbances.
The system is mainly an implementation in major emergency cases such as Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD), where any form of conversion delay is unacceptable. The systems are more costly to acquire, implement and maintain due to high rates of consumptions and heat generation.
Lastly are the interactive UPS systems, which have the offline inverters as well as transformers to provide output power during shortage. The transformer acts as a power conditioner but provides powers output just for a while, to increase the holdup time.
UPS System Management Business or organization pressure such as need to have a stable dispensing machine often requires introduction of alternative sources of sustainable energy. There are various benefits of adopting and complying with new incentives of UPS systems for alternative supports. It is imperative for an Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) to have stable power conversion system. Such a system suffers huge losses from short power cuts.
The system requires medically permitted dispatching protocols where there must be clarification procedures to qualify any form of dispatch. The trained professionals provide first-hand responses. It is vital to have the UPS systems that offers strong workbench with high power levels. The sensitivity of the system calls for high-level power controls because even the smallest amount of power change such as surge can cause a big difference due to emergency programs interruptions (Schmidt, 2002).
Conclusion Today it is easy and cheap to achieve the best technological changeover systems, since there are constant modernization and introduction of new elements of the UPS systems, thus making energy saving more easier to achieve. The current technological advancement presents the new modular UPS system, which enhance full cover up of the power load requirement for a long period.
The importance of load requirement depends on the quality of the UPS. Current technology provides modular systems that have ability to involve dynamic changes and cater for critical requirements of power load, thus allowing continual efficiency and stability.
The Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) also depends on various transactional systems such as the UPS. Alternating current failures automatically calls for direct conversions to alternative means. Today’s new modular designs provide a better level and approximately 94% of the medical dispatch units utilize UPS to support the pre-arrival programs or instructions and supports improved efficiency due to real-time dispatch of personnel.
The quantity of UPS has also reduced, thus making them more mobile and compatible to most environments. Emergency Medical Dispatchers (EMD) is today emergency medical care; it has caused evolution of the medical centres to become centres of EMS assistance. They explicitly assist both the public and dispatch personnel in their roles.
References Godse, A. Bakshi, U. (2009). Electronic Circuits and Applications. (Fourth Ed). New Zealand, Australia: Technical Publications. Print.
Gregory, P. (2009). CISSP Guide to Security Essentials. Canada: Cengage Learning Publishers. Print.
Schmidt, C. (2002). The Complete Computer Upgrade
Totalitarianism and Soviet Russia Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help
A few years after cessation of the 1st world war, democracy was viewed as the best way of governing countries in Europe. During this time, tyrannical governments in “Russia, Germany and Austria” were brought down and substituted with republics (Shlapentokh 70). As such, all the 7 states formed in Europe were republics in nature and democracy seemed to take its toll.
However, a drastic turn of events occurred and many states which had embraced democracy fell under dictatorship. Only England and France retained democratic type of government (Paul 131). Italy and Germany were thereafter seen as Fascist countries while Russia (Soviet Union) was viewed as a Communist nation.
The official name of Soviet Union was “The Union of Soviet Socialist Republics (U.S.S.R.)” (Shlapentokh 70). Soviet Union extended from “the Baltic and Black Seas to the Pacific Ocean”. The first political party to reign in Russia was Bolshevik party which was led by Vladimir Lenin. Soon after seizing power, the party attuned its strategy in order to agree with citizens’ needs and remain in supremacy. On that note, it changed its name to “Russian Communist Party of the Bolsheviks” during the third month of the year 1918.
In addition, the party leader approved a number of rulings so as to gratify the pressing needs of Russian citizens. This involved donating pieces of land to the poor, allowing employees to take control of industries and permitting people to work for a maximum of eight hours per day (Paul 138). Further, Lenin disclaimed covert agreement and foreign debts although he sought peace with Germany. All these efforts got massive backing from the citizens as their wishes were being realized.
Later on, Vladimir Lenin acknowledged citizens will to hold an election for Constituent assembly. People voted in favor of Social Revolutionaries and Mensheviks while Lenin’s party secured a quarter of all the votes cast (Curtis 197). Following the humiliating defeat, Lenin used the Red Guard to forcibly disband the Assembly thereby gaining temporally control over the situation although some resistance still persisted.
There was more trouble as Lenin signed “Brest-Litovsk peace treaty” with Germany in search of peace where Russia lost big chunks of land and iron deposits (Shlapentokh 79). This made Lenin’s opponents to feel disgruntled and civil war erupted and lasted until 1922. This war was mainly between the white and red Russians although foreign governments, backed by their own reasons, interfered with it in support of white Russians.
The fight was more serious in five locations which included “Caucasus and Southern Russia, in the Ukraine, in the Baltic, in Northern Russia (Murmansk and Archangel) and in Siberia” (Shlapentokh 85). Lenin won the battle due to factors like support from workers, better coordination by his soldiers, and use of psychological torture as well as reorganization of the economy among other reasons.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This was followed by serious famine as farmers lost hope in agriculture. In addition, factory workers lost commitment due to lack of wages and this led to reduced output. Further, trade declined due to disintegration of communication and transport systems.
During this time, “Communist Party of Soviet Union” was the only legalized organization and it proposed the introduction of “local and regional” democratic administrations (Meissner 123). Precisely, party organs at those levels of governance were to be in control in such areas.
Supreme Soviet was the uppermost legislative organ while the senior most executive organ was the ‘Politburo’. The government controlled people through underground policing. The law enforcers in this case would locate political rebels and eject them from the party or charge them for ‘counter-revolutionary’ involvements.
Lenin succumbed to death in 1924 and Joseph Stalin acquired control which he exercised until 1953 when he died. Joseph Stalin acted as a supreme leader between 1929 and 1953. In his era, 3.7million citizens were accused and jailed due to perceived felonies of counter revolution (Meissner 110). This included 0.6 million people who received life jail terms, 0.8 million individuals who were jailed to extradition and 2.4million citizens who were jailed to detention centers and work facilities.
During Stalin’s era, the 2nd world war emerged and the Soviet Union army was found unprepared. To maintain control in the Eastern parts of Europe, the leader organized the “Molotov-Ribbentrop Pact with Germany on August, 1939”.
A covert treaty handed “Eastern Poland, Finland, and Estonia” to Soviet Union while “Lithuania and Western Poland” were handed to Germany (Paul 150). In September, both the Soviet Union and Germany raided Poland. In the same month, Finland was attacked by the Soviet Union and this led to Emergence of Winter war.
In 1936, the president of Germany, Hitler, condemned “Jewish Communism in My Struggle” and expressed his intention to attack Soviet Union (Curtis 195). This prompted Stalin to seek support from Western democracies. He enticed those nations by giving the constitution to the Russian citizens as a sign of democracy.
We will write a custom Essay on Totalitarianism and Soviet Russia specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Hitler raided Russia in 1941and Stalin’s army put up a brave fight although the Nazi’s were highly advancing. Majority of Russian soldier were captured as war prisoners. Soon, the German army had surrounded Moscow but their surge was effectively checked by “winter and a Soviet counter-offensive” (Shlapentokh 91). Since then, Russian military rescued it land and even captured Berlin in 1945.
Leaders who came after Stalin acted more like socialists than dictators. In Leonid’s era, USSR assault to support Afghanistan was commenced in December of the year 1979. In 1985, the president, Mikhail Gorbachev, tried to resurrect the dying communist regime through minimizing rivalry with US and lowering the level of political hounding.
However, communist principle of centralized ritual management of the financial system was not abandoned. Mikhail’s main guiding principles “were Glasnost -openness, and Perestroika –restructuring” (Meissner 117). However, these policies were ineffective and the fall of USSR was witnessed in 1991. The Russian citizens favored capitalism instead communism.
Poor decisions involving various policies led to disintegration of USSR. These involved poor management of economy, labor force and foreign interactions among others. To date, the relationship between Russia and some western countries is strained. However, Moscow is still trying to recapture its lost glory.
Works Cited Curtis, M. Totalitarianism. New Jersey: Transaction, Inc., 1987. Print.
Meissner, B. The Communist Party of the Soviet Union: party leadership, organization, and ideology. United States: University of Virginia, 2008. Print.
Paul, Ellen, F. Totalitarianism at the crossroads. United States: Social Philosophy and Policy Center and by Transaction Publisher, 1989. Print.
Shlapentokh, V. A normal totalitarian society: how the Soviet Union functioned and how it collapsed. New York: M.E. Sharpe, Inc., 2001. Print.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Totalitarianism and Soviet Russia by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More
Notes for Dante’s Works Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help
Table of Contents Dante’s Moral Stand
Importance of the Church and State’s Co Existence
Dante’s Inferno follows the example of Homa’s Ilioad because it begins at the middle of Dante’s life, makes a quick flash forward of his life and then comes to a quick end. The middle of Dante’s life is characterized by the time he lost his way in life; at a presumable age of 35, which marked the middle of a hypothetical 70 years lifespan.
The setting was in the Easter of 1300 AD but Dante did not make it to his 70-year lifespan (because he died from Malaria at the age of fifty-four) (Gutchess 1). Dante’s literary piece (Inferno) is an unprecedented work because seldom did writers of his time start a literary work by narrating their own life experiences (Gutchess 1).
Nonetheless, since the Middle Ages, many writers have taken the cue and now follow Dante’s footsteps. Some of the medieval dream visions that exist today are diverse and may be sampled by Langlard’s Piers Ploughman, Wordsworth’s Prelude among other conventional literary writers.
The subject and inspiration of Inferno are all conceptualized in the first paragraph of the poem where the author lets the readers know he is about to narrate everything he saw in a vision (Alighieri 2). However, unique to Dante, the author does not talk about some superficial being, but himself. In other contexts, it can be analyzed that Dante speaks of his experiences in the vision as he personally witnessed it.
The subjectivity of this epic is unique when analyzed with other similar literary pieces of his time. For instance, classical poets normally talked about how certain beings sang to them or how certain supernatural forms of man or muses spoke to the authors; however, in Dante’s works, the muses are actually Beatrice Portinari and Virgil (Alighieri 3).
These two individuals guide Dante throughout the narration and unlike other literary pieces; they do not recite the poem. Some observers note that Beatrice and Virgil actually guide and teach Dante along the way but the author reports on the details of this encounter because he exposes what the two showed him during his trip through hell and the Garden of Eden.
However, Beatrice Portinari represents the author’s idea of a being with divine wisdom, but at the same time, she is the author’s partner in the sharing of courtly love. Dante first set eyes on Beatrice when he was still very young and when she died at the age of 25, Dante was inspired to write a novel about her in one of his works tiled: Vita Nuova (Gutchess 10).
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Nonetheless, Inferno was written at a time when the author was working as a municipal officer in the city of Florence, and considering the poem has a lot of reference to religious principles, Christianity acted as the official background to the literary piece; a concept which other poets such as Plato have used in their works (Gutchess 3).
This is why Dante’s Inferno, ought to be openly understood that it was not written as a philosophical work but to enforce religious doctrines. In the same religious context, Dante introduces Inferno from the religious perception of Catholic’s Holy Thursday which is referred in other contexts as “the dark wood period” to signify a timeline just preceding Jesus’ crucifixion (Gutchess 3).
This background can also be equated to the spring equinox period where the sun shines from the constellation of Aries because in the same setting, Dante travels practically the whole Friday and throughout Saturday with Virgil. Nonetheless, from the religious context, Dante represents a framework of virtues, vices and morality from his personal view on morality and judgment.
Dante’s Moral Stand Dante’s stand on morality is represented from his perception of crimes done against God. Dante represents the contravention of God’s laws to persecution and agony which are characteristic of hell. He makes the readers understand that evil is a moral sin and it is regarded just like any type of sin because immorality is in contravention of the will of God; however, in the same regard, it is not possible to judge the will of God.
Conversely, Dante lets his readers know that an otherworldly hell would follow his representation of hell. His trip through hell, while in the company of Virgil, represents his allegorical representation of the hierarchy of pain and suffering associated with wrongful acts, and to a large extent, Dante represents the Old Testament teachings on morality and judgment which can be best represented through the “eye to eye” or “tooth to tooth” philosophy.
In this regard, Dante identifies certain moral offenders in Inferno who are depicted as serving punishments that befit the offences they committed, and in a way that reflects the nature of their sin. For example, Dante equates the moral sin of homosexuality to walking on hot sand. This is Dante’s way of pointing out that the moral sin of homosexuality directly befits the punishment of walking on hot sand.
Human suffering and subsequent judgment given to those who fail to observe God’s instructions is justifiable according to Dante. The type of punishment given for any moral sin does not therefore occur randomly because Dante observes that morality is judged from the most serious offences to the lightest. These variations are represented from Dante’s segmentation of hell to suit the different type of moral offenders.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Notes for Dante’s Works specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In this regard, Trombley (cited in Gutchess 5) notes that: “In Dante’s view there are three major divisions of the circles of Hell, populated by those who give into their lesser instincts and desires, those that refuse God, and those that intentionally do harm to themselves or others by physical or deceptive means”.
In Dante’s perception of morality and punishment, it can be analyzed that under the issue of evil and God’s will, those who give in to their instincts and desires contravene God’s will and attract punishments that befit their moral sin while people who refuse the will of God and those who intentionally do harm to their neighbors, all manifest the levels of punishment and morality.
Virgil is seen as falling in the category of people who don’t have enough faith in God and this is why he was unable to guide Dante into the Garden of Eden. To a large extent, this can be seen as his punishment for not having enough belief in Christ.
In this regard, it is clearly evident that from Dante’s stratification of hell, he is able to show the level of misdeeds which warrants different levels of punishment. Through the same analysis, he is able to justify his perception of judgment. This explains why Dante comes out as a very perplexed individual; especially in the way he quantifies the degree of punishment.
For example, the stratification of hell explains why the moral sin of bribery was considered graver than the sin of murder as represented in the eight and sixth chronicles of hell. In the same manner, Dante considers acts of violence and murder as graver than acts of fraud.
In this example, the greatest moral sin that contravenes God’s will is fraud; which goes against God’s principles of mankind living in harmony. On the other hand, murder is in contravention of the love but fraud manifests as the biggest deprivation of love.
Moral Depictions In Inferno, Lucifer is often referred to as Satan and is depicted as the King of Inferno because his fall from heaven into earth created hell where he was imprisoned in. Lucifer’s multicolored face represents certain negative sentiments of hate, powerlessness, and deceit when contrasted to positive attributes advanced by the holy trinity. The triple aspect character of Satan is also representative of the three-faced aspect of paganism which was severally referred to in the novel.
When Lucifer flapped his wings, the tears of the sinners were frozen; meaning that they could not find any relief from their mourning and at the same time, greater populations of those who fell in this category (mourners) were treacherous people. This therefore means that treacherous people were associated with Satan because they deserved the same punishment because of the contravention of God’s will.
Not sure if you can write a paper on Notes for Dante’s Works by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Lucifer is also the representative being who exposes the importance of the state and the church to harmoniously coexist together because he is seen as the moral punisher of both church and political leaders. To illustrate this, Lucifer is quoted as chewing on Judas Iscariot (Jesus’ betrayer), Brutus and Cassius who committed atrocious acts of murder and betrayal; something which ironically Lucifer was supposed to reward them for (Gutchess 16).
In the poem, Lucifer is found on the roadway, but in heaven, he is seen as desiring what he cannot have, and in so doing, ignores the will of God. His contravention of the will of God is also the ticket that led to his casting from heaven into hell. Again, the will of God is hereby seen as the benchmark to morality because when Satan went against God’s will, when he desired that which he could not have, he was thrown down to hell.
In close resemblance to Lucifer is the Pope of the Roman Catholic Church who represented deceit and bribery. Boniface was the ruling pope at the time when Dante was writing his work.
He was the predecessor to Celestine V who abdicated in 1924; afterwards, the corruption and chaos Dante makes reference to, when referring to his town, Florence, began when the pope made a decree that his title as a pope was enough assurance that he had the authority to rule all of Italy. In this regard, he started committing moral sins which later saw his fall from his position as the pope.
One of his prominent moral sins was his backing of the Guelphs to take over Florence through the bribery of French military men to assist them. According to Dante’s perception of punishment for such atrocious acts committed by a servant of God, he makes reference to the pope as a de facto servant of God who was thrown into hell after he failed to heed to the rules guiding all servants of God. His destination in hell can be regarded as the punishment for his wrongful deeds on earth.
This fact is affirmed in the 8th circle where Dante points out that Boniface had a section in hell especially left for his occupation because if his poor moral example on earth (Gutchess 19). Boniface died in 1318 when Pope Benedict VI took the mantle as the pope of the Roman Church.
Importance of the Church and State’s Co Existence The leopard, lion, and she wolf represent three animals that were a hindrance to Dante’s chances of succeeding in Canto 1. These animals are representative of biblical animals like Daniel’s casting into the lion’s den and the she-wolf representation of the last days in the book of revelation.
Even though Dante avoids naming these animals in complete censorship, they can be analyzed in political terms as representing Florence, France and Papacy. Comprehensively, the leopard that was seen symbolizes Florence city, whereby back in 1300 AD it was deeply divided between the black and white Guelphs. This division is representative of the need of the state and church to coexist together.
The blacks can be perceived as proponents of the Pope’s quest to rule Italy (which is representative of the church’s will), while the White Guelphs were critics of such a move and represented the will of the state to control Florence. In this regard, they were supported by secular leaders. For the sake of their security from the pope; they had to go to extreme lengths to support secular leaders like Dante.
Nonetheless, Dante found it difficult to maintain peace between the two factions (in his capacity as a magistrate) and he therefore made enemies from both sides of the divide. As a resultant measure, he banned all Guelphs, who he thought were causing havoc, and in this process, he also banned his friend Guido Calavcanti too.
Unknown to Dante, the blacks came back with the backing of the pope while the novel’s narration during the spring of 1300 AD and its writing, three years down the line (when Dante was in exile) gives enough room for Dante to note that the prophecy of his exile was true.
The lion symbol represented France as an ally to the Pope; after they were bribed to support the blacks in the Florence conflict. The king of France thereafter reinstated the black Guelphs in the city of Florence and later tried Dante in his absence and vowed to kill him if he ever returned back into the city.
The she-wolf on the other hand represents Rome, which took control of the city of Florence in 1302 (Gutchess 18). During this period, Dante is exiled in an unknown foreign land because he feared for his life; considering he opposed the power of the pope while in Florence. Nonetheless, the symbol of the she-wolf can be best analyzed to represent Rome in its totality and also as the home of Virgil who happened to be one of the greatest poets of Rome.
In the analogy, the wolf is seen as preventing Dante from achieving the highest status of poetry in Rome. Lastly, the Greyhound symbol happens to represent Dante’s patron in Verona, through Can Grande Derlla Scalla, although ironically, Can Grande represents a gigantic dog; which may imply that Dante’s patron may probably be a domesticated wolf (Gutchess 19).
This use of biblical symbols can also be perceived as representative of the need to merge the state and the church since Dante uses them to explain political intrigues. Interestingly, these political intrigues also determine the biblical destination of some of the key players like the Pope who was sent to hell because of bribery and corruption.
Conclusion Dante uses many literary techniques such as symbolism, and character casting to best convey his perception of punishment and morality in Inferno. The 1300 AD setting of his literary piece and the religious connotation of his poems is a representation of the religious undertones related with morality and judgment.
The use of symbols is a more subtle manner of representing controversial opinions and Dante uses them tactfully to let his readers know his trail of thought. Nonetheless, Dante extensively uses religion (Christianity) to form his opinion on morality and punishment. Tactfully, he also uses his imagination about God’s opinion to advance his own opinion of morality and punishment.
In this manner, it is difficult for anyone to question his personal ethical system. Nonetheless, he bases his virtues and vices on religion and integrates it with his political experiences to present a belief system that also advances his personal thought. He also integrates the ancient virtues and vices associated with the Roman Empire to reflect on his political beliefs. These attributes therefore outline Dante’s framework of virtues, vices and morality in his work.
Works Cited Alighieri, Dante. The Inferno of Dante Alighieri. London: Forgotten Books, 1962. Print.
Gutchess. “Notes for Dante’s Inferno”. 2003. Web.
Russell and Lenore’s Essays Comparison argumentative essay help
Essays are a means by which many people have expressed their ideas on a host of issues. It is a means also that affords criticisms for leaderships and governments without necessarily engaging in unlawful acts. It is a means of communication that has been in existence ever since man had evolved to the capacity that he would communicate via writing (Greetham 67).
This paper considers different issues that are presented in two essays by different authors as a critique and a study of the central themes in them. For this paper, the essays that will be considered have been written by Russell Sanders and the other one has been written by Keeshig-Tobias where the humanistic perspective of manhood and womanhood and the relationships between and among them will be of interest in explaining how these genders interact as discussed by these authors in their respective essays.
The essence of manhood is treated differently by Russell Sanders and Lenore Keeshig-Tobias in their essays dubbed The Men we Carry in Our Minds and He was a Boxer respectively. The two writers examine the role of a man in different contexts. These include male to female relationships in a family perspective, the power dynamics between men and women in different social settings, societal expectations of a man and the challenges of living up to those expectations.
The role of man’s physical strength is contextually treated differently by Russell Sanders and Lenore Keeshig-Tobias. In Russell’s world, the man’s physical strength is used to advance the family’s economic security. However it is at the cost of his own physical health and emotional wellbeing.
He works long hours exposed to elements of weather by having to carry heavy loads and stand for long hours often sustaining physical injuries. In the evenings and weekends he toils on his land and mends broken roofs (Kay et al. 34). On the other hand, the women work at their own pace in a better environment. They cultivate their social lives around the different errands they have to run. Russell perceives the work dynamics to be in favor of the women. He says he would rather hold a baby that work at the machines.
On the other hand, in Lenore’s world, the man’s physical strength has being used to the detriment of the family’s emotional security. Lenore’s father a boxer uses his physical strength and boxing prowess to intimidate the women in his life. There is insecurity as both the mother and daughter as they cower at the sight of him (Kay et al. 335).
Russell wants to run from the roles and the expectations of manhood in his poor social setting. He finds the women’s world to be more comfortable and he dreads growing up to these manly roles in his society. He is caught between the two ideas of men in his social setups; the worriers and the toilers.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The toilers work all the day long at the tiresome manual labor while the worriers work preparing them for war and eventual death. He doesn’t envy any on the roles. In contrast to Russell gender roles discordance, Lenore Keeshig-Tobias embraces the manly role and the societal expectations of the same.
This comes as surprising. Her drunkard father had often terrorized her and her mother (Kay et al. 390). Yet she makes excuses for him arguing that her mother must have had something to do with it. She hypothesizes that he is doing right.
She enrolls for boxing classes in a bid to understand his world. We see that Russell is running way from his duties as a man out of understanding of what awaits him. However Lenore is embracing the masculine world in order to understand her father and the world that he has forced her to live in.
The men in Russell’s and Lenore’s world confront manhood challenges in different ways. The failure to provide for one’s family is seen as a man’s failure in Russell’s world (Kay et al. 378). The men prevent this by working in deplorable conditions to earn a living. When they get home they work even more to mend broken roofs and till their own land.
They confront the challenges through physical work. In Lenore’s world the men run away from their challenges. Lenore’s father is driven into boxing and alcoholisms by the family strains. This explains his tantrums and physical abuse of his wife (Kay et al. 473).
Lenore Keeshi-Tobia’s father never graduated from college. This makes him ill prepared to confront the different family challenges that he is undergoing leading him to alcoholism. On the other hand education opens Russell’s eyes to the different dimensions of manhood. His perspectives had been limited to the manual laborers and their bosses.
Though television and encounter with male teachers he is exposed to men who work with their brains; the lawyers, the politicians etcetera. He has a change of heart from wanting to hold babies to become this kind of man. His female college-mates challenge him further on the gender roles (Kay et al. 287). He is exposed to the comfort and power of men in a higher social setting. The balance of power and comfort contrast to those of his social setup. In this set up the balance is titled in favor of men.
We will write a custom Essay on Russell and Lenore’s Essays Comparison specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Man to man relationship is treated differently in both works of Russell and Lenore. Lenore discusses his father taking his family problems to the boxing ring. This is often to the detriment of his male boxing opponents (Greetham 145). His driving force are personal and in contrast to the sportsmanship spirit.
On the other hand Russell examines the racial relationship between the black male convicts and the white male guards. The convicts are painted as miserable and working in deplorable condition. The guards are painted as being powerful. The bonnets of their guns are said to shine in the sun (Kay et al. 512). While the man in Lenore’s world is using his boxing prowess to dominate over his fellow man, in Russell’s world he is using the gun.
In both Russell and Lenore’s essays we find that man is often a victim of his social economic circumstances in his different social setting. The drive, attitude and perceptions of his acts can be digested form those perspectives. While the intensity of the man’s act may vary from man to man, they are often dictated by his environment (Greetham 145).
Works Cited Greetham, Bryan. How to Write Better Essays. 2nd Ed. Cambridge: Palgrave Macmillan, 2008.
Kay et al. Essay Writing for Canadian Students with Readings. 6th Ed. Toronto ON: Pearson Education Canada, 2007.
Temperament in Child Development Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help
Introduction The term temperament in psychology is used to refer to those facets of a person’s personality, for instance, extroversion and introversion, which are often deemed as intrinsic, rather than acquired from learning. There have been several classificatory schemes with regard to temperament but apparently, none has been approved in the field of academia. The historic perspective of temperament has it that, temperament was a section of the four humors’ theory, and it was believed that there were four temperaments.
The concept of temperament was very imperative in pre-modern psychology and was looked into by philosophers such as Immanuel Kant, David W. Keirsey and Hermann Lotze (Klein 553). Temperament is assessed through certain unique behavioral profiles, with a focus on those that are easier to measure and test in early childhood.
Modern scientists have sought ways of establishing the relationship between temperament and character through the use of biological evidence. However, regardless of the fact that scientists have hypothesized that there is an association between temperament and biological factors, there have been difficulties in testing this association directly.
Discussion Parents will always observe that their children behave differently in similar situations. What may work out for one child may not work out for another. Temperament is this difference in behavior as well as in personality (Rothbart, Stephan and David 123).
Thomas and Chess have been two great researchers involved in the study of temperament through a description of nine characteristics of behavior in children. These characteristics are useful in describing children’s temperament or those stable, individual variations in activity level, self-regulation, attention and emotional reactivity (Rothbart, Stephan and David 123-125).
Personality is evaluated through an interaction of temperament traits with the surrounding environment. This interaction is very vital as it determines how a child values himself and others. Thomas, Cheese and others were the first to conduct the New York Longitudinal Study during the early 1950s in infant temperament (Rothbart 1-4). The study was on how temperamental qualities influence adjustment throughout one’s life cycle.
Thomas, Cheese and others made use of nine temperament characteristics to study how each of characteristic, by itself or in combination with another, affected child’s development in the context of school, home and friends. Behaviors for each trait are progressive, that is, each characteristic is on a scale that range from mild to intense.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More It would be a cause of alarm if a child is inclined towards the high or low end of the scale. Redundancies were realized between the established categories leading to the development of a revised list that is frequently used by psychologists in today’s world (Rothbart 1-4).
Laboratory measures of fear, positive affect and anger have been used to predict temperament among the seven-year-olds but, attention has shown minimal stability since infancy. This can be associated with the relatively dwindled development of the executive attention system, whose development determines a child’s ability to control emotions, thoughts and behaviors.
The tendency of children to control activities governed by rewards leads to the prediction of greater success and emotional control in adolescence. Caspi and Silva (1995) implied that children, who portrayed a higher approach or confidence when they were only three to four years, indicated greater impulsive ability at age 18 and had a higher level of social potency.
Fearful children aged between 3 and 4 stayed away from harmful situations and possessed a lower score on social potency and aggression. Children between the ages of 3 to 4 with a higher tendency of distress proneness and who lacked attentional control were expected to manifest higher distress tendencies at age 18 (Sanson 142-150).
It is important to understand that most behavioral tendencies are innate and not a consequence of bad parenting as most people would presume. Examining of a child’s temperament is apparent in case the child shows bad behavior.
Interviews, observations and questionnaires are the tools used to measure the nine temperaments as suggested by Thomas, Cheese and others. These temperaments are measured while utilizing a spectrum that indicates mild to intense reactions in a continuous style. It is very important that parents understand their children’s temperaments and should work towards coping with these traits in their children instead of changing them (Kochanska 744-759).
The nine kinds of traits are compressed to form three basic kinds of temperaments. Around 65% of all children fall in one of three patterns; of these, 40% are deemed easy or flexible, 15% are within the range of slow to warm up (cautious) while the rest 10% are regarded to be difficult, feisty or active.
We will write a custom Research Paper on Temperament in Child Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The other 35% of children indicate a combination of all these patterns. When parents understand these patterns, they will be able to tailor their parenting approach to suit the children’s needs with regard to expectation, discipline and encouragement (Center of Excellence 2-3).
Easy or flexible children are basically calm, sleep regularly, are happy, have regular eating habits, can adapt in a new environment with ease and are not easily upset (Oates, Andrew and Clare 172-173). Their easy traits create a need for parents to spare special periods to talk with the children about their hurts and frustrations because the child/ren will not instigate such a talk.
Children who are considered difficulty, feisty and active tend to be fussy during most times, will not sleep regularly and have very poor eating habits. They fear new people and situations, are easily upset by commotion and noise and respond to situations in an intense manner (Henig MM1). Children with such disorders ought to be provided with adequate room, where they can expend stored up frustrations and energy.
In addition, they require enough space so that they can exercise their freedom of choice. Cautious children are relatively fussy and inactive and are seen to react in a negative way, or withdraw from new situations.
However, their reactions become positive in a gradual process after continued exposure. Such a child should be placed on a routine program and should be given a lot of assurance as well. Adequate time is necessary for the child to adapt to new situations so that he or she can acquire independence that is necessary for him or her to unfold (Clakins, 1-6).
Temperaments are presumed to have relative stability since birth and are deemed as be enduring characteristics, which in reality can never be good or bad (Center of Excellence 2-3). The perception of these temperaments is what determines the perception by children of these temperaments as to whether they are bad or good.
Comprehending children’s temperaments is the most appropriate solution for parents rather than blaming themselves for their children’s normal temperaments. This understanding would enable parents to guide their children in the right way as they would learn to anticipate challenging situations that may present before their children (Oates, Andrew and Clare, 171-185).
When the environment, while taking into focus people’s expectations and demand, is compatible with a child’s temperament, then a goodness-of-fit is said to exist. Incompatibility exists when there is personality conflict. In early childhood, parents can cope with their children’s temperamental traits instead of opposing them. Later on when the children mature, parents can assist the children to adapt to the world by fitting in, in their temperamental traits (Howell 1-6).
Not sure if you can write a paper on Temperament in Child Development by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Conclusion A lot of children will possess some level of magnitude on various temperament traits. However, one trait will always be dominant. Negative labels such as lazy, cry baby or worrywart should not be used. The adult in a child’s life has a great influence on the development of the child’s temperaments. Therefore, adults should take up their parenting roles in an appropriate way that will positively guide the child’s natural style of reacting to the world.
Most scientists argue that temperament is associated with genetic and biological aspects despite the fact that environmental factors and maturations affect the way in which a child’s personality is expressed. The differences in child temperament are vital for family life as they govern the interactions that prevail in a family.
The goodness-of-fit is a critical determining factor of the relationship between a parent and his or her child. It determines the harmony between them. Temperament changes across the life cycle have been evident due to family environment and life experiences which influence one’s temperamental development process.
Early socialization of caregivers and their children and especially the use of the affective tone in these relationships have a very profound effect on the child’s developmental process. A caregiver influences a child’s developmental process by helping the child learn how to take charge of their behaviors and talk about their emotions. A child will develop more functional social and emotional interactions with his or her peers if a caregiver appropriately responds to a child’s emotional needs.
It is very important that a parent reacts to a child’s emotional upsets by acknowledging the child’s distress and comforting him or her rather than negating it. It is the interactions between caregivers and their children that affect how these children interact with others. A positive interaction with the caregiver will foster a positive interaction between the child and others, and the converse is also true.
The possession of temperaments by a child is a very normal process. However, the kind of temperament possessed is very important and a parent is the key determinant of this temperamental development process as he or she is the first person, who is in direct contact with the child.
Social and emotional readiness is equally important as it helps a child in making a successful transition through a kindergarten, early grades and later in life. Social competency and emotional readiness enable a child to achieve success in school as they are able to comprehend their own emotions and those of others. This way, they are able to relate well with others and understand what they want to achieve. Consequently, they are able to become successful in school and in later life years (Klein 552-556).
Concepts of the Role of Technology in Economic Development and the Process in Japan Term Paper writing essay help
Table of Contents Introduction
Research and development
Legal frame work that support techno- economic environment
Introduction Perhaps the key prerequisite of economic development of a country is the hopefulness of a country to access to the technological advancement and innovations that seek to adapt this technological knowledge to the needs of marketplace for economic gains.
Most of the economically developed economies mostly are technology influenced; thus, the role of technology in economic development of a nation cannot be ignored. Technology is an intangible body of knowledge by which humans modify nature for the purpose of production process for an economic development. Technological advancement of a country minimizes cost, increases production efficiency, and creates the capacity for better living standards for its people (Technically Speaking, 2010, Para. 1).
Economic development can be defined as an increase in the per capita income of a country where the spending of its per capita income is on consumer durables and products related to leisure activities as opposed to much spending on basic needs such as food. Hence, a country with high per capita income and spends more on basic needs cannot be described as an economically developed county.
A major component of economic development is the citizen’s involvement in economic development process to revolutionize the basic structure of the economy of their country. However, foreign investment is in general unavoidable, for the increase in the real per capita income to be said as an economic development, the citizens of that country must play a part in the production process itself other than just enjoying the economic benefits because of increased per capita income.
Source: Ministry of internal Affairs and communications
Japan being one of the developed economies, with a per capita income of above $10,000 in the year 1985, it is important to discuss the role technology has played in its economic development.
Although other sectors have also such as Agriculture and other service activities have played a key role as it can be shown in the figure below which shows the economic contribution of each economic activity in the year 2008. Technology has enhanced more product production through increased technological efficiency, capital formation, research and development, intellectual property rights and good organizational techniques.
Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Source: Ministry of internal Affairs and communications
Technological efficiency Technology has played a key role in revolutionalizing Japan’s production efficiency in both mining and manufacturing sectors. Japan Production process is carried out with the help of machines to produce more of it products, but with the advanced technological efficient production of more and more of its products for both domestic and export has been realised , resulting to the increase in its Gross Nominal Product.
It’s continuous increase in efficient methods of producing new products in the market, thus raising its national income , has resulted to its sustained economic development. The growth in productivity has come from changing methods of production and increase in efficient use of its resources.
This is one of distinguishing important factor for Japan economic turnround during the industrial revolution as more efficient organisational and production techniques were establishment and the take-off of new innovations (Sahu, 2006, Para .3-19).
Research and development Technological advancement of research and development has contributed to economic development of Japan. Since technology is a lifecycle which after a certain period of time it loses the economic value, Japan has been in the forefront to replace its technology with the newer ones to increase its product production frontiers through investment in research and development.
However, research and development has not been a smooth process, it has taken time before certain innovations diffuse in its economy where the most important technology had a modest impact at its initial stages. The full economic development potential of a new technology development can only be realized after the capability of the technology has been researched and developed.
Japan used their technology themselves and as the technology became cheaper and widely diffused which later translated to a reduced resources cost. In an estimate, research and development in automotive industry resulted to Japan economic growth of more than 10 percent in the year 1950 to 1960 as shown below on the graph (Ministry of internal Affairs and communications, 2008, Para. 1-4).
We will write a custom Term Paper on Concepts of the Role of Technology in Economic Development and the Process in Japan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Source: Ministry of internal Affairs and communications
The application of new technological ideas for example increased efficiency of Japan manufacturing industries, along with the cost accounting represents a rebirth of a new knowledge of scientific management, which has marked an increased rate of technological revolution to reorganize the industry based on improved efficiency for economic growth (Jurica,